Skip to content

Instantly share code, notes, and snippets.

@alanc

alanc/SRU54-man-page-changes.diff

Created February 15, 2023 02:25
Show Gist options
  • Save alanc/9bb7337ee5e6a2aa641a6a0e5b0d8901 to your computer and use it in GitHub Desktop.
Save alanc/9bb7337ee5e6a2aa641a6a0e5b0d8901 to your computer and use it in GitHub Desktop.
Download ZIP
Raw
Solaris-11.4-SRU54-man-page-changes.txt
Man page changes between Solaris 11.4.51 & 11.4.54, including changes for:
30870290 WebUI docs refer to the wrong directory for site preferences
31861610 Enable unmap in comstar with a new option "Space reclamation" in zfssa BUI/CLI
34258963 zfs allow delegation to delete snapshot requires descendent flag
34261401 problem in ZONES/KZ-BRAND
34308762 enable autofs debugging with SMF
34310462 ACT service should use size in dump file at extraction
34398656 $c should show types by default
34409844 identity(8s) man page makes no reference to config/warn_days tunable
34460588 no information on move of content from motd to login-version-info
34466292 manpage for smb(5) needs to be updated for max_machine_pwd_age property
34498292 $c should cache types by default
34501468 dlstat, flowstat, ipstat, and tcpstat should use nicenum
34505121 use stash for delivering symlinks, links, and empty files to ON protos
34551606 libsuri needs support for 16 byte long EUI-64 guids
34573712 Mdb's write formats should verify the size when they can
34581033 autofs(5) should refer to sharectl, not /etc/default/autofs
34624872 ls -/ could use an option to only print verbose options that are enabled
34638833 suri(7) man page needs clarification on iSCSI URI
34655037 ramdiskadm should use nicenum/nicestr
34667260 proc(1) should stop telling that pfiles(1) stops processes
34671168 ::poke should support writing strings.
34672500 Man pages should reference name services, SMF, etc. instead of /etc files
34716157 dd should use nicestr and support suffixes beyond kilo (k)
34730009 p12split is still ghosting around in man pages
34747174 Mdb needs a way for dcmds and walkers to delcare the types they read and output.
34752548 quota should support human readable output
34755093 usr/man/.hgignore should ignore translate
34775374 kldd should be hardened against dependency cycles
34846492 Assorted fixes for Section 1 man pages
34877427 document CRYPTO_BUFFER_TOO_SMALL in libucrypto_encrypt(3LIB)
34877433 fix libucrypto_encrypt(3LIB) nits
PSARC/2022/094 Add snapdestroy to ZFS delegated permissions
PSARC/2022/103 sharectl ktrace property for autofs
PSARC/2022/139 ls system attributes verbose short option
PSARC/2022/112 Automatic Active Directory computer account password change
PSARC/2022/114 --scale option to dlstat and flowstat
PSARC/2022/129 --scale option for ipstat and tcpstat utilities
PSARC/2022/142 libsuri support for 16 byte EUI-64 based logical unit names
PSARC/2022/145 A type aware mdb dcmd for poking memory
PSARC/2022/146 update ramdiskadm to use nicestr/nicenum
PSARC/2022/154 dd should support size suffixes beyond kilo (k)
PSARC/2022/163 human readable output for quota
Copyright (c) 1983, 2023, Oracle and/or its affiliates.
Raw
SRU54-man-page-changes.diff
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/acctcom.1 11.4.54/man1/acctcom.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/acctcom.1 2023-02-14 17:42:27.045093171 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/acctcom.1 2023-02-14 17:42:44.034699624 -0800
@@ -12,14 +12,13 @@
[-S time] [-u user] [filename]...
DESCRIPTION
- The acctcom utility reads filenames, the standard input, or
- /var/adm/pacct, in the form described by acct.h(3HEAD) and writes
- selected records to standard output. Each record represents the execu-
- tion of one process. The output shows the COMMAND NAME, USER, TTYNAME,
- START TIME, END TIME, REAL (SEC), CPU (SEC), MEAN SIZE (K), and option-
- ally, F (the fork()/exec() flag: 1 for fork() without exec()), STAT
- (the system exit status), HOG FACTOR, KCORE MIN, CPU FACTOR, CHARS
- TRNSFD, and BLOCKS READ (total blocks read and written).
+ The acctcom utility reads data in the form described by acct.h(3HEAD)
+ and writes selected records to standard output. Each record represents
+ the execution of one process. The output shows the COMMAND NAME, USER,
+ TTYNAME, START TIME, END TIME, REAL (SEC), CPU (SEC), MEAN SIZE (K),
+ and optionally, F (the fork()/exec() flag: 1 for fork() without
+ exec()), STAT (the system exit status), HOG FACTOR, KCORE MIN, CPU FAC-
+ TOR, CHARS TRNSFD, and BLOCKS READ (total blocks read and written).
A '#' is prepended to the command name if the command was executed with
@@ -144,12 +143,6 @@
FILES
- /etc/group system group file
-
-
- /etc/passwd system password file
-
-
/var/adm/pacctincr active processes accounting file
@@ -176,4 +169,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 15 Aug 2011 acctcom(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 acctcom(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/apptrace.1 11.4.54/man1/apptrace.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/apptrace.1 2023-02-14 17:42:27.082412407 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/apptrace.1 2023-02-14 17:42:44.094578230 -0800
@@ -196,9 +196,9 @@
LIMITATIONS
In general, apptrace cannot trace calls to functions accepting variable
- argument lists. There has been some clever coding in several specific
- cases to work around this limitation, most notably in the printf and
- scanf families.
+ argument lists, and will not provide formatted printing of arguments to
+ such functions. In some specific cases, notably the printf and scanf
+ families, special support is provided to work around this limitation.
The apptrace utility can not trace the return value of a function call
@@ -218,9 +218,8 @@
can use apptrace to trace setuid/setgid programs.
- Tracing functions whose usage requires the inclusion of <varargs.h>,
- such as vwprintw(3XCURSES) and vwscanw(3XCURSES), will not provide for-
- matted printing of arguments.
+ Type information depends on libraries containing Compact C Type Format
+ (CTF) data, which is not present in some libraries.
ATTRIBUTES
See attributes(7) for descriptions of the following attributes:
@@ -235,12 +234,14 @@
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
SEE ALSO
- ld.so.1(1), truss(1), vwprintw(3XCURSES), vwscanw(3XCURSES),
- attributes(7), fnmatch(7), dtrace(8)
+ ld.so.1(1), truss(1), attributes(7), fnmatch(7), dtrace(8)
Oracle Solaris 11.4 Linkers and Libraries Guide
+HISTORY
+ The apptrace command was introduced in the Solaris 8 release.
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 2 Dec 2014 apptrace(1)
+
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 apptrace(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/at.1 11.4.54/man1/at.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/at.1 2023-02-14 17:42:27.127347201 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/at.1 2023-02-14 17:42:44.127307156 -0800
@@ -49,9 +49,9 @@
The at-job is executed in a separate invocation of the shell, running
in a separate process group with no controlling terminal, except that
the environment variables, current working directory, file creation
- mask (see umask(1)), and system resource limits (for sh and ksh88 only,
- see ulimit(1)) in effect when the at utility is executed is retained
- and used when the at-job is executed.
+ mask (see umask(1)), and system resource limits (see ulimit(1)) in
+ effect when the at utility is executed are retained and used when the
+ at-job is executed.
When the at-job is submitted, the at_job_id and scheduled time are
@@ -74,9 +74,8 @@
and at.deny files consist of one user name per line.
- cron and at jobs are not be executed if the user's account is locked.
- Only accounts which are not locked as defined in shadow(5) will have
- their job or process executed.
+ cron and at jobs are not executed if the user's account is locked. See
+ shadow(5).
batch
The batch utility reads commands to be executed at a later time.
@@ -115,10 +106,10 @@
For /usr/xpg4/bin/at and /usr/xpg4/bin/batch, if SHELL is unset or
- NULL, /usr/xpg4/bin/sh is used.
+ null, /usr/xpg4/bin/sh is used.
- For /usr/bin/at and /usr/bin/batch, if SHELL is unset or NULL, /bin/sh
+ For /usr/bin/at and /usr/bin/batch, if SHELL is unset or null, /bin/sh
is used.
@@ -126,7 +117,7 @@
-c
- C shell. csh(1) is used to execute the at-job.
+ C shell. /bin/csh is used to execute the at-job.
-k
@@ -136,7 +127,7 @@
-s
- Bourne shell. sh(1) is used to execute the at-job.
+ Default shell. /bin/sh is used to execute the at-job.
-f file
@@ -221,7 +212,7 @@
time
- The time can be specified as one, two or four digits. One- and
+ The time can be specified as one, two, or four digits. One- and
two-digit numbers are taken to be hours, four-digit numbers to
be hours and minutes. The time can alternatively be specified
as two numbers separated by a colon, meaning hour:minute. An
@@ -401,7 +390,7 @@
SHELL Determine a name of a command interpreter to be used to
- invoke the at-job. If the variable is unset or NULL, sh is
+ invoke the at-job. If the variable is unset or null, sh is
used. If it is set to a value other than sh, the implementa-
tion uses that shell; a warning diagnostic is printed
telling which shell will be used.
@@ -411,15 +400,14 @@
at the time specified by timespec or -t time relative to
the time zone specified by the TZ variable. If timespec
specifies a time zone, it overrides TZ. If timespec does not
- specify a time zone and TZ is unset or NULL, an unspecified
+ specify a time zone and TZ is unset or null, an unspecified
default time zone is used.
EXIT STATUS
The following exit values are returned:
- 0 The at utility successfully submitted, removed or listed a job or
- jobs.
+ 0 The at utility successfully completed the requested operation.
>0 An error occurred, and the job will not be scheduled.
@@ -437,7 +425,7 @@
ATTRIBUTES
See attributes(7) for descriptions of the following attributes:
- /usr/bin/at
+ /usr/bin/at, /usr/bin/batch
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
| ATTRIBUTE TYPE | ATTRIBUTE VALUE |
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
@@ -447,10 +435,8 @@
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
|Interface Stability |Committed |
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- |Standard |See standards(7). |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- /usr/xpg4/bin/at
+ /usr/xpg4/bin/at, /usr/xpg4/bin/batch
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
| ATTRIBUTE TYPE | ATTRIBUTE VALUE |
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
@@ -460,31 +446,11 @@
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
|Interface Stability |Standard |
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
-
- /usr/bin/batch
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- | ATTRIBUTE TYPE | ATTRIBUTE VALUE |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- |Availability |system/core-os |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- |CSI |Enabled |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- |Interface Stability |Standard |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
-
- /usr/xpg4/bin/batch
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- | ATTRIBUTE TYPE | ATTRIBUTE VALUE |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- |Availability |system/xopen/xcu4 |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- |CSI |Enabled |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- |Interface Stability |Standard |
+ |Standard |See standards(7). |
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
SEE ALSO
- auths(1), crontab(1), csh(1), date(1), ksh88(1), sh(1), touch(1),
+ auths(1), crontab(1), csh(1), date(1), ksh(1), sh(1), touch(1),
ulimit(1), umask(1), getdate(3C), auth_attr(5), queuedefs(5),
shadow(5), attributes(7), environ(7), standards(7), cron(8)
@@ -500,4 +466,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 11 May 2021 at(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 at(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/auths.1 11.4.54/man1/auths.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/auths.1 2023-02-14 17:42:27.159052815 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/auths.1 2023-02-14 17:42:44.157247299 -0800
@@ -58,12 +58,12 @@
An asterisk (*) indicates all authorizations in a class.
- A user's authorizations are looked up in user_attr(5) and in the
- /etc/security/policy.conf file (see policy.conf(5)). Authorizations may
- be specified directly in user_attr(5) or indirectly through
- prof_attr(5). Authorizations may also be assigned to every user in the
- system directly as default authorizations or indirectly as default pro-
- files in the /etc/security/policy.conf file.
+ A user's authorizations are looked up in user_attr(5) and in account-
+ policy(8S). Authorizations may be specified directly in user_attr(5) or
+ indirectly through prof_attr(5). Authorizations may also be assigned to
+ every user in the system directly as default authorizations or indi-
+ rectly as default profiles in the svc:/system/account-policy:default
+ properties.
For each user, there are two sets of profiles, an authenticated set,
@@ -262,18 +262,6 @@
2 User not authorized.
-FILES
- /etc/user_attr
-
-
- /etc/security/auth_attr
-
-
- /etc/security/policy.conf
-
-
- /etc/security/prof_attr
-
ATTRIBUTES
See attributes(7) for descriptions of the following attributes:
@@ -286,7 +274,7 @@
SEE ALSO
profiles(1), roles(1), getauthattr(3C), auth_attr(5), policy.conf(5),
- prof_attr(5), user_attr(5), attributes(7), rbac(7)
+ prof_attr(5), user_attr(5), attributes(7), rbac(7), account-policy(8S)
Securing Users and Processes in Oracle Solaris 11.4
@@ -310,4 +298,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 21 Jun 2021 auths(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 auths(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/awk.1 11.4.54/man1/awk.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/awk.1 2023-02-14 17:42:27.244511635 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/awk.1 2023-02-14 17:42:44.253689716 -0800
@@ -1352,7 +1352,7 @@
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
SEE ALSO
- awk(1), ed(1), egrep(1), grep(1), lex(1), sed(1), popen(3C),
+ ed(1), egrep(1), gawk(1), grep(1), lex(1), oawk(1), sed(1), popen(3C),
printf(3C), system(3C), XPG4(7), attributes(7), environ(7), regex(7)
@@ -1377,6 +1377,13 @@
an expression to be treated as a number add 0 to it; to force it to be
treated as a string concatenate the null string ("") to it.
+HISTORY
+ The oawk command was installed as /usr/bin/awk in all Sun and Oracle
+ releases of Solaris up through Oracle Solaris 11.4.32. Starting in
+ 11.4.33, that version of awk was moved to /usr/bin/oawk, and the awk
+ pkg(7) mediator was created to allow sites to choose whether
+ /usr/bin/awk links to oawk or nawk.
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 24 Jan 2022 awk(1)
+
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 awk(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/break.1 11.4.54/man1/break.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/break.1 2023-02-14 17:42:27.286031986 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/break.1 2023-02-14 17:42:44.315104163 -0800
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
within a controlling while, for, foreach, or until loop
SYNOPSIS
- sh
+ /usr/sunos/bin/sh
break [n]
@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@
+continue [n]
DESCRIPTION
- sh
+ /usr/sunos/bin/sh
The break utility exits from the enclosing for or while loop, if any.
If n is specified, break n levels.
@@ -62,28 +62,6 @@
enclosed loop. If n is greater than the number of enclosing loops, the
outermost enclosing loop shall be used.
-
- On this manual page, ksh88(1) commands that are preceded by one or two
- * (asterisks) are treated specially in the following ways:
-
- 1. Variable assignment lists preceding the command remain in
- effect when the command completes.
-
-
- 2. I/O redirections are processed after variable assignments.
-
-
- 3. Errors cause a script that contains them to abort.
-
-
- 4. Words that follow a command preceded by ** that are in the
- format of a variable assignment are expanded with the same
- rules as a variable assignment. This means that tilde sub-
- stitution is performed after the = sign, and also that word
- splitting and file name generation are not performed.
-
-
-
ksh
break is a shell special built-in that exits the smallest enclosing
for, select, while, or until loop. It also exits the nth enclosing loop
@@ -103,45 +81,13 @@
If n is specified, it must be a positive integer >=1. If n is larger
than the number of enclosing loops, the last enclosing loop is used.
-
- On this manual page, ksh(1) commands that are preceded by one or two +
- symbols are special built-in commands and are treated the following
- ways:
-
- 1. Variable assignment lists preceding the command remain in
- effect when the command completes.
-
-
- 2. I/O redirections are processed after variable assignments.
-
-
- 3. Errors cause a script that contains them to abort.
-
-
- 4. Built-in commands are not valid function names.
-
-
- 5. Words following a command preceded by ++ that are in the
- format of a variable assignment are expanded with rules as a
- variable assignment. This means that tilde substitution is
- performed after the = sign and field splitting and file name
- generation are not performed.
-
-
-
ATTRIBUTES
- See attributes(7) for descriptions of the following attributes:
-
-
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- | ATTRIBUTE TYPE | ATTRIBUTE VALUE |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- |Availability |system/core-os |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
+ See the respective shell man pages for attributes of the shell built-in
+ commands.
SEE ALSO
- sh(1), csh(1), exit(1), ksh(1), ksh88(1), attributes(7)
+ csh(1), exit(1), ksh(1), ksh88(1), sh(1s), attributes(7)
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 8 Apr 2008 break(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 break(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/cd.1 11.4.54/man1/cd.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/cd.1 2023-02-14 17:42:27.314611927 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/cd.1 2023-02-14 17:42:44.396305223 -0800
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@
SYNOPSIS
/usr/bin/cd [directory]
- sh
+ /usr/sunos/bin/sh
cd [argument]
@@ -29,7 +29,7 @@
dirs [-l]
- ksh88, ksh
+ /usr/bin/sh, /usr/xpg4/bin/sh, ksh, ksh88
cd [-L] [-P] [arg]
@@ -43,21 +43,21 @@
used to determine whether or not a given directory can be set as the
current directory.
- sh
+ /usr/sunos/bin/sh
The Bourne shell built-in cd changes the current directory to argument.
The shell parameter HOME is the default argument. The shell parameter
CDPATH defines the search path for the directory containing argument.
Alternative directory names are separated by a colon (:). The default
- path is <null> (specifying the current directory). The current direc-
- tory is specified by a null path name, which can appear immediately
- after the equal sign or between the colon delimiters anywhere else in
- the path list. If argument begins with '/', '.', or '..', the search
- path is not used. Otherwise, each directory in the path is searched for
- argument. cd must have execute (search) permission in argument. Because
- a new process is created to execute each command, cd would be ineffec-
- tive if it were written as a normal command; therefore, it is recog-
- nized by and is internal to the shell. (See pwd(1), sh(1), and
- chdir(2)).
+ path is null (an empty string, specifying the current directory). The
+ current directory is specified by a null path name, which can appear
+ immediately after the equal sign or between the colon delimiters any-
+ where else in the path list. If argument begins with '/', '.', or '..',
+ the search path is not used. Otherwise, each directory in the path is
+ searched for argument. cd must have execute (search) permission in
+ argument. Because a new process is created to execute each command, cd
+ would be ineffective if it were written as a normal command; therefore,
+ it is recognized by and is internal to the shell. (See pwd(1), sh(1s),
+ and chdir(2)).
chdir is just another way to call cd.
@@ -72,8 +72,8 @@
to, the PATH shell variable. cd must have execute (search) permission
in dir. Because a new process is created to execute each command, cd
would be ineffective if it were written as a normal command; therefore,
- it is recognized by and is internal to the C-shell. (See pwd(1), sh(1),
- and chdir(2)).
+ it is recognized by and is internal to the C-shell. (See pwd(1),
+ csh(1), and chdir(2)).
chdir changes the shell's working directory to directory dir. If no
@@ -106,7 +106,7 @@
directory shown is the current directory. With the -l argument, produce
an unabbreviated printout; use of the ~ notation is suppressed.
- ksh88, ksh
+ /usr/bin/sh, /usr/xpg4/bin/sh, ksh, ksh88
The Korn shell built-in cd command can be in either of two forms. In
the first form it changes the current directory to arg. If arg is - the
directory is changed to the previous directory. The shell variable HOME
@@ -147,7 +147,7 @@
The cd command cannot be executed by rksh. Because a new process is
created to execute each command, cd would be ineffective if it were
written as a normal command; therefore, it is recognized by and is
- internal to the Korn shell. (See pwd(1), sh(1), and chdir(2)).
+ internal to the Korn shell. (See pwd(1), ksh(1), and chdir(2)).
OPERANDS
The following operands are supported:
@@ -175,14 +175,14 @@
and NLSPATH.
CDPATH A colon-separated list of pathnames that refer to directo-
- ries. If the directory operand does not begin with a slash (
- / ) character, and the first component is not dot or dot-
- dot, cd searches for directory relative to each directory
- named in the CDPATH variable, in the order listed. The new
- working directory sets to the first matching directory found.
- An empty string in place of a directory pathname represents
- the current directory. If CDPATH is not set, it is treated as
- if it were an empty string.
+ ries. If the directory operand does not begin with a slash
+ (/) character, and the first component is not dot or dot-dot,
+ cd searches for directory relative to each directory named in
+ the CDPATH variable, in the order listed. The new working
+ directory is set to the first matching directory found. An
+ empty string in place of a directory pathname represents the
+ current directory. If CDPATH is not set, it is treated as if
+ it were an empty string.
HOME The name of the home directory, used when no directory oper-
@@ -208,7 +208,7 @@
ATTRIBUTES
See attributes(7) for descriptions of the following attributes:
- csh, ksh88, sh
+ /usr/bin/cd
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
| ATTRIBUTE TYPE | ATTRIBUTE VALUE |
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
@@ -219,19 +219,14 @@
|Standard |See standards(7). |
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- ksh
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- | ATTRIBUTE TYPE | ATTRIBUTE VALUE |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- |Availability |system/core-os |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- |Interface Stability |Uncommitted |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
+
+ See the respective shell man pages for attributes of the shell built-in
+ command versions of cd.
SEE ALSO
- csh(1), ksh(1), ksh88(1), pwd(1), sh(1), chdir(2), attributes(7), envi-
- ron(7), standards(7)
+ csh(1), ksh(1), ksh88(1), pwd(1), pwdx(1), sh(1s), chdir(2),
+ attributes(7), environ(7), standards(7)
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 12 Jul 2011 cd(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 cd(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/cdrw.1 11.4.54/man1/cdrw.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/cdrw.1 2023-02-14 17:42:27.349436441 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/cdrw.1 2023-02-14 17:42:44.429179844 -0800
@@ -147,7 +147,7 @@
The fast erasing type minimally erases the entire media by removing the
PMA and TOC of the first session. It does not erase the user data and
subsequent tracks on the media, but the media is treated as if it were
- a blank disk. If a complete erase is of the media is necessary, use the
+ a blank disk. If a complete erase of the media is necessary, use the
all option.
@@ -395,7 +395,7 @@
SEE ALSO
audioconvert(1), priocntl(1), scsa2usb(4D), sd(4D), policy.conf(5),
- attributes(7), rbac(7), mkisofs(8)
+ attributes(7), hal(7), rbac(7), mkisofs(8)
NOTES
The CD writing process requires data to be supplied at a constant rate
@@ -428,18 +428,20 @@
vidual users.
- To burn CDs as a non-root user hal must be enabled and the user must be
- on the console. hal, that is the svc:/system/hal SMF service, is
+ To burn CDs as a non-root user hal(7) must be enabled and the user must
+ must have the solaris.device.cdrw authorization. That authorization is
+ automatically granted to users logged in on /dev/console via the "Con-
+ sole User" RBAC profile, unless it has been removed by editing the CON-
+ SOLE_USER entry in policy.conf(5). The svc:/system/hal SMF service is
enabled by default, therefore, typically this requires no special
action.
- The user must be logged onto the console. /dev/console is also correct.
- Previously, users could log in remotely, for example, by using telnet
- or ssh, and be able to burn CDs. This would work unless the administra-
- tor had changed the default configuration to deny solaris.device.cdrw
- authorization. See policy.conf(5).
+ Previously, users could log in remotely, for example, by using ssh, and
+ be able to burn CDs. This would work unless the administrator had
+ changed the default configuration to deny solaris.device.cdrw autho-
+ rization.
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 22 Nov 2017 cdrw(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 cdrw(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/chown.1 11.4.54/man1/chown.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/chown.1 2023-02-14 17:42:27.394023198 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/chown.1 2023-02-14 17:42:44.469328029 -0800
@@ -8,29 +8,29 @@
SYNOPSIS
/usr/bin/chown
chown [-c | -changes] [--dereference] [-h | --no-dereference]
- [--from=CURRENT_OWNER:CURRENT_GROUP] [-f | --silent | --quiet]
- [--help] [-R | --recursive] [--no-preserve-root] [--preserve-root]
- [-v | --verbose] owner[:group] file...
+ [--from=current_owner:current_group] [-f | --silent | --quiet]
+ [--help] [--preserve-root] [--no-preserve-root] [-v | --verbose]
+ {--reference=rfile | owner[:group]} file...
- chown -R | -recursive [-c | -changes] [--dereference]
- [ -h | --no-dereference] [--from=CURRENT_OWNER:CURRENT_GROUP]
- [-f | --silent | --quiet] [--help] [-H | -L | -P]
- [--preserve-root] [--no-preserve-root] [-v | --verbose]
- owner[:group] file...
+ chown {-R | -recursive} [-H | -L | -P]
+ [-c | -changes] [--dereference] [-h | --no-dereference]
+ [--from=current_owner:current_group] [-f | --silent | --quiet]
+ [--help] [--preserve-root] [--no-preserve-root] [-v | --verbose]
+ {--reference=rfile | owner[:group]} file...
- chown [-c | -changes] [--dereference] [ -h | --no-dereference]
- [--from=CURRENT_OWNER:CURRENT_GROUP] [-f | --silent | --quiet]
- [--help] [-R | --recursive] [--no-preserve-root] [--preserve-root]
- [-v | --verbose] --reference=RFILE | -s ownersid[:groupsid] file ...
+ chown -s [-c | -changes] [--dereference] [-h | --no-dereference]
+ [--from=current_owner:current_group] [-f | --silent | --quiet]
+ [--help] [--preserve-root] [--no-preserve-root] [-v | --verbose]
+ ownersid[:groupsid] file...
- chown -R | -recursive [-c | -changes] [--dereference]
- [ -h | --no-dereference] [--from=CURRENT_OWNER:CURRENT_GROUP]
- [-f | --silent | --quiet] [--help] [-H | -L | -P]
- [--preserve-root] [--no-preserve-root] [-v | --verbose]
- --reference=RFILE | -s ownersid[:groupsid] file ...
+ chown -s {-R | -recursive} [-H | -L | -P]
+ [-c | -changes] [--dereference] [-h | --no-dereference]
+ [--from=current_owner:current_group] [-f | --silent | --quiet]
+ [--help] [--preserve-root] [--no-preserve-root] [-v | --verbose]
+ ownersid[:groupsid] file...
/usr/xpg4/bin/chown
/usr/xpg4/bin/chown [-fhR] owner[:group] file...
@@ -79,19 +79,29 @@
name.
OPTIONS
- The following options are supported for /usr/bin/chown:
+ All of the following options are supported for /usr/bin/chown, while
+ /usr/xpg4/bin/chown only accepts a subset: -f, -h, -H, -L, -P, -R, and
+ -s.
-c, --changes
Like verbose (-v | --verbose). Reports only when a change is made.
+ --dereference
+
+ If the file is a symbolic link, the owner of the file referenced by
+ the symbolic link is changed. This is the default behavior. If both
+ --dereference and -h or --no-dereference are specified, the last
+ option listed determines the behavior of chown.
+
+
-f, --silent, --quiet
Force. Does not report errors.
- --from=CURRENT_OWNER:CURRENT_GROUP
+ --from=current_owner:current_group
Change the owner and/or group of each file only if its current
owner and/or group match those specified here. Either may be omit-
@@ -118,7 +128,7 @@
the directory referenced by the symbolic link and all the files in
the file hierarchy below it. If a symbolic link is encountered when
traversing a file hierarchy, the owner of the target file is
- changed, but no recursion takes place.
+ changed, but no recursion into the target of the link takes place.
-L
@@ -149,9 +159,9 @@
the symbolic link to any other part of the file hierarchy.
- --reference=RFILE
+ --reference=rfile
- Uses RFILE's owner and group. If RFILE is missing, then gives a
+ Uses rfile's owner and group. If rfile is missing, then gives a
diagnostic error message and returns a non-zero exit code. This
option and -s option are mutually exclusive.
@@ -159,10 +169,29 @@
-R, --recursive
Recursive. chown descends through the directory, and any subdirec-
- tories, setting the specified group ID as it proceeds. When a sym-
- bolic link is encountered, the group of the target file is changed,
- unless the -h or -P option is specified. However, no recursion
- takes place, unless the -H or -L option is specified.
+ tories, setting the specified ID as it proceeds. When a symbolic
+ link is encountered, the owner of the target file is changed,
+ unless the -h or -P option is specified. However, no recursion into
+ the target of the link takes place, unless the -H or -L option is
+ specified.
+
+ The behavior of the -R option to /usr/xpg4/bin/chown differs from
+ that of /usr/bin/chown as follows.
+
+ If the file specified on the command line is a symbolic link refer-
+ encing a file of type directory, /usr/xpg4/bin/chown will always
+ recurse through the target directory if this option is specified,
+ while /usr/bin/chown will only do so if either -H or -L is also
+ specified.
+
+ If a file encountered during the traversal of the file hierarchy is
+ a symbolic link referencing a file of type directory, then
+ /usr/xpg4/bin/chown will recurse through the target directory if
+ this option is specified, unless the -h, -H, or -P is also speci-
+ fied; while /usr/bin/chown will only do so if -L is also specified.
+
+ Effectively, the -L option is enabled by default when running
+ /usr/xpg4/bin/chown unless overridden by another option.
-s
@@ -178,60 +207,14 @@
- Specifying more than one of the mutually-exclusive options -H, -L, or
- -P is not considered an error. The last option specified determines the
- behavior of chown.
-
-
- The following options are supported for /usr/xpg4/bin/chown:
-
- -f Force. Does not report errors.
-
-
- -h If the file is a symbolic link, this option changes the owner of
- the symbolic link. Without this option, the owner of the file
- referenced by the symbolic link is changed.
-
-
- -H If the file specified on the command line is a symbolic link ref-
- erencing a file of type directory, this option changes the group
- of the directory referenced by the symbolic link and all the
- files in the file hierarchy below it. If a symbolic link is
- encountered when traversing a file hierarchy, the group of the
- target file is changed, but no recursion takes place.
-
-
- -L If the file is a symbolic link, this option changes group of the
- file referenced by the symbolic link. If the file specified on
- the command line, or encountered during the traversal of the file
- hierarchy, is a symbolic link referencing a file of type direc-
- tory, then this option changes the group of the directory refer-
- enced by the symbolic link and all files in the file hierarchy
- below it.
-
+ If more than one of the -H, -L, or -P options is specified, the last
+ option specified determines the behavior of chown, and the previous
+ options are ignored.
- -P If the file specified on the command line or encountered during
- the traversal of a file hierarchy is a symbolic link, this option
- changes the group of the symbolic link. This option does not fol-
- low the symbolic link to any other part of the file hierarchy.
-
- -R Recursive. chown descends through the directory, and any subdi-
- rectories, setting the specified group ID as it proceeds. When a
- symbolic link is encountered, the group of the target file is
- changed, unless the -h or -P option is specified. Unless the -H,
- -L, or -P option is specified, the -L option is used as the
- default mode.
-
-
- -s The specified group is Windows SID. This option requires a file
- system that supports storing SIDs, such as ZFS.
-
-
-
- Specifying more than one of the mutually-exclusive options -H, -L, or
- -P is not considered an error. The last option specified determines the
- behavior of chown.
+ The -H, -L, and -P options require the -R option to also be specified.
+ These options cannot be used in conjunction with either the -h or --no-
+ dereference options.
OPERANDS
The following operands are supported:
@@ -291,7 +274,7 @@
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
|Availability |system/core-os |
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- |CSI |Enabled. See NOTES. |
+ |CSI |Enabled. See below. |
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
|Interface Stability |Committed |
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
@@ -304,27 +287,53 @@
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
|Availability |system/xopen/xcu4 |
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- |CSI |Enabled. See NOTES. |
+ |CSI |Enabled. See below. |
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
|Interface Stability |Committed |
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
|Standard |See standards(7). |
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
+
+ chown is CSI-enabled except for the owner and group names.
+
SEE ALSO
chgrp(1), chmod(1), getconf(1), chown(2), fpathconf(2), passwd(5),
attributes(7), environ(7), privileges(7), standards(7), mount(8)
-NOTES
- chown is CSI-enabled except for the owner and group names.
+HISTORY
+ Support for the -c, --changes, --dereference, --no-dereference, --from,
+ --help, --preserve-root, --no-preserve-root, --quiet, --recursive,
+ --reference, --silent, -v, and --verbose options was added in Oracle
+ Solaris 11.4.0.
+
+
+ Support for the -H, -L, and -P options was added in the Solaris 10
+ release, along with the /usr/xpg4/bin/chown command.
+
+
+ Support for changing the group by including :group in the operand was
+ added in the Solaris 2.5 release.
+
+
+ Support for the -h option was added in the Solaris 2.0 release. The
+ Solaris 2.0 release also dropped support for changing the group via the
+ /usr/bin/chown command.
+
+
+ In releases of Solaris from Solaris 2.0 through Oracle Solaris 11.3,
+ there was a /usr/ucb/chown command which had different -R semantics
+ with respect to how symbolic links were handled. /usr/ucb/chown changed
+ ownership of the symbolic link but not the target file. To get this
+ behavior with /usr/bin/chown, the -P flag needs to be specified. This
+ version of chown also used "." instead of ":" as the separator between
+ the owner and group arguments. This command was provided as /etc/chown
+ in Solaris 1.x releases.
- In previous releases of Solaris, there was a /usr/ucb/chown command
- which had different -R semantics with respect to how symbolic links
- were handled. /usr/ucb/chown changed ownership of the symbolic link but
- not the target file. To get this behavior with /usr/bin/chown, addi-
- tional flags need to be specified.
+ The chown command, with support for the -f and -R options, has been
+ present in all Sun and Oracle releases of Solaris.
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 3 Nov 2021 chown(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 chown(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/ckgid.1 11.4.54/man1/ckgid.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/ckgid.1 2023-02-14 17:42:27.420200818 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/ckgid.1 2023-02-14 17:42:44.503793240 -0800
@@ -83,7 +83,7 @@
OPERANDS
The following operand is supported:
- input Input to be verified against /etc/group.
+ input Input to be verified against group(5).
EXIT STATUS
@@ -109,7 +109,7 @@
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
SEE ALSO
- attributes(7)
+ group(5), attributes(7)
NOTES
The default prompt for ckgid is:
@@ -144,4 +144,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 14 Sep 1992 ckgid(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 ckgid(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/ckuid.1 11.4.54/man1/ckuid.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/ckuid.1 2023-02-14 17:42:27.450114978 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/ckuid.1 2023-02-14 17:42:44.541831812 -0800
@@ -83,7 +83,7 @@
OPERANDS
The following operand is supported:
- input Input to be verified against /etc/passwd.
+ input Input to be verified against passwd(5).
EXIT STATUS
@@ -112,7 +112,7 @@
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
SEE ALSO
- attributes(7)
+ passwd(5), attributes(7)
NOTES
The default prompt for ckuid is:
@@ -151,4 +151,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 14 Sep 1992 ckuid(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 ckuid(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/comm.1 11.4.54/man1/comm.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/comm.1 2023-02-14 17:42:27.497685177 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/comm.1 2023-02-14 17:42:44.571895333 -0800
@@ -6,10 +6,11 @@
comm - select or reject lines common to two files
SYNOPSIS
- /usr/bin/comm [-123] [--check-order|--nocheck-order][--output-delimiter=STR] [--help] file1 file2
+ /usr/bin/comm [-123] [--check-order|--nocheck-order]
+ [--output-delimiter=STR] [--help] file1 file2
DESCRIPTION
- comm reads two files file1 and file2 which should be ordered in the
+ comm reads two files, file1 and file2, which should be ordered in the
collating sequence of the current locale, and produces three text col-
umns as output:
@@ -25,7 +26,7 @@
If lines in either file are not ordered according to the collating
sequence of the current locale, the behavior is dependent on the order
- option specified.
+ option specified:
--nocheck-order No error will be raised about the sort order. Output
will be invalid.
@@ -153,9 +153,9 @@
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
SEE ALSO
- cmp(1), diff(1), , sort(1), uniq(1), attributes(7), environ(7), stan-
+ cmp(1), diff(1), sort(1), uniq(1), attributes(7), environ(7), stan-
dards(7)
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Sept 2016 comm(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 comm(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/compress.1 11.4.54/man1/compress.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/compress.1 2023-02-14 17:42:27.540861406 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/compress.1 2023-02-14 17:42:44.611972377 -0800
@@ -156,8 +156,8 @@
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
SEE ALSO
- ln(1), fgetattr(3C), fsetattr(3C), attributes(7), environ(7),
- locale(7), standards(7)
+ gzcat(1), ln(1), fgetattr(3C), fsetattr(3C), attributes(7), environ(7),
+ fsattr(7), locale(7), standards(7)
DIAGNOSTICS
Usage: compress [-fv/] [-b maxbits] [file ...]
@@ -250,5 +250,10 @@
compress should be more flexible about the existence of the .Z suffix.
+ Newer compression utilities are generally able to produce smaller out-
+ put than compress. See bzip2(1), gzip(1), lz4(1), p7zip(1), xz(1), and
+ zstd(1).
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 10 Feb 2020 compress(1)
+
+
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 compress(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/crontab.1 11.4.54/man1/crontab.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/crontab.1 2023-02-14 17:42:27.581249649 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/crontab.1 2023-02-14 17:42:44.644866037 -0800
@@ -108,7 +108,8 @@
a number or two numbers separated by a minus sign (meaning an inclusive
range). Time specified here is interpreted in the currently active time
zone. At the top of the crontab file this is the time zone which is set
- systemwide in /etc/default/init. A user can add a line such as:
+ systemwide as described under TZ in the environ(7) manual page. A user
+ can add a line such as:
TZ=timezone
@@ -205,8 +206,8 @@
Setting cron Jobs Across Timezones
The default time zone of the cron daemon sets the systemwide time zone
- for cron entries. This, in turn, is by set by default systemwide using
- /etc/default/init.
+ for cron entries. This, in turn, is by set by default systemwide as
+ described under TZ in the environ(7) manual page.
If some form of daylight savings or summer/winter time is in effect,
@@ -447,4 +448,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 11 May 2021 crontab(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 crontab(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/csh.1 11.4.54/man1/csh.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/csh.1 2023-02-14 17:42:27.662387285 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/csh.1 2023-02-14 17:42:44.697766857 -0800
@@ -195,11 +195,11 @@
lines in the command line you are typing. This simplifies spelling cor-
rections and the repetition of complicated commands or arguments. Com-
mand lines are saved in the history list, the size of which is con-
- trolled by the history variable. The most recent command is retained
- in any case. A history substitution begins with a ! (although you can
- change this with the histchars variable) and occurs anywhere on the
- command line; history substitutions do not nest. The ! can be escaped
- with \ to suppress its special meaning.
+ trolled by the history variable. Regardless of that size, the most
+ recent command is always retained. A history substitution begins with a
+ ! (although you can change this with the histchars variable) and occurs
+ anywhere on the command line; history substitutions do not nest. The !
+ can be escaped with \ to suppress its special meaning.
Input lines containing history substitutions are echoed on the terminal
@@ -472,7 +472,7 @@
Variable substitution can be suppressed by preceding the $ with a \,
except within double-quotes where it always occurs. Variable substitu-
tion is suppressed inside of single-quotes. A $ is escaped if followed
- by a space character, tab or newline.
+ by a space character, tab, or newline.
Variables can be created, displayed, or destroyed using the set and
@@ -514,7 +514,7 @@
$var[index] These select only the indicated words from the value
${var[index]} of var. Variable substitution is applied to index,
- which can consist of (or result in) a either single
+ which can consist of (or result in) either a single
number, two numbers separated by a '-', or an aster-
isk. Words are indexed starting from 1; a '*' selects
all words. If the first number of a range is omitted
@@ -1098,15 +1098,15 @@
spawns, each not to exceed max-use on the specified resource. The
string unlimited requests that the current limit, if any, be
removed. If max-use is omitted, print the current limit. If
- resource is omitted, display all limits. Run the sysdef(8) command
- to obtain the maximum possible limits for your system. The values
- reported by sysdef are in hexadecimal, but can be translated into
- decimal numbers using the bc(1) command.
+ resource is omitted, display all limits.
+
+ For more information on these resource limits, see getrlimit(2).
-h Use hard limits instead of the current limits. Hard limits
- impose a ceiling on the values of the current limits. Only
- the privileged user can raise the hard limits.
+ impose a ceiling on the values of the current limits. Only a
+ process with the {PRIV_SYS_RESOURCE} privilege can raise the
+ hard limits.
resource is one of:
@@ -1124,18 +1124,14 @@
memory. See swap(8).
- stacksize Maximum stack size for the process. The
- default stack size is 2^64 bytes. You can
- use limit(1) to change this default within a
- shell.
+ stacksize Maximum stack size for the process.
- coredumpsize Maximum size of a core dump (file). This
- limited to the size of the filesystem.
+ coredumpsize Maximum size of a core dump file.
- descriptors Maximum number of file descriptors. Run sys-
- def(8).
+ descriptors Maximum number of file descriptors. See
+ Intro(2).
memorysize Maximum size of virtual memory.
@@ -1191,8 +1187,8 @@
+n Increment the process priority value by n.
- -n Decrement by n. This argument can be used only by the privi-
- leged user.
+ -n Decrement by n. This argument can be used only in a shell run
+ with the {PRIV_PROC_PRIOCNTL} privilege.
@@ -1354,7 +1350,7 @@
stop pid ...
- Stop the specified process, pid. (see ps(1)).
+ Stop the specified process, pid. (See ps(1)).
suspend
@@ -1398,9 +1394,9 @@
With no argument, print a summary of time used by this C shell and
its children. With an optional command, execute command and print a
- summary of the time it uses. As of this writing, the time built-in
- command does NOT compute the last 6 fields of output, rendering the
- output to erroneously report the value 0 for these fields.
+ summary of the time it uses. The C shell built-in time command does
+ NOT compute the last 6 fields of output, rendering the output to
+ erroneously report the value 0 for these fields.
example %time ls -R
@@ -1438,8 +1434,8 @@
all resource limitations are removed. See the description of the
limit command for the list of resource names.
- -h Remove corresponding hard limits. Only the privileged user
- can do this.
+ -h Remove corresponding hard limits. Only a process run with the
+ {PRIV_PROC_PRIOCNTL} privilege can do this.
@@ -1549,9 +1545,9 @@
filec
- Enable filename completion, in which case the Control-d character
- EOT and the ESC character have special significance when typed in
- at the end of a terminal input line:
+ Enable filename completion, in which case the EOT character (typi-
+ cally Control-D) and the ESC character have special significance
+ when typed in at the end of a terminal input line:
EOT Print a list of all filenames that start with the preceding
string.
@@ -1639,13 +1635,13 @@
The list of directories in which to search for commands. path is
initialized from the environment variable PATH, which the C shell
updates whenever path changes. A null word ('') specifies the cur-
- rent directory. The default is typically (/usr/bin .). One can
- override this initial search path upon csh start-up by setting it
- in .cshrc or .login (for login shells only). If path becomes unset,
- only full pathnames execute. An interactive C shell normally hashes
- the contents of the directories listed after reading .cshrc, and
- whenever path is reset. If new commands are added, use the rehash
- command to update the table.
+ rent directory. The default is typically (/usr/bin /usr/sbin). One
+ can override this initial search path upon csh start-up by setting
+ it in .cshrc or .login (for login shells only). If path becomes
+ unset, only full pathnames execute. An interactive C shell normally
+ hashes the contents of the directories listed after reading .cshrc,
+ and whenever path is reset. If new commands are added, use the
+ rehash command to update the table.
prompt
@@ -1656,8 +1652,7 @@
placed after the following test: 'if ($?prompt == 0) exit', to
reduce startup time for noninteractive shells. A ! in the prompt
string is replaced by the current event number. The default prompt
- is hostname% for mere mortals, or hostname# for the privileged
- user.
+ is hostname%, or hostname# for a user with a userid of 0.
The setting of $prompt has three meanings:
@@ -1768,9 +1763,6 @@
/tmp/sh* Temporary file for '<<'.
- /etc/passwd Source of home directories for '~name'.
-
-
ATTRIBUTES
See attributes(7) for descriptions of the following attributes:
@@ -1786,10 +1778,10 @@
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
SEE ALSO
- bc(1), echo(1), limit(1), login(1), ls(1), more(1), pfcsh(1),
- pfexec(1), ps(1), sh(1), shell_builtins(1), tcsh(1), which(1), exec(2),
- fork(2), pipe(2), termio(4I), a.out(5), ascii(7), attributes(7), envi-
- ron(7), sysdef(8), df(8), swap(8)
+ echo(1), limit(1), login(1), ls(1), more(1), pfcsh(1), pfexec(1),
+ ps(1), sh(1), shell_builtins(1), tcsh(1), which(1), Intro(2), exec(2),
+ fork(2), getrlimit(2), pipe(2), termio(4I), a.out(5), ascii(7),
+ attributes(7), environ(7), privileges(7), df(8), swap(8)
DIAGNOSTICS
You have stopped jobs. You attempted to exit the C shell with
@@ -1802,10 +1794,10 @@
The use of setuid shell scripts is strongly discouraged.
NOTES
- Traditional csh may be replaced in a future release with a comparable
- shell, such as tcsh(1). It is recommended that csh users begin migrat-
- ing their startup files and scripts to tcsh, which is available in Ora-
- cle Solaris through the package: pkg:/shell/tcsh.
+ Traditional csh may be replaced in a future release of Oracle Solaris
+ with a comparable shell, such as tcsh(1). It is recommended that csh
+ users begin migrating their startup files and scripts to tcsh, which is
+ available in Oracle Solaris through the package: pkg:/shell/tcsh.
/usr/bin/csh in this release is a symbolic link which is set by the
@@ -1904,14 +1896,21 @@
message that the shell script file does not exist.
BUGS
- As of this writing, the time built-in command does not compute the last
- 6 fields of output, rendering the output to erroneously report the
- value 0 for these fields:
+ The time built-in command does not compute the last 6 fields of output,
+ rendering the output to erroneously report the value 0 for these
+ fields:
example %time ls -R
9.0u 11.0s 3:32 10% 0+0k 0+0io 0pf+0w
+HISTORY
+ The csh command was installed as /usr/bin/csh in all Sun and Oracle
+ releases of Solaris prior to Oracle Solaris 11.4.0. Starting in 11.4.0,
+ this version of csh was moved to /usr/sunos/bin/csh, and the csh
+ pkg(7) mediator was created to allow sites to choose whether
+ /usr/bin/csh links to /usr/sunos/bin/csh or tcsh.
+
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 11 May 2021 csh(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 csh(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/ctags.1 11.4.54/man1/ctags.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/ctags.1 2023-02-14 17:42:27.703001421 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/ctags.1 2023-02-14 17:42:44.750197735 -0800
@@ -38,7 +38,7 @@
The tag main is treated specially in C or C++ programs. The tag formed
- is created by prepending M to file, with a trailing .c, .cc .C, or
+ is created by prepending M to file, with a trailing .c, .cc, .C, or
.cxx removed, if any, and leading path name components also removed.
This makes use of ctags practical in directories with more than one
program.
@@ -200,5 +200,19 @@
line of typedefs.
+ The only difference between /usr/bin/ctags and /usr/xpg4/bin/ctags is
+ that /usr/xpg4/bin/ctags always creates tags for typedefs, while
+ /usr/bin/ctags only creates tags for typedefs if the -t option is
+ given.
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 23 Jun 2020 ctags(1)
+HISTORY
+ The /usr/xpg4/bin/ctags command was added to Solaris in the Solaris 2.5
+ release.
+
+
+ The /usr/bin/ctags command has been present in all Sun and Oracle
+ releases of Solaris.
+
+
+
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 ctags(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/ctstat.1 11.4.54/man1/ctstat.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/ctstat.1 2023-02-14 17:42:27.746299951 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/ctstat.1 2023-02-14 17:42:44.781042830 -0800
@@ -14,8 +14,8 @@
system.
- Unless you specify the -i or -t option, ctstat displays statistics on
- all contracts in the system.
+ Unless the -a, -i, or -t options are specified, ctstat displays statis-
+ tics on all non-dead contracts found in the contract(5) file system.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
@@ -24,13 +24,14 @@
Display all contracts regardless of state. By default, only those
contracts which are in the owned, inherited, or orphan states are
+ displayed. With this option, contracts in the dead state are also
displayed.
-i contractid...
Request status on the specified contracts, identified by their
- numeric contract identifier (contract_id).
+ numeric contract identifier (contractid).
This option accepts lists as arguments . Items in the list can be
separated by commas, or enclosed in quotes and separated by commas
@@ -161,17 +162,12 @@
The following example reports on all contracts in the system:
-
-
example% ctstat -a
-
- CTID TYPE STATE HOLDER EVENTS QTIME NTIME
- 1 process owned 100579 0 - -
- 2 process dead - 1 - -
- 3 process inherit 1 3 - -
- 4 process orphan - 0 - -
-
-
+ CTID ZONEID TYPE STATE HOLDER EVENTS QTIME NTIME
+ 1 0 process owned 100579 0 - -
+ 2 0 process dead - 1 - -
+ 3 0 process inherit 1 3 - -
+ 4 0 process orphan - 0 - -
Example 2 Obtaining a Verbose Report of All Contracts in the System
@@ -251,6 +245,18 @@
SEE ALSO
ctrun(1), ctwatch(1), contract(5), process(5), attributes(7)
+HISTORY
+ Support for the -T option was added in the Oracle Solaris 11.0.0
+ release, thanks to a contribution to OpenSolaris by Chad Mynhier.
+
+
+ The service fmri, service fmri ctid, creator, and aux fields were added
+ to the verbose output in the Oracle Solaris 11.0.0 release.
+
+
+ The ctstat command, including support for the -a, -i, -t, and -v
+ options, was introduced in the Solaris 10 3/05 release.
+
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 16 Jun 2009 ctstat(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 ctstat(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/dhcpinfo.1 11.4.54/man1/dhcpinfo.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/dhcpinfo.1 2023-02-14 17:42:27.795866253 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/dhcpinfo.1 2023-02-14 17:42:44.836858923 -0800
@@ -16,14 +16,13 @@
requested on the command line. The parameter can be identified either
by its numeric code in the DHCP specification, or by its mnemonic iden-
tifier, as listed in dhcp_inittab(5). This command is intended to be
- used in command substitutions in the shell scripts invoked by init(8)
- at system boot. It first contacts the DHCP client daemon at system boot
- or in event scripts as described in dhcpagent(8). It first contacts the
- DHCP client daemon dhcpagent(8) to verify that DHCP has successfully
- completed on the requested interface. If DHCP has successfully com-
- pleted on the requested interface, dhcpinfo retrieves the values for
- the requested parameter. Parameter values echoed by dhcpinfo should not
- be used without checking its exit status. See exit(1).
+ used in command substitutions in the shell scripts invoked by smf(7) at
+ system boot or in event scripts as described in dhcpagent(8). It first
+ contacts the DHCP client daemon dhcpagent(8) to verify that DHCP has
+ successfully completed on the requested interface. If DHCP has success-
+ fully completed on the requested interface, dhcpinfo retrieves the val-
+ ues for the requested parameter. Parameter values echoed by dhcpinfo
+ should not be used without checking its exit status.
See dhcp_inittab(5) for the list of mnemonic identifier codes for all
@@ -102,7 +101,7 @@
-n limit Limits the list of values displayed to limit lines.
- -v4 | 6 Specifies the DHCP version to query. Use -v4for DHCPv4
+ -v4 | -v6 Specifies the DHCP version to query. Use -v4 for DHCPv4
and -v6 for DHCPv6.
@@ -152,26 +151,35 @@
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
SEE ALSO
- dhcp_inittab(5), attributes(7), dhcpagent(8), ifconfig(8), init(8)
+ dhcp_inittab(5), attributes(7), smf(7), dhcpagent(8), ifconfig(8)
Alexander, S., and R. Droms, RFC 2132, DHCP Options and BOOTP Vendor
Extensions, Silicon Graphics, Inc., Bucknell University, March 1997.
+ https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc213
Droms, R. , RFC 3315, Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for IPv6
- (DHCPv6), Cisco Systems, July 2003.
+ (DHCPv6), Cisco Systems, July 2003. https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc3315
Lemon, T., S. Cheshire, and B. Volz. RFC 3442, The Classless Static
- Route Option
- for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) version4, Network
- Working Group, December 2002.
+ Route Option for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) version 4,
+ Network Working Group, December 2002.
+ https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc3442
Mockapetris, P.V. , RFC 1035, Domain names - implementation and speci-
- fication, ISI, November 1987.
+ fication, ISI, November 1987. https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc1035
+HISTORY
+ Support for DHCPv6 and the -v option was added in the Solaris 10 8/07
+ (Update 4) release.
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 09 Mar 2017 dhcpinfo(1)
+ The dhcpinfo command, including support for the -c, -i, and -n options,
+ was introduced in the Solaris 8 release.
+
+
+
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 dhcpinfo(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/du.1 11.4.54/man1/du.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/du.1 2023-02-14 17:42:27.823893149 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/du.1 2023-02-14 17:42:44.878825177 -0800
@@ -194,6 +194,56 @@
Files containing holes will result in an incorrect block count.
+HISTORY
+ Support for the --scale option was added to both du commands in Oracle
+ Solaris 11.4.30.
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 23 August 2022 du(1)
+ Support for the -m option was added to both du commands in Oracle
+ Solaris 11.0.0.
+
+
+ Support for the -x option was added to the /usr/bin/du command in Ora-
+ cle Solaris 11.0.0.
+
+
+ Support for the -d and -o options was added to the /usr/xpg4/bin/du
+ command in Oracle Solaris 11.0.0.
+
+
+ Support for the -H option was added to both du commands in Solaris 10
+ 3/05.
+
+
+ Support for the -L option was added to the /usr/xpg4/bin/du command in
+ Solaris 10 3/05.
+
+
+ Support for the -h option was added to both du commands in Solaris 9.
+
+
+ Support for the -L option was added to the /usr/bin/du command in
+ Solaris 2.6.
+
+
+ Support for large files was added to both du commands in Solaris 2.6.
+
+
+ The /usr/xpg4/bin/du command was introduced in Solaris 2.5, with sup-
+ port for the -a, -k, -r, -s, and -x options.
+
+
+ Support for the -d and -o options was added to the /usr/bin/du command
+ in Solaris 2.3.
+
+
+ Support for the -k and -r options was added to the /usr/bin/du command
+ in Solaris 2.0.
+
+
+ The /usr/bin/du command, with support for the -a and -s options, has
+ been present in all Sun and Oracle releases of Solaris.
+
+
+
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 du(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/echo.1 11.4.54/man1/echo.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/echo.1 2023-02-14 17:42:27.854194544 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/echo.1 2023-02-14 17:42:44.924271011 -0800
@@ -21,16 +21,16 @@
The C shell, the Korn shell, and the Bourne shell all have echo built-
in commands, which, by default, is invoked if the user calls echo with-
- out a full pathname. See shell_builtins(1). sh's echo, ksh88's echo,
- ksh's echo, and /usr/bin/echo understand the backslashed escape charac-
- ters, except that sh's echo does not understand \a as the alert charac-
- ter. In addition, ksh88's and ksh's echo does not have an -n option.
- csh's echo and /usr/ucb/echo (which existed in previous releases of
- Solaris), on the other hand, have an -n option, but do not understand
- the backslashed escape characters. sh and ksh88 determine whether
- /usr/ucb/echo is found first in the PATH and, if so, they adapt the
- behavior of the echo builtin to match the BSD environment of
- /usr/ucb/echo.
+ out a full pathname. See shell_builtins(1). The echo provided by
+ /usr/sunos/bin/sh, ksh88, ksh, and /usr/bin/echo understand the back-
+ slashed escape characters, except that /usr/sunos/bin/sh does not
+ understand \a as the alert character. In addition, ksh88's and ksh's
+ echo does not have an -n option. csh's echo and /usr/ucb/echo (which
+ existed in previous releases of Solaris), on the other hand, have an -n
+ option, but do not understand the backslashed escape characters. sh and
+ ksh88 determine whether /usr/ucb/echo is found first in the PATH and,
+ if so, they adapt the behavior of the echo builtin to match the BSD
+ environment of /usr/ucb/echo.
OPERANDS
The following operand is supported:
@@ -145,13 +139,13 @@
example% /usr/bin/echo "$USER's current directory is $PWD\c"
- Example 3 sh/ksh88 shells
+ Example 3 Bourne & Korn shells
example$ echo "$USER's current directory is $PWD\c"
- Example 4 csh shell
+ Example 4 C shell
example% echo -n "$USER's current directory is $PWD"
@@ -236,4 +230,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 11 May 2021 echo(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 echo(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/elfedit.1 11.4.54/man1/elfedit.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/elfedit.1 2023-02-14 17:42:27.889029893 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/elfedit.1 2023-02-14 17:42:44.964768977 -0800
@@ -480,7 +478,7 @@
cutable to the lib directory:
- % elfedit -e 'dyn:runpath $ORIGIN/../lib'
+ % elfedit -e 'dyn:runpath $ORIGIN/../lib' prog
@@ -716,7 +714,7 @@
Older objects do not have the extra space necessary to complete such
operations. The space necessary to do so was introduced in the Oracle
- Solaris Express Community Edition release.
+ Solaris 10 8/11 (Update 10) release.
When an operation fails, the detailed information printed using the -d
@@ -742,6 +740,14 @@
The elfedit command is unable to modify core files. The -r option can
be specified to operate on core files in readonly mode.
+HISTORY
+ The reloc module was introduced in the Oracle Solaris 11.2.0 release.
+
+
+ The elfedit() command was introduced in the Oracle Solaris 10 8/11
+ (Update 10) release, with the cap, dyn, ehdr, phdr, shdr, str, sym,
+ syminfo, and sys modules.
+
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 20 December 2017 elfedit(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 elfedit(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/exec.1 11.4.54/man1/exec.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/exec.1 2023-02-14 17:42:27.937262213 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/exec.1 2023-02-14 17:42:44.997371537 -0800
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@
exec, eval, source - shell built-in functions to execute other commands
SYNOPSIS
- sh
+ /usr/sunos/bin/sh
exec [argument]...
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@
+eval [argument]...
DESCRIPTION
- sh
+ /usr/sunos/bin/sh
The exec command specified by the arguments is executed in place of
this shell without creating a new process. Input/output arguments and
appear and, if no other arguments are specified, cause the shell
@@ -128,7 +128,7 @@
eval is a shell special built-in command that constructs a command by
concatenating the arguments together, separating each with a space. The
resulting string is taken as input to the shell and evaluated in the
- current environment. command words are expanded twice, once to con-
+ current environment. Command words are expanded twice, once to con-
struct argument, and again when the shell executes the constructed com-
mand. It is not an error if argument is not specified.
@@ -204,18 +204,12 @@
the exit status of the command defined by the argument operands.
ATTRIBUTES
- See attributes(7) for descriptions of the following attributes:
-
-
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- | ATTRIBUTE TYPE | ATTRIBUTE VALUE |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- |Availability |system/core-os |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
+ See the respective shell man pages for attributes of the shell built-in
+ commands.
SEE ALSO
- csh(1), ksh(1), ksh88(1), sh(1), attributes(7)
+ csh(1), ksh(1), ksh88(1), sh(1s), attributes(7)
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 12 Jul 2011 exec(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 exec(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/exit.1 11.4.54/man1/exit.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/exit.1 2023-02-14 17:42:27.973779984 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/exit.1 2023-02-14 17:42:45.026235645 -0800
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
of the shell to advance beyond its sequence of steps
SYNOPSIS
- sh
+ /usr/sunos/bin/sh
exit [n]
@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@
+return [n]
DESCRIPTION
- sh
+ /usr/sunos/bin/sh
exit causes the calling shell or shell script to exit with the exit
status specified by n. If n is omitted the exit status is that of the
last command executed (an EOF also causes the shell to exit.)
@@ -62,7 +62,7 @@
last command executed. When exit occurs when executing a trap, the last
command refers to the command that executed before the trap was
invoked. An end-of-file also causes the shell to exit except for a
- shell which has the ignoreeof option (See set below) turned on.
+ shell which has the ignoreeof option turned on.
return causes a shell function or '.' script to return to the invoking
@@ -153,18 +153,12 @@
status of preceding command.
ATTRIBUTES
- See attributes(7) for descriptions of the following attributes:
-
-
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- | ATTRIBUTE TYPE | ATTRIBUTE VALUE |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- |Availability |system/core-os |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
+ See the respective shell man pages for attributes of the shell built-in
+ commands.
SEE ALSO
- break(1), csh(1), ksh(1), ksh88(1), sh(1), attributes(7)
+ break(1), csh(1), ksh(1), ksh88(1), sh(1s), attributes(7)
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 12 Jul 2011 exit(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 exit(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/expand.1 11.4.54/man1/expand.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/expand.1 2023-02-14 17:42:28.011957776 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/expand.1 2023-02-14 17:42:45.054419607 -0800
@@ -13,6 +13,10 @@
expand [-i | --initial] [--help] [-tabstop]
[-tab1, tab2,. . ., tabn] [file]...
+
+ unexpand [-a | --all] [--first-only] [--help]
+ [-t | --tabs tab1, tab2, . . . , tabn] [file]...
+
DESCRIPTION
The expand utility copies files (or the standard input) to the standard
output, with TAB characters expanded to SPACE characters. BACKSPACE
@@ -28,96 +32,102 @@
be overridden by the -a option (see the OPTIONS section below).
OPTIONS
+ The following option is supported for both expand and unexpand:
+
+ --help Print command usage and exit.
+
+
+
The following options are supported for expand:
- -t, --tabs tablist Specifies the tab stops. The argument tablist
- must consist of a single positive decimal
- integer or multiple positive decimal inte-
- gers, separated by blank characters or com-
- mas, in ascending order. If a single number
- is given, tabs will be set tablist column
- positions apart instead of the default 8. If
- multiple numbers are given, the tabs will be
- set at those specific column positions.
-
- Each tab-stop position N must be an integer
- value greater than zero, and the list must be
- in strictly ascending order. This is taken to
- mean that, from the start of a line of out-
- put, tabbing to position N causes the next
- character output to be in the (N+1)th column
- position on that line.
-
- In the event of expand having to process a
- tab character at a position beyond the last
- of those specified in a multiple tab-stop
- list, the tab character is replaced by a sin-
- gle space character in the output.
-
-
- -i, --initial Do not convert any TABs after non-SPACE char-
- acters are encountered.
-
-
- -tabstop Specifies as a single argument, sets TAB
- characters tabstop SPACE characters apart
- instead of the default 8.
+ -t, --tabs tablist
+ Specifies the tab stops. The argument tablist must consist of a
+ single positive decimal integer or multiple positive decimal inte-
+ gers, separated by blank characters or commas, in ascending order.
+ If a single number is given, tabs will be set tablist column posi-
+ tions apart instead of the default 8. If multiple numbers are
+ given, the tabs will be set at those specific column positions.
- -tab1,tab2,...,tabn Sets TAB characters at the columns specified
- by -tab1,tab2,...,tabn
+ Each tab-stop position N must be an integer value greater than
+ zero, and the list must be in strictly ascending order. This is
+ taken to mean that, from the start of a line of output, tabbing to
+ position N causes the next character output to be in the (N+1)th
+ column position on that line.
+ In the event of expand having to process a tab character at a posi-
+ tion beyond the last of those specified in a multiple tab-stop
+ list, the tab character is replaced by a single space character in
+ the output.
- --help Print command usage and exit.
+
+ -i, --initial
+
+ Do not convert any TABs after non-SPACE characters are encountered.
+
+
+ -tabstop
+
+ Specified as a single argument, sets TAB characters tabstop SPACE
+ characters apart instead of the default 8.
+
+
+ -tab1,tab2,...,tabn
+
+ Sets TAB characters at the columns specified by -tab1,tab2,...,tabn
The following options are supported for unexpand:
- -a, --all Inserts TAB characters when replacing a run of
- two or more SPACE characters would produce a
- smaller output file.
-
-
- --first-only Converts only leading sequences of SPACEs. This
- option overrides -a.
-
-
- -t, --tabs tablist Specifies the tab stops. The option-argument tab-
- list must be a single argument consisting of a
- single positive decimal integer or multiple posi-
- tive decimal integers, separated by blank charac-
- ters or commas, in ascending order. If a single
- number is given, tabs will be set tablist column
- positions apart instead of the default 8. If mul-
- tiple numbers are given, the tabs will be set at
- those specific column positions. Each tab-stop
- position N must be an integer value greater than
- zero, and the list must be in strictly ascending
- order. This is taken to mean that, from the start
- of a line of output, tabbing to position N will
- cause the next character output to be in the
- (N+1)th column position on that line. When the -t
- option is not specified, the default is the
- equivalent of specifying -t 8 (except for the
- interaction with -a, described below).
-
- No space-to-tab character conversions occur for
- characters at positions beyond the last of those
- specified in a multiple tab-stop list.
-
- When -t is specified, the presence or absence of
- the -a option is ignored; conversion will not be
- limited to the processing of leading blank char-
- acters.
+ -a, --all
+
+ Inserts TAB characters when replacing a run of two or more SPACE
+ characters would produce a smaller output file.
+
+
+ --first-only
+
+ Converts only leading sequences of SPACEs. This option overrides
+ -a.
+
+
+ -t, --tabs tablist
+
+ Specifies the tab stops. The option-argument tablist must be a sin-
+ gle argument consisting of a single positive decimal integer or
+ multiple positive decimal integers, separated by blank characters
+ or commas, in ascending order. If a single number is given, tabs
+ will be set tablist column positions apart instead of the default
+ 8. If multiple numbers are given, the tabs will be set at those
+ specific column positions. Each tab-stop position N must be an
+ integer value greater than zero, and the list must be in strictly
+ ascending order. This is taken to mean that, from the start of a
+ line of output, tabbing to position N will cause the next character
+ output to be in the (N+1)th column position on that line. When the
+ -t option is not specified, the default is the equivalent of speci-
+ fying -t 8 (except for the interaction with -a, described below).
+
+ No space-to-tab character conversions occur for characters at posi-
+ tions beyond the last of those specified in a multiple tab-stop
+ list.
+
+ When -t is specified, the presence or absence of the -a option is
+ ignored; conversion will not be limited to the processing of lead-
+ ing blank characters.
OPERANDS
The following operand is supported for expand and unexpand:
- file The path name of a text file to be used as input.
+ file The path name of a text file to be used as input. If file is -,
+ the command reads from the standard input at that point in the
+ sequence.
+
+ If no file operands are specified, the standard input is used.
+
ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES
See environ(7) for descriptions of the following environment variables
that affect the execution of expand and unexpand: LANG, LC_ALL,
@@ -151,6 +161,24 @@
SEE ALSO
tabs(1), attributes(7), environ(7), standards(7)
+HISTORY
+ The -i, --initial, --help and --tabs options to expand; the --all,
+ --first-only, --help, and --tabs options to unexpand; and support for
+ the - operand to operate on standard input were added in the Oracle
+ Solaris 11.4.0 release.
+
+
+ The -t option to expand and unexpand was added in the Solaris 2.5
+ release.
+
+
+ The -tabstop and -tab1,[...] options to expand and the -a option to
+ unexpand have been present since the initial release of Solaris.
+
+
+ The expand and unexpand commands have been present since the initial
+ release of Solaris.
+
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 27 Nov 2017 expand(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 expand(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/expr.1 11.4.54/man1/expr.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/expr.1 2023-02-14 17:42:28.052588695 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/expr.1 2023-02-14 17:42:45.086398009 -0800
@@ -79,10 +79,10 @@
first character of a string are matched by the regular expression.
See regex(7) and NOTES. Normally, the /usr/bin/expr matching opera-
tor returns the number of bytes matched and the /usr/xpg4/bin/expr
- matching operator returns the number of characters matched (0 on
- failure). If the second argument contains at least one BRE sub-
- expression [\(...\)], the matching operator returns the string cor-
- responding to \1.
+ and /usr/xpg6/bin/expr matching operator returns the number of
+ characters matched (0 on failure). If the second argument contains
+ at least one BRE sub-expression [\(...\)], the matching operator
+ returns the string corresponding to \1.
integer
@@ -186,8 +186,8 @@
LC_MESSAGES, and NLSPATH.
EXIT STATUS
- As a side effect of expression evaluation, expr returns the following
- exit values:
+ As a side effect of expression evaluation, expr returns one of the fol-
+ lowing exit values if no error occurred:
0 If the expression is neither NULL nor 0.
@@ -195,10 +195,13 @@
1 If the expression is either NULL or 0.
+
+ If an error occurred, expr returns:
+
2 For invalid expressions.
- > 2 An error occurred.
+ > 2 An error other than an invalid expression occurred.
ATTRIBUTES
@@ -222,7 +225,7 @@
thing else is Committed.
SEE ALSO
- basename(1), echo(1), ed(1), sh(1), intro(3), attributes(7), envi-
+ basename(1), echo(1), ed(1), sh(1), Intro(3), attributes(7), envi-
ron(7), regex(7), standards(7)
DIAGNOSTICS
@@ -280,4 +281,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Jul 2020 expr(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 expr(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/fgrep.1 11.4.54/man1/fgrep.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/fgrep.1 2023-02-14 17:42:28.083614730 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/fgrep.1 2023-02-14 17:42:45.115438562 -0800
@@ -73,7 +73,8 @@
-l Prints the names of files with matching lines once,
separated by new-lines. Does not repeat the names of
- files when the pattern is found more than once.
+ files when the pattern is found more than once in
+ the same file.
-n Precedes each line by its line number in the file.
@@ -156,8 +157,7 @@
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
SEE ALSO
- ed(1), egrep(1), grep(1), sed(1), sh(1), XPG4(7), attributes(7), envi-
- ron(7)
+ egrep(1), grep(1), grep(1g), XPG4(7), attributes(7), environ(7)
NOTES
Ideally, there should be only one grep command, but there is not a sin-
@@ -170,6 +170,19 @@
The /usr/xpg4/bin/fgrep utility is identical to /usr/xpg4/bin/grep -F
(see grep(1)). Portable applications should use /usr/xpg4/bin/grep -F.
+HISTORY
+ The /usr/xpg4/bin/fgrep command was introduced in Solaris 2.5, with
+ support for all of the previous options and adding the -q option.
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 4 Feb 2015 fgrep(1)
+ Support for the -x option was added to the /usr/bin/fgrep command in
+ Solaris 2.0.
+
+
+ The /usr/bin/fgrep command, with support for the -b, -c, -e, -f, -h,
+ -i, -l, -n, -s, and -v options, has been present in all Sun and Oracle
+ releases of Solaris.
+
+
+
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 fgrep(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/find.1 11.4.54/man1/find.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/find.1 2023-02-14 17:42:28.117849283 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/find.1 2023-02-14 17:42:45.164178151 -0800
@@ -507,8 +507,7 @@
example% find . ! -local -prune -o -print
- Example 10 Printing the Files in the Name Space Possessing Extended
- Attributes
+ Example 10 Printing Files Possessing Extended Attributes
example% find . -xattr
@@ -547,10 +546,11 @@
EXIT STATUS
The following exit values are returned:
- 0 All path operands were traversed successfully.
+ 0 All requested operations completed successfully.
- > 0 An error occurred.
+ > 0 An error occurred, or a command executed using -exec with +
+ exited with a non-zero exit status.
FILES
@@ -601,6 +601,36 @@
the find command and the time the executed command operates on the file
argument.
+HISTORY
+ Support for the -path expression was added to both find commands in
+ Oracle Solaris 11.4.
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 18 May 2020 find(1)
+ Support for the -amin, -cmin, -iname, -mmin, and -print0 expressions
+ was added to both find commands in Oracle Solaris 11.0.
+
+
+ Support for the -acl expression and the -H and -L options was added to
+ both find commands in Solaris 10 3/05.
+
+
+ Support for the -xattr expression was added to both find commands in
+ Solaris 9.
+
+
+ The /usr/xpg4/bin/find command was introduced in Solaris 8.
+
+
+ Support for the -local expression and the use of + to end an -exec
+ expression was added to the /usr/bin/find command in Solaris 2.0.
+
+
+ The /usr/bin/find command, with support for the -atime, -cpio, -ctime,
+ -depth, -exec, -follow, -fstype, -group, -inum, -links, -ls, -mount,
+ -mtime, -name, -ncpio, -newer, -nogroup, -nouser, -ok, -perm, -print,
+ -prune, -size, -type, -user, and -xdev expressions, has been present in
+ all Sun and Oracle releases of Solaris.
+
+
+
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 find(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/finger.1 11.4.54/man1/finger.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/finger.1 2023-02-14 17:42:28.157677331 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/finger.1 2023-02-14 17:42:45.221612127 -0800
@@ -9,11 +9,10 @@
finger [-bfhilmpqsw] [username]...
- finger [-l]
- [username@hostname 1 [@hostname 2 .. .@hostname n]...]
+ finger [-l] [username@hostname1[@hostname2...@hostnameN]...]
- finger [-l] [@hostname 1 [@hostname 2 .. .@hostname n]...]
+ finger [-l] [@hostname1[@hostname2...@hostnameN]...]
DESCRIPTION
By default, the finger command displays in multi-column format the fol-
@@ -71,17 +70,18 @@
- Note: when the comment (GECOS) field in /etc/passwd includes a comma,
- finger does not display the information following the comma.
+ Note: when the comment (GECOS) field in the passwd(5) repository
+ includes a comma, finger does not display the information following the
+ comma.
- If the arguments username@hostname1[@hostname2...@hostnamen] or @host-
- name1[@hostname2...@hostnamen] are used, the request is sent first to
- hostnamen and forwarded through each hostnamen-1 to hostname1. The pro-
- gram uses the finger user information protocol (see RFC 1288) to query
- that remote host for information about the named user (if username is
- specified), or about each logged-in user. The information displayed is
- server dependent.
+ If the arguments username@hostname1[@hostname2...@hostnameN] or @host-
+ name1[@hostname2...@@hostnameN] are used, the request is sent first to
+ hostnameN and forwarded through each hostname(N-1) to hostname1. The
+ program uses the finger user information protocol (see RFC 1288) to
+ query that remote host for information about the named user (if user-
+ name is specified), or about each logged-in user. The information dis-
+ played is server dependent.
As required by RFC 1288, finger passes only printable, 7-bit ASCII
@@ -143,9 +143,6 @@
/etc/default/finger finger options file
- /etc/passwd password file
-
-
/var/adm/lastlog time of last login
@@ -163,17 +160,31 @@
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
SEE ALSO
- whois(1), passwd(1), who(1), passwd(5), attributes(7)
+ whois(1), passwd(1), who(1), passwd(5), attributes(7), in.fingerd(8)
- Zimmerman, D., The Finger User Information Protocol, RFC 1288, Center
+ Zimmerman, D., RFC 1288, The Finger User Information Protocol, Center
for Discrete Mathematics and Theoretical Computer Science (DIMACS),
- Rutgers University, December 1991.
+ Rutgers University, December 1991. https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc1288
NOTES
The finger user information protocol limits the options that may be
used with the remote form of this command.
+ All data exchanges over this protocol are performed without encryption,
+ and have no protection against spoofing or snooping of traffic. The
+ in.fingerd(8) server used for the @hostname forms of the command is
+ disabled by default on Oracle Solaris and most other modern operating
+ systems.
+
+HISTORY
+ Support for IPv6 was added in the Solaris 8 release.
+
+
+ The finger command, with support for the all of the -bfhilmpqsw
+ options, has been present in all Sun and Oracle releases of Solaris.
+
+
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 27 Nov 2017 finger(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 finger(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/gcore.1 11.4.54/man1/gcore.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/gcore.1 2023-02-14 17:42:28.185106112 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/gcore.1 2023-02-14 17:42:45.249641734 -0800
@@ -104,13 +104,26 @@
The command syntax is Committed. The Output Formats are Uncommitted.
SEE ALSO
- kill(1), setrlimit(2), core(5), proc(5), attributes(7), memcntl(2),
+ kill(1), memcntl(2), setrlimit(2), core(5), proc(5), attributes(7),
coreadm(8)
NOTES
- gcore is unaffected by the setrlimit(2) system call using the
- RLIMIT_CORE value.
+ gcore is unaffected by the limit set by the setrlimit(2) system call
+ using the RLIMIT_CORE value.
+HISTORY
+ The -R option was added in Oracle Solaris 11.4.30.
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 21 Nov 2020 gcore(1)
+ The -P option was added in Oracle Solaris 11.3.0.
+
+
+ The -c, -F, -g, and -p options were added in Solaris 10 3/05.
+
+
+ The gcore command, with support for the -o option, has been present in
+ all Sun and Oracle releases of Solaris.
+
+
+
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 gcore(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/getopt.1 11.4.54/man1/getopt.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/getopt.1 2023-02-14 17:42:28.231154857 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/getopt.1 2023-02-14 17:42:45.276880660 -0800
@@ -17,7 +17,7 @@
shell procedures and to check for legal options. optstring is a string
of recognized option letters; see getopt(3C). If a letter is followed
by a colon (:), the option is expected to have an argument which may or
- may not be separated from it by white space. The special option - is
+ may not be separated from it by white space. The special option -- is
used to delimit the end of the options. If it is used explicitly,
getopt recognizes it; otherwise, getopt generates it; in either case,
getopt places it at the end of the options. The positional parameters
@@ -117,4 +117,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 7 Jan 2000 getopt(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 getopt(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/getopts.1 11.4.54/man1/getopts.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/getopts.1 2023-02-14 17:42:28.275964476 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/getopts.1 2023-02-14 17:42:45.317869925 -0800
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@
SYNOPSIS
/usr/bin/getopts optstring name [arg...]
- sh
+ /usr/sunos/bin/sh
getopts optstring name [argument]...
ksh88
@@ -92,9 +92,9 @@
OPTIND value modified to be a value other than 1, produces unspecified
results.
- sh
+ /usr/sunos/bin/sh
getopts is a built-in Bourne shell command used to parse positional
- parameters and to check for valid options. See sh(1). It supports all
+ parameters and to check for valid options. See sh(1s). It supports all
applicable rules of the command syntax standard (see Rules 3-10,
Intro(1)). It should be used in place of the getopt command.
@@ -190,7 +190,8 @@
getopts supports both traditional single-character short options and
- long options defined by Sun's Command Line Interface Paradigm (CLIP).
+ long options defined by the Solaris Command Line Interface Paradigm
+ (CLIP).
Each long option is an alias for a short option and is specified in
@@ -230,8 +227,8 @@
For a further discussion of the Korn shell's getopts built-in command,
- see the previous discussion in the Bourne shell (sh) section of this
- manpage.
+ see the previous discussion in the Bourne shell (/usr/sunos/bin/sh)
+ section of this manpage.
ksh
The getopts utility can be used to retrieve options and arguments from
@@ -382,7 +379,7 @@
If the leading character of optstring is +, arguments beginning with +
- are also be considered options.
+ are also considered options.
A leading : character or a : following a leading + in optstring affects
@@ -618,7 +609,7 @@
ATTRIBUTES
See attributes(7) for descriptions of the following attributes:
- /usr/bin/getopts, sh, ksh88
+ /usr/bin/getopts
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
| ATTRIBUTE TYPE | ATTRIBUTE VALUE |
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
@@ -629,17 +620,12 @@
|Standard |See standards(7). |
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- ksh
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- | ATTRIBUTE TYPE | ATTRIBUTE VALUE |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- |Availability |system/core-os |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- |Interface Stability |Uncommitted |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
+
+ See the respective shell man pages for attributes of the shell built-in
+ command versions of getopts.
SEE ALSO
- getoptcvt(1), Intro(1), ksh(1), ksh88(1), ps(1), sh(1), getopt(3C),
+ getoptcvt(1), Intro(1), ksh(1), ksh88(1), ps(1), sh(1s), getopt(3C),
attributes(7), environ(7), standards(7)
DIAGNOSTICS
@@ -670,4 +656,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 12 Jun 2020 getopts(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 getopts(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/gprof.1 11.4.54/man1/gprof.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/gprof.1 2023-02-14 17:42:28.309994857 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/gprof.1 2023-02-14 17:42:45.360055360 -0800
@@ -235,13 +235,13 @@
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------------+
SEE ALSO
- cc(1), ld.so.1(1), prof(1), exit(2), pcsample(2), profil(2), mal-
- loc(3C), monitor(3C), malloc(3MALLOC), attributes(7), prof(7)
+ cc(1), ld.so.1(1), prof(1), exit(2), pcsample(2), profil(2), moni-
+ tor(3C), attributes(7), prof(7)
Graham, S.L., Kessler, P.B., McKusick, M.K., gprof: A Call Graph Execu-
- tion Profiler Proceedings of the SIGPLAN '82 Symposium on Compiler Con-
- struction, SIGPLAN Notices, Vol. 17, No. 6, pp. 120-126, June 1982.
+ tion Profiler. Proceedings of the SIGPLAN '82 Symposium on Compiler
+ Construction, SIGPLAN Notices, Vol. 17, No. 6, pp. 120-126, June 1982.
Oracle Solaris 11.4 Linkers and Libraries Guide
@@ -258,12 +258,6 @@
symbols, the behavior is as described for the -a option.
- LD_LIBRARY_PATH must not contain /usr/lib as a component when compiling
- a program for profiling. If LD_LIBRARY_PATH contains /usr/lib, the pro-
- gram will not be linked correctly with the profiling versions of the
- system libraries in /usr/lib/libp.
-
-
The times reported in successive identical runs may show variances
because of varying cache-hit ratios that result from sharing the cache
with other processes. Even if a program seems to be the only one using
@@ -316,9 +310,8 @@
filed with gprof. If desired, the program should be linked to the pro-
filed version of a library (or to the standard archive version if no
profiling version is available), instead of the shared object to get
- profile information on the functions of a library. Versions of profiled
- libraries may be supplied with the system in the /usr/lib/libp direc-
- tory. Refer to compiler driver documentation on profiling.
+ profile information on the functions of a library. Refer to compiler
+ driver documentation on profiling.
Consider an extreme case. A profiled program dynamically linked with
@@ -345,4 +338,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 30 August 2017 gprof(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 gprof(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/grep.1 11.4.54/man1/grep.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/grep.1 2023-02-14 17:42:28.340487214 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/grep.1 2023-02-14 17:42:45.394514637 -0800
@@ -27,9 +27,9 @@
rithm.
- Be careful using the characters $, *, [, ^, |, (, ), and \ in the
- pattern_list because they are also meaningful to the shell. It is
- safest to enclose the entire pattern_list in single quotes '... '.
+ Be careful using the characters $, *, [, ^, |, (, ), and \ in the pat-
+ tern_list because they are also meaningful to the shell. It is safest
+ to enclose the entire pattern_list in single quotes '...'.
If no files are specified, grep assumes standard input. Normally, each
@@ -41,13 +41,12 @@
described on the regexp(7) manual page to match the patterns.
/usr/xpg4/bin/grep
- The options -E and -F affect the way
- /usr/xpg4/bin/grep interprets pattern_list. If -E is specified,
- /usr/xpg4/bin/grep interprets pattern_list as
- a full regular expression (see -E for description). If -F is specified,
- grep interprets pattern_list as a fixed string. If neither are speci-
- fied, grep interprets pattern_list as a basic regular expression as
- described on regex(7) manual page.
+ The options -E and -F affect the way /usr/xpg4/bin/grep interprets pat-
+ tern_list. If -E is specified, /usr/xpg4/bin/grep interprets pat-
+ tern_list as a full regular expression (see -E for description). If -F
+ is specified, grep interprets pattern_list as a fixed string. If nei-
+ ther are specified, grep interprets pattern_list as a basic regular
+ expression as described on regex(7) manual page.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported for both /usr/bin/grep and
@@ -236,13 +234,12 @@
example% /usr/bin/grep -v .
-
Example 3 Finding Lines Containing Strings
- All of the following commands print all lines containing strings abc
- or def or both:
+ All of the following commands print all lines containing strings abc or
+ def or both:
example% /usr/xpg4/bin/grep 'abc
@@ -321,8 +316,8 @@
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
SEE ALSO
- egrep(1), fgrep(1), sed(1), sh(1), attributes(7), environ(7), regex(7),
- regexp(7), standards(7)
+ egrep(1), fgrep(1), grep(1g), sed(1), sh(1), attributes(7), environ(7),
+ regex(7), regexp(7), standards(7)
NOTES
/usr/bin/grep
@@ -335,6 +330,24 @@
LINE_MAX bytes or contain binary data. LINE_MAX is defined in
/usr/include/limits.h.
+HISTORY
+ Support for the -q option was added to the /usr/bin/grep command in
+ Oracle Solaris 11.0.0.
+
+
+ The /usr/xpg4/bin/grep command was introduced in Solaris 2.5, with sup-
+ port for the -b, -c, -e, -E, -f, -F, -h, -i, -l, -n, -q, -s, -v, -w,
+ and -x options.
+
+
+ Support for the -e was included the /usr/bin/grep command in Solaris
+ 1.x releases, but was not included in Solaris 2.0 and later releases.
+
+
+ The /usr/bin/grep command, with support for the -b, -c, -h, -i, -l, -n,
+ -s, -v, and -w options, has been present in all Sun and Oracle releases
+ of Solaris.
+
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Sept 2016 grep(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 grep(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/hash.1 11.4.54/man1/hash.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/hash.1 2023-02-14 17:42:28.367359352 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/hash.1 2023-02-14 17:42:45.425847143 -0800
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
/usr/bin/hash [-r]
- sh
+ /usr/sunos/bin/sh
hash [-r] [name]...
csh
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@
Utilities provided as built-ins to the shell are not reported by hash.
- sh
+ /usr/sunos/bin/sh
For each name, the location in the search path of the command specified
by name is determined and remembered by the shell. The -r option to the
hash built-in causes the shell to forget all remembered locations. If
@@ -124,9 +124,13 @@
|Standard |See standards(7). |
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
+
+ See the respective shell man pages for attributes of the shell built-in
+ commands.
+
SEE ALSO
- csh(1), ksh88(1), sh(1), attributes(7), environ(7), standards(7)
+ csh(1), ksh88(1), sh(1s), attributes(7), environ(7), standards(7)
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 12 Jul 2011 hash(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 hash(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/Intro.1 11.4.54/man1/Intro.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/Intro.1 2023-02-14 17:42:28.411645937 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/Intro.1 2023-02-14 17:42:45.460004384 -0800
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
1G Alternative open source implementations of Solaris commands.
- 1S Commands specific to Oracle Solaris.
+ 1S Oracle Solaris-specific implementations of commands.
OTHER SECTIONS
@@ -161,8 +161,8 @@
An expanded set of guidelines referred to as CLIP for Command Line
- Interface Paradigm has been developed for Oracle Solaris and other Ora-
- cle products. Its intent is to provide a command line syntax more
+ Interface Paradigm has been developed for Oracle Solaris and related
+ Oracle products. Its intent is to provide a command line syntax more
closely aligned with the GNU command line syntax popular on Linux sys-
tems. There is no intent to retrofit existing utilities or even to
apply this to all new utilities. It is only intended to be applied to
@@ -171,9 +171,9 @@
CLIP is a full superset of the guidelines discussed above which are
closely aligned with IEEE Std. 1003.1-2001 (SUSv3). It does not include
- all the GNU syntax. The GNU syntax allows constructs that either con-
- flict with the IEEE rules or are ambiguous. These constructs are not
- allowed.
+ all of the GNU syntax. The GNU syntax allows constructs that either
+ conflict with the IEEE rules or are ambiguous. These constructs are not
+ allowed in CLIP.
The expanded CLIP command line syntax is:
@@ -199,7 +199,7 @@
Option-arguments are sometimes shown separated from their short-options
- by BLANKSs, sometimes directly adjacent. This reflects the situation
+ by BLANKs, sometimes directly adjacent. This reflects the situation
that in some cases an option-argument is included within the same argu-
ment string as the option; in most cases it is the next argument. This
specification requires that the option be a separate argument from its
@@ -368,4 +368,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 11 May 2021 Intro(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 Intro(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/ipcs.1 11.4.54/man1/ipcs.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/ipcs.1 2023-02-14 17:42:28.446831600 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/ipcs.1 2023-02-14 17:42:45.494702070 -0800
@@ -283,13 +283,6 @@
TZ Determine the time zone for the time strings written by ipcs.
-FILES
- /etc/group group names
-
-
- /etc/passwd user names
-
-
ATTRIBUTES
See attributes(7) for descriptions of the following attributes:
@@ -316,4 +309,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 11 May 2021 ipcs(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 ipcs(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/jobs.1 11.4.54/man1/jobs.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/jobs.1 2023-02-14 17:42:28.495021950 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/jobs.1 2023-02-14 17:42:45.551525086 -0800
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@
jobs, fg, bg, stop, notify - control process execution
SYNOPSIS
- sh
+ /usr/sunos/bin/sh
jobs [-p | -l] [% job_id...]
@@ -67,7 +67,7 @@
bg [job_id...]
DESCRIPTION
- sh
+ /usr/sunos/bin/sh
When Job Control is enabled, the Bourne shell built-in jobs reports all
jobs that are stopped or executing in the background. If %job_id is
omitted, all jobs that are stopped or running in the background is
@@ -86,10 +86,10 @@
When the shell is invoked as jsh, Job Control is enabled in addition to
- all of the functionality described previously for sh. Typically Job
- Control is enabled for the interactive shell only. Non-interactive
- shells typically do not benefit from the added functionality of Job
- Control.
+ all of the functionality described previously for /usr/sunos/bin/sh.
+ Typically Job Control is enabled for the interactive shell only. Non-
+ interactive shells typically do not benefit from the added functional-
+ ity of Job Control.
With Job Control enabled every command or pipeline the user enters at
@@ -509,7 +509,7 @@
LC_MESSAGES, and NLSPATH.
EXIT STATUS
- sh, csh, ksh88
+ /usr/sunos/bin/sh, csh, ksh88
The following exit values are returned for jobs, fg, and bg:
0 Successful completion.
@@ -550,33 +550,14 @@
ATTRIBUTES
- See attributes(7) for descriptions of the following attributes:
-
- csh, sh, ksh88
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- | ATTRIBUTE TYPE | ATTRIBUTE VALUE |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- |Availability |system/core-os |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- |Interface Stability |Committed |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- |Standard |See standards(7). |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
-
- ksh
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- | ATTRIBUTE TYPE | ATTRIBUTE VALUE |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- |Availability |system/core-os |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- |Interface Stability |Uncommitted |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
+ See the respective shell man pages for attributes of the shell built-in
+ commands.
SEE ALSO
- csh(1), kill(1), ksh(1), ksh88(1), ps(1), sh(1), shell_builtins(1),
+ csh(1), kill(1), ksh(1), ksh88(1), ps(1), sh(1s), shell_builtins(1),
stop(1), stty(1), wait(1), signal.h(3HEAD), attributes(7), environ(7),
standards(7)
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 11 May 2021 jobs(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 jobs(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/kill.1 11.4.54/man1/kill.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/kill.1 2023-02-14 17:42:28.525018309 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/kill.1 2023-02-14 17:42:45.593938905 -0800
@@ -60,7 +60,7 @@
-s signal_name Specifies the signal to send, using one of the sym-
bolic names defined in the <signal.h> description.
- Values of signal_name is recognized in a case-inde-
+ Values of signal_name are recognized in a case-inde-
pendent fashion, without the SIG prefix. In addition,
the symbolic name 0 is recognized, representing the
signal value zero. The corresponding signal is sent
@@ -194,9 +194,12 @@
EXIT STATUS
The following exit values are returned:
- 0 At least one matching process was found for each pid operand,
- and the specified signal was successfully processed for at least
- one matching process.
+ 0 If -l was not specified, at least one matching process was found
+ for each pid operand, and the specified signal was successfully
+ processed for at least one matching process.
+
+ If -l was specified, any arguments were valid, and the output
+ was successfully written to standard output.
> 0 An error occurred.
@@ -205,7 +208,7 @@
ATTRIBUTES
See attributes(7) for descriptions of the following attributes:
- /usr/bin/kill, csh, ksh88, sh
+ /usr/bin/kill
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
| ATTRIBUTE TYPE | ATTRIBUTE VALUE |
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
@@ -218,16 +221,9 @@
|Standard |See standards(7). |
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- ksh
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- | ATTRIBUTE TYPE | ATTRIBUTE VALUE |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- |Availability |system/core-os |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- |CSI |Enabled |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- |Interface Stability |Uncommitted |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
+
+ See the respective shell man pages for attributes of the shell built-in
+ command versions of kill.
SEE ALSO
csh(1), getconf(1), jobs(1), ksh(1), ksh88(1), ps(1), sh(1),
@@ -239,23 +235,18 @@
The number of realtime signals supported is defined by the getconf(1)
value _POSIX_RTSIG_MAX.
- sh
- The Bourne shell, sh, has a built-in version of kill to provide the
- functionality of the kill command for processes identified with a
- jobid. The sh syntax is:
-
-
+ /usr/sunos/bin/sh
+ The Bourne shell, /usr/sunos/bin/sh, has a built-in version of kill to
+ provide the functionality of the kill command for processes identified
+ with a jobid. The sh syntax is:
kill [ -sig ] [ pid ] [ %job ]...
kill -l
-
-
- csh
- The C-shell, csh, also has a built-in kill command, whose syntax is:
-
-
+ /usr/sunos/bin/csh
+ The C-shell, /usr/sunos/bin/csh, also has a built-in kill command,
+ whose syntax is:
kill [-sig][pid][%job]...
kill -l
@@ -338,7 +327,7 @@
of signals to standard output. Otherwise, arg can be either a signal
name, or a number representing either a signal number or exit status
for a process that was terminated due to a signal. If a name is speci-
- fied the corresponding signal number is written to standard output. If
+ fied, the corresponding signal number is written to standard output. If
a number is specified the corresponding signal name is written to stan-
dard output.
@@ -394,4 +383,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 3 Nov 2021 kill(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 kill(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/kldd.1 11.4.54/man1/kldd.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/kldd.1 2023-02-14 17:42:28.562922569 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/kldd.1 2023-02-14 17:42:45.654951515 -0800
@@ -454,6 +454,12 @@
/platform/sun4v/kernel/cpu/sparcv9/SPARC-T5
+HISTORY
+ The -D option was added in Oracle Solaris 11.4.36.
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 3 June 2021 kldd(1)
+ The kldd command was introduced in the Oracle Solaris 11.4.0 release.
+
+
+
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 kldd(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/last.1 11.4.54/man1/last.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/last.1 2023-02-14 17:42:28.589509165 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/last.1 2023-02-14 17:42:45.697301848 -0800
@@ -54,11 +54,11 @@
file instead of /var/adm/wtmpx.
- -n number|-number Limits the number of entries displayed to
- that specified by number. These options are
- identical; the -number option is provided as
- a transition tool only and is removed in
- future releases.
+ -n number|-number Limits the number of entries displayed to that
+ specified by number. These options are identi-
+ cal; the -number option is provided as a tran-
+ sition tool only and may be removed in a
+ future release.
FILES
@@ -80,4 +80,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 24 Jul 2004 last(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 last(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/ldd.1 11.4.54/man1/ldd.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/ldd.1 2023-02-14 17:42:28.622977806 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/ldd.1 2023-02-14 17:42:45.738280044 -0800
@@ -79,11 +79,13 @@
This option is useful for experimenting with environment variables
that are recognized by the runtime linker that can adversely affect
- ldd, for example, LD_PRELOAD.
+ ldd, for example, LD_PRELOAD. See ld.so.1(1).
- This option is also useful for extracting additional information
- solely from the object under inspection, for example, LD_DEBUG. See
- ld.so.1(1).
+ The -e option should always be used when using the LD_DEBUG envi-
+ ronment variable to extract additional information from the object
+ under inspection. Failure to do so will produce a confusing mix of
+ debug output from the ldd command with that from the object being
+ analyzed.
-f
@@ -446,4 +448,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 3 Nov 2021 ldd(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 8 November 2022 ldd(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/limit.1 11.4.54/man1/limit.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/limit.1 2023-02-14 17:42:28.654644403 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/limit.1 2023-02-14 17:42:45.784603819 -0800
@@ -7,9 +7,9 @@
available to the current shell and its descendents
SYNOPSIS
- /usr/bin/ulimit [-f] [blocks]
+ /usr/bin/ulimit [-HSacdfmnpstv] [limit]
- sh
+ /usr/sunos/bin/sh
ulimit [- [HS] [a | cdfnstv]]
@@ -32,12 +32,14 @@
DESCRIPTION
/usr/bin/ulimit
- The ulimit utility sets or reports the file-size writing limit imposed
- on files written by the shell and its child processes (files of any
- size can be read). Only a process with appropriate privileges can
- increase the limit.
+ The standalone command /usr/bin/ulimit is identical to the ksh built-in
+ version described below, except that it is run in a new shell instance
+ that exits as soon as the command completes, so that any changes made
+ to limits are not inherited by any other processes, unlike the normal
+ method of new limits applying to all further processes started from the
+ shell in which the built-in command is run.
- sh
+ /usr/sunos/bin/sh
The Bourne shell built-in function, ulimit, prints or sets hard or soft
resource limits. These limits are described in getrlimit(2).
@@ -49,8 +51,9 @@
If limit is present, ulimit sets the specified limit to limit. The
string unlimited requests that the current limit, if any, be removed.
Any user can set a soft limit to any value less than or equal to the
- hard limit. Any user can lower a hard limit. Only a user with appropri-
- ate privileges can raise or remove a hard limit. See getrlimit(2).
+ hard limit. Any user can lower a hard limit. Only a process with the
+ {PRIV_SYS_RESOURCE} privilege can raise or remove a hard limit. See
+ getrlimit(2).
The -H option specifies a hard limit. The -S option specifies a soft
@@ -91,8 +94,8 @@
limit. If resource is omitted, displays all limits.
-h Use hard limits instead of the current limits. Hard limits impose
- a ceiling on the values of the current limits. Only the privi-
- leged user can raise the hard limits.
+ a ceiling on the values of the current limits. Only a process
+ with the {PRIV_SYS_RESOURCE} privilege can raise the hard limits.
@@ -113,15 +116,10 @@
size is 2^13.
- coredumpsize Maximum size of a core dump (file). This is limited to
- the size of the filesystem.
+ coredumpsize Maximum size of a core dump file.
- descriptors Maximum number of file descriptors. Run the sysdef(8)
- command to obtain the maximum possible limits for your
- system. The values reported by sysdef are in hexadeci-
- mal, but can be translated into decimal numbers using
- the bc(1) command.
+ descriptors Maximum number of file descriptors. See Intro(2).
memorysize Maximum size of virtual memory.
@@ -147,8 +145,8 @@
then all resource limitations are removed. See the description of the
limit command for the list of resource names.
- -h Remove corresponding hard limits. Only the privileged user can do
- this.
+ -h Remove corresponding hard limits. Only a process with the
+ {PRIV_SYS_RESOURCE} privilege can do this.
ksh88
@@ -195,12 +193,6 @@
If no option is specified, -f is assumed.
- Per-Shell Memory Parameters
- The heapsize, datasize, and stacksize parameters are not system tun-
- ables. The only controls for these are hard limits, set in a shell
- startup file, or system-wide soft limits, which, for the current ver-
- sion of the Solaris OS, is 2^13bytes.
-
ksh
ulimit sets or displays resource limits. These limits apply to the cur-
rent process and to each child process created after the resource limit
@@ -210,8 +202,8 @@
Increasing the limit for a resource usually requires special privi-
leges. Some systems allow you to lower resource limits and later
- increase them. These are called soft limits. Once a hard limit is set
- the resource cannot be increased.
+ increase them. These are called soft limits. Once a hard limit is set,
+ the soft limit for the resource cannot be increased past that limit.
Different systems allow you to specify different resources and some
@@ -223,7 +215,7 @@
for that resource.
- If you do not specify -H or -S, -S is used for listing and both -S and
+ If you do not specify -H or -S, -S is used for listing, and both -S and
-H are used for setting resources.
@@ -325,7 +317,7 @@
EXAMPLES
- /usr/bin/ulimit
+ /usr/sunos/bin/sh or ksh88
Example 1 Limiting the Stack Size
@@ -344,8 +336,6 @@
memory(kbytes) unlimited
-
- sh/ksh88
Example 2 Limiting the Number of File Descriptors
@@ -423,7 +410,7 @@
ATTRIBUTES
See attributes(7) for descriptions of the following attributes:
- /usr/bin/ulimit, csh, ksh88, sh
+ /usr/bin/ulimit
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
| ATTRIBUTE TYPE | ATTRIBUTE VALUE |
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
@@ -434,19 +421,14 @@
|Standard |See standards(7). |
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- ksh
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- | ATTRIBUTE TYPE | ATTRIBUTE VALUE |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- |Availability |system/core-os |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- |Interface Stability |Uncommitted |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
+
+ See the respective shell man pages for attributes of the shell built-in
+ command versions of limit and ulimit.
SEE ALSO
- bash(1), bc(1), csh(1), ksh(1), ksh88(1), sh(1), getrlimit(2),
- attributes(7), environ(7), standards(7), df(8), su(8), swap(8), sys-
- def(8)
+ bash(1), csh(1), ksh(1), ksh88(1), plimit(1), prctl(1), sh(1s),
+ Intro(2), getrlimit(2), attributes(7), environ(7), resource-con-
+ trols(7), privileges(7), standards(7), df(8), su(8), swap(8)
NOTES
Be aware of possible unexpected consequences when using ulimit in con-
@@ -460,4 +442,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 07 Dec 2016 limit(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 limit(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/login.1 11.4.54/man1/login.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/login.1 2023-02-14 17:42:28.702214401 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/login.1 2023-02-14 17:42:45.840118498 -0800
@@ -34,9 +34,10 @@
login asks for your user name, if it is not supplied as an argument,
- and your password, if appropriate. Where possible, echoing is turned
- off while you type your password, so it does not appear on the written
- record of the session.
+ and any passwords or other information required by the current
+ pam(3PAM) configuration. Where possible, echoing is turned off while
+ you type any requested passwords, so they do not appear on screen or in
+ the written record of the session.
If you make any mistake in the login procedure, the message:
@@ -45,34 +46,30 @@
- is printed and a new login prompt appears. If you make five incorrect
- login attempts, all five can be logged in /var/adm/loginlog, if it
- exists. The TTY line is dropped.
+ is printed, a failed authentication audit record is generated, and a
+ new login prompt appears. If this happens more times than the limit
+ specified by SYSLOG_FAILED_LOGINS (see below), a syslog message is
+ logged for each failed attempt past the limit. If the number of incor-
+ rect login attempts reaches the limit specified by RETRIES in the login
+ configuration (default is 5), login terminates the login session, may
+ lock the account if configured to do so, and logs each of the failed
+ attempts to /var/adm/loginlog if it exists.
If password aging is turned on and the password has aged (see passwd(1)
for more information), the user is forced to change the password. In
this case the /etc/nsswitch.conf file is consulted to determine pass-
- word repositories (see nsswitch.conf(5)). The password update configu-
- rations supported are limited to the following cases.
-
- o passwd: files
-
-
- o passwd: files nis
-
-
-
- Failure to comply with the configurations prevents the user from log-
- ging onto the system because passwd(1) fails. If you do not complete
- the login successfully within a certain period of time, it is likely
- that you are silently disconnected.
+ word repositories (see nsswitch.conf(5)). Password changes may not be
+ possible for some repositories, in which case the user is not allowed
+ to login to the system. If you do not complete the login successfully
+ within a certain period of time, it is likely that you are silently
+ disconnected.
After a successful login, accounting files are updated. Device owner,
group, and permissions are set according to the contents of the
- /etc/logindevperm file, and the time you last logged in is printed (see
- logindevperm(5)).
+ /etc/logindevperm file (see logindevperm(5)), and the time you last
+ logged in is printed.
The user-ID, group-ID, supplementary group list, and working directory
@@ -83,7 +80,7 @@
HOME=your-login-directory
LOGNAME=your-login-name
- PATH=/usr/bin:
+ PATH=/usr/bin:/usr/sbin
SHELL=last-field-of-passwd-entry
MAIL=/var/mail/
@@ -101,11 +98,20 @@
For C shell logins, the shell executes /etc/.login, $HOME/.cshrc, and
- $HOME/.login. The default /etc/profile and /etc/.login files check quo-
- tas (see quota(8)), print /etc/motd, and check for mail. None of the
- messages are printed if the file $HOME/.hushlogin exists. The name of
- the command interpreter is set to - (dash), followed by the last compo-
- nent of the interpreter's path name, for example, -sh.
+ $HOME/.login.
+
+
+ For other shells, see their documentation for login shell startup pro-
+ cedures.
+
+
+ The default /etc/profile and /etc/.login files display /etc/ver-
+ sions/login-version-info and /etc/motd, and check for mail. None of the
+ messages are shown if the file $HOME/.hushlogin exists.
+
+
+ The name of the command interpreter is set to - (dash), followed by the
+ last component of the interpreter's path name, for example, -sh.
If the login-shell field in the password file (see passwd(5)) is empty,
@@ -316,11 +320,6 @@
User's login commands for sh and ksh.
- $HOME/.rhosts
-
- Private list of trusted hostname/username combinations.
-
-
/etc/.login
System-wide csh login commands.
@@ -352,19 +351,14 @@
down.
- /etc/passwd
-
- Password file.
-
-
/etc/profile
System-wide sh and ksh login commands.
- /etc/shadow
+ /etc/versions/login-version-info
- List of users' encrypted passwords.
+ System version information displayed after login succeeds.
/usr/bin/sh
@@ -524,8 +517,8 @@
returned PAM_MAXTRIES. Default is 4 seconds. Minimum is 0 sec-
onds. Maximum is 5 seconds.
- Both su(8) and sulogin(8) are affected by the value of SLEEP-
- TIME.
+ Both su(8) and sulogin(8) are also affected by the value of
+ SLEEPTIME.
RETRIES
@@ -572,16 +564,16 @@
SEE ALSO
csh(1), exit(1), ksh(1), ksh88(1), mail(1), mailx(1), newgrp(1),
passwd(1), rlogin(1), rsh(1), sh(1), shell_builtins(1), telnet(1),
- umask(1), rcmd(3C), syslog(3C), ttyname(3C) and pam(3PAM), termio(4I),
+ umask(1), rcmd(3C), syslog(3C), ttyname(3C), pam(3PAM), termio(4I),
auth_attr(5), exec_attr(5), hosts.equiv(5), issue(5), logindevperm(5),
loginlog(5), nologin(5), nsswitch.conf(5), pam.conf(5), passwd(5), pol-
- icy.conf(5), policy.conf(5), profile(5), shadow(5), user_attr(5),
- user_attr(5), utmpx(5), wtmpx(5), attributes(7), environ(7), pam_auth-
- tok_check(7), pam_authtok_get(7), pam_authtok_store(7), pam_dhkeys(7),
+ icy.conf(5), profile(5), shadow(5), sshd_config(5), user_attr(5),
+ utmpx(5), wtmpx(5), attributes(7), environ(7), pam_authtok_check(7),
+ pam_authtok_get(7), pam_authtok_store(7), pam_dhkeys(7),
pam_passwd_auth(7), pam_unix_account(7), pam_unix_auth(7),
- pam_unix_session(7), in.rlogind(8), in.telnetd(8), logins(8), quota(8),
- sshd(8), su(8), sulogin(8), syslogd(8), useradd(8), userdel(8),
- account-policy(8S)
+ pam_unix_session(7), in.rlogind(8), in.telnetd(8), logins(8), sshd(8),
+ su(8), sulogin(8), syslogd(8), useradd(8), userdel(8), account-pol-
+ icy(8S)
DIAGNOSTICS
Login incorrect
@@ -616,8 +608,88 @@
WARNINGS
If you use the CONSOLE setting to disable root logins, you should
arrange that remote command execution by root is also disabled. See
- rsh(1), rcmd(3C), and hosts.equiv(5) for further details.
+ rsh(1), rcmd(3C), hosts.equiv(5), and sshd_config(5) for further
+ details.
+
+HISTORY
+ The quota(8) command was removed from the default login process in Ora-
+ cle Solaris 11.4.45. Prior to that, it was run from the default
+ /etc/profile and /etc/.login files unless the $HOME/.hushlogin file was
+ present.
+
+
+ The display of OS version information from /etc/versions/login-version-
+ info was added to the default /etc/profile and /etc/.login files in
+ Oracle Solaris 11.4.36. Prior to that, OS version information was pro-
+ vided in the default /etc/motd file.
+
+
+ Direct editing of the /etc/default/login file was superseded by the
+ introduction of the account-policy(8S) service in Oracle Solaris
+ 11.4.0.
+
+
+ Support for the TIMEZONE setting in /etc/default/login was removed in
+ Oracle Solaris 11.4.0, in favor of the system default time zone of
+ localtime, as described in environ(7).
+
+
+ The display of last login time was moved to the pam_unix_session(7)
+ module in Oracle Solaris 11.3.0.
+
+
+ The check for /etc/nologin was moved to the pam_unix_account(7) module
+ in Oracle Solaris 11.2.0.
+
+
+ Support for the -R, -s, -t, -u, and -U options was added in Solaris 10
+ 3/05.
+
+
+ Support for the DISABLETIME setting in /etc/default/login was added in
+ Solaris 9.
+
+
+ Support for the SYSLOG_FAILED_LOGINS setting in /etc/default/login was
+ added in Solaris 8.
+
+
+ Support for the RETRIES setting in /etc/default/login was added in
+ Solaris 7.
+
+
+ The authentication process and access decisions were changed to rely on
+ pam(3PAM) in Solaris 2.6. Support for the IDLEWEEKS setting in
+ /etc/default/login was removed in Solaris 2.6 in favor of password
+ aging support provided by PAM.
+
+
+ Support for entering usernames with all upper case letters to enter a
+ special tty mode for terminals without lower case character support was
+ removed in Solaris 2.6.
+
+
+ Support for the -p option was added in Solaris 2.5.
+
+
+ Support for the /etc/logindevperm file (see logindevperm(5)), the SYS-
+ LOG setting in /etc/default/login, and the -d option was added in
+ Solaris 2.3.
+
+
+ Support for the SLEEPTIME setting in /etc/default/login was added in
+ Solaris 2.1.
+
+
+ Support for the /etc/default/login file, including the ALTSHELL, CON-
+ SOLE, HZ, IDLEWEEKS, PASSREQ, PATH, SUPATH, TIMEOUT, TIMEZONE, ULIMIT,
+ and UMASK settings, was added in Solaris 2.0.
+
+
+ The login command, with support for the -h, and -r options, has been
+ present in all Sun and Oracle releases of Solaris. Solaris 1.x releases
+ also supported a -p option that was not carried forward to Solaris 2.0.
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 11 May 2021 login(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 login(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/ls.1 11.4.54/man1/ls.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/ls.1 2023-02-14 17:42:28.749947603 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/ls.1 2023-02-14 17:42:45.919643789 -0800
@@ -6,21 +6,21 @@
ls - list contents of directory
SYNOPSIS
- /usr/bin/ls [-aAbcCdeEfFghHiklLmnopqrRsStuUwvVx1@] [-/ c | v]
+ /usr/bin/ls [-aAbcCdeEfFghHiklLmnopqrRsStuUwvVx1@] [-/ c | v | V]
[-% atime | crtime | ctime | mtime | rtime | all]
[--block-size size] [--color[=when]] [--file-type]
[--scale[=item1,item2,...]] [--si] [--time-style style]
[file]...
- /usr/xpg4/bin/ls [-aAbcCdeEfFghHiklLmnopqrRsStuUwvVx1@] [-/ c | v]
+ /usr/xpg4/bin/ls [-aAbcCdeEfFghHiklLmnopqrRsStuUwvVx1@] [-/ c | v | V]
[-% atime | crtime | ctime | mtime | rtime | all]
[--block-size size] [--color[=when]] [--file-type]
[--scale[=item1,item2,...]] [--si] [--time-style style]
[file]...
- /usr/xpg6/bin/ls [-aAbcCdeEfFghHiklLmnopqrRsStuUwvVx1@] [-/ c | v]
+ /usr/xpg6/bin/ls [-aAbcCdeEfFghHiklLmnopqrRsStuUwvVx1@] [-/ c | v | V]
[-% atime | crtime | ctime | mtime | rtime | all]
[--block-size size] [--color[=when]] [--file-type]
[--scale[=item1,item2,...]] [--si] [--time-style style]
@@ -98,15 +98,15 @@
printed when filesystem supports extended system attributes. The dis-
play looks as follows:
-
-
$ ls -/c file
-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 0 May 10 14:17 file
{AHRSadim-u---}
$ ls -/v file
-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 0 May 10 14:17 file
- {archive,hidden,readonly,system,appendonly,nodump,immutable,av_modified,noav_quarantined,nounlink,nooffline,nosparse,nosensitive}
+ {archive,hidden,readonly,system,appendonly,
+ nodump,immutable,av_modified,noav_quarantined,
+ nounlink,nooffline,nosparse,nosensitive}
$ ls -l -%all file
-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 0 May 10 14:17 file
@@ -117,9 +117,9 @@
-
-
- See the option descriptions of the -/ and -% option for details.
+ except that the system attributes in the second example are printed on
+ a single line by the actual command. See the option descriptions of the
+ -/ and -% option for details.
ls -l (the long list) prints its output as follows for the POSIX
@@ -629,7 +629,7 @@
Indicates that ACL entries should be inherited to objects in a
directory, but inheritance should stop after descending one
- level. This flag is dependent upon either file_inherit and or
+ level. This flag is dependent upon either file_inherit and/or
dir_inherit also being specified.
@@ -736,12 +735,13 @@
-/
- The -/ option supports two option arguments c (compact mode) and v
- (verbose mode). Displays the long listing, same as -l. In addition,
- displays the extended system attributes associated with the file
- when extended system attributes are fully supported by the underly-
- ing file system. See the sysattr(7) manual page for definitions of
- the extended system attributes.
+ The -/ option supports three option arguments c (compact mode), v
+ (verbose mode), and V (verbose short mode). Displays the long list-
+ ing, same as -l. In addition, displays the extended system
+ attributes associated with the file when extended system attributes
+ are fully supported by the underlying file system. See the
+ sysattr(7) manual page for definitions of the extended system
+ attributes.
The display characters used in compact mode (-/ c) are as follows:
@@ -765,6 +765,9 @@
The display in verbose mode (-/ v) uses full attribute names when
it is set and the name prefixed by no when it is not set.
+ The display in verbose short mode (-/ V) uses full attribute names
+ when it is set and nothing when it is not set.
+
Attributes representing timestamps - crtime and rtime - are handled
by the -% option described below, and are not listed by the -/
option.
@@ -836,7 +835,7 @@
Display sizes in multiples of size. Size can be scaled by suffixing
one of YyZzEePpTtGgMmKk. Additionally, a B can be placed at the end
- to indicate powers of 10 instead of 2. For example, . 10mB means
+ to indicate powers of 10 instead of 2. For example, 10mB means
blocks of 10000000 bytes while 10m means blocks of 10*2^20 --
10485760 -- bytes. This is mutually exclusive with the -h option.
@@ -1357,36 +1339,51 @@
When the sizes of the files in a directory are listed, a total count of
blocks, including indirect blocks, is printed.
-
Example 5 Providing Extended System Attributes Information
+ This command lists extended system attributes in compact mode:
+
- example% ls -/c file (extended system attribute in compact mode)
+ example% ls -/c file
-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 0 May 10 14:17 file
{AHRSadim-u---}
+ This command lists extended system attributes in verbose mode. In this
+ example, av_quarantined is not set. When the actual command is run, the
+ extended system attributes will be on a single line, without the line
+ breaks shown here.
- In this example, av_quarantined is not set.
+ example% ls -/v file
+ -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 0 May 10 14:17 file
+ {archive,hidden,readonly,system,appendonly,nodump,
+ immutable,av_modified,noav_quarantined,nounlink,
+ nooffline,nosparse,nosensitive}
- example% ls -/v file (extended system attribute in verbose mode)
- -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 0 May 10 14:17 file
- {archive,hidden,readonly,system,appendonly,nodump,immutable,av_modified,noav_quarantined,nounlink,nooffline,nosparse,nosensitive}
- example% ls -/v file (no extended system attribute)
+ This example shows a file on a filesystem which does not support
+ extended system attributes.
+
+
+ example% ls -/v file
-rw-r--r-- 1 root staff 0 May 16 14:48 file
{}
- example% ls -/c file (extended system attribute
- supported file system)
+
+
+ This example shows a file on a filesystem which does support extended
+ system attributes.
+
+
+ example% ls -/c file
-rw-r--r-- 1 root staff 3 Jun 4 22:04 file
{A------m-----}
@@ -1392,22 +1389,24 @@
+
archive and av_modified attributes are set by default on an extended
system attribute supported file.
- example% ls -/c -% crtime file
+ This example displays the timestamp as the creation time:
+
+ example% ls -/c -% crtime file
-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 0 May 10 14:17 file
{AHRSadim-u---}
-
- This example displays the timestamp as the creation time:
-
+ This example displays the all available timestamps for a file which
+ does not have a retention time set:
example% ls -l -% all file
@@ -1417,17 +1416,17 @@
timestamp: mtime May 10 14:17:56 2007
timestamp: crtime May 10 14:17:56 2007
- example% ls -% crtime -tl file*
- -rw-r--r-- 1 foo staff 3 Jun 4 22:04 file1
- -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 0 May 10 14:17 file
- -rw-r--r-- 1 foo staff 0 May 9 13:49 file.1
+ In this example the files are sorted by creation time:
+ example% ls -% crtime -tl file*
+ -rw-r--r-- 1 foo staff 3 Jun 4 22:04 file1
+ -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 0 May 10 14:17 file
+ -rw-r--r-- 1 foo staff 0 May 9 13:49 file.1
- In this example the files are sorted by creation time.
ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES
See environ(7) for descriptions of the following environment variables
@@ -1463,22 +1462,6 @@
>0 An error occurred.
-FILES
- /etc/group
-
- group IDs for ls -l and ls -g
-
-
- /etc/passwd
-
- user IDs for ls -l and ls -o
-
-
- /usr/share/lib/terminfo/?/*
-
- terminal information database
-
-
ATTRIBUTES
See attributes(7) for descriptions of the following attributes:
@@ -1500,8 +1483,8 @@
--all, --almost-all, --block-size, --classify, --color, --colour,
--dereference, --dereference-command-line, --escape, --file-type,
--full-time, --human-readable, --ignore-backups, --inode, --no-group,
- --numeric-uid-gid, --reverse, --recursive, --si, --size, and --time-
- style, see standards(7).
+ --numeric-uid-gid, --reverse, --recursive, --scale, --si, --size, and
+ --time-style, see standards(7).
/usr/xpg4/bin/ls
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
@@ -1521,8 +1504,8 @@
--all, --almost-all, --block-size, --classify, --color, --colour,
--dereference, --dereference-command-line, --escape, --file-type,
--full-time, --human-readable, --ignore-backups, --inode, --no-group,
- --numeric-uid-gid, --reverse, --recursive, --si, --size, and --time-
- style, see standards(7).
+ --numeric-uid-gid, --reverse, --recursive, --scale, --si, --size, and
+ --time-style, see standards(7).
/usr/xpg6/bin/ls
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
@@ -1542,8 +1525,8 @@
--all, --almost-all, --block-size, --classify, --color, --colour,
--dereference, --dereference-command-line, --escape, --file-type,
--full-time, --human-readable, --ignore-backups, --inode, --no-group,
- --numeric-uid-gid, --reverse, --recursive, --si, --size, and --time-
- style, see standards(7).
+ --numeric-uid-gid, --reverse, --recursive, --scale, --si, --size, and
+ --time-style, see standards(7).
SEE ALSO
chmod(1), cp(1), fgetattr(3C), strftime(3C), terminfo(5), acl(7),
@@ -1566,6 +1549,56 @@
But if LC_COLLATE equals en_US.ISO8859-1, then leading dots as well as
case are ignored in determining the sort order.
+HISTORY
+ Support for the -/V option was added in the Oracle Solaris 11.4.54
+ release.
+
+
+ Support for the --scale option was added in the Oracle Solaris 11.4.30
+ release.
+
+
+ Support for the -k, -w, -B, -U, --all, --almost-all, --block-size,
+ --classify, --color, --colour, --dereference-command-line, --derefer-
+ ence, --escape, --file-type, --full-time, --hide-control-chars,
+ --human-readable, --ignore-backups, --inode, --no-group, --numeric-uid-
+ gid, --recursive, --reverse, --si, --size, --time-style, and --width
+ options was added in the Oracle Solaris 11.0.0 release, thanks to a
+ contribution to OpenSolaris by Jason King.
+
+
+ Support for the -/c, -/v, and -% options was added in the Oracle
+ Solaris 11.0.0 release. See sysattr(7) for details on when support was
+ added for each individual system attribute.
+
+
+ Support for the -v and -V options was added in the Solaris 10 6/06
+ (Update 2) release.
+
+
+ The /usr/xpg6/bin/ls command, and support for the -e, -E, and -H
+ options, was added in the Solaris 10 3/05 release.
+
+
+ Support for the -h and -@ options was added in the Solaris 9 release.
+
+
+ The /usr/xpg4/bin/ls command was added in the Solaris 2.5 release.
+
+
+ Support for the -A option was added in the Solaris 2.3 release. (It had
+ previously been present in Solaris 1.x releases, but was not included
+ in 2.0 through 2.2.)
+
+
+ Support for the -b, -m, -n, -o, -p, and -x options was added in the
+ Solaris 2.0 release.
+
+
+ The /usr/bin/ls command, with support for the -a, -c, -C, -d, -f, -F,
+ -g, -i, -l, -L, -q, -r, -R, -s, -t, -u, and -1 options, has been
+ included in all Sun and Oracle releases of Solaris.
+
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 23 August 2022 ls(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 ls(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/madv.so.1.1 11.4.54/man1/madv.so.1.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/madv.so.1.1 2023-02-14 17:42:28.782656467 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/madv.so.1.1 2023-02-14 17:42:45.975996380 -0800
@@ -213,15 +213,14 @@
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
SEE ALSO
- cat(1), ld.so.1(1), proc(1), sh(1), brk(2), exec(2), fork(2), memc-
- ntl(2), mmap(2), shmat(2), getexecname(3C), madvise(3C), syslog(3C),
- proc(5), attributes(7)
+ cat(1), ld.so.1(1), pmadvise(1), proc(1), sh(1), brk(2), exec(2),
+ fork(2), memcntl(2), mmap(2), shmat(2), getexecname(3C), madvise(3C),
+ syslog(3C), proc(5), attributes(7)
NOTES
The advice is inherited. A child process has the same advice as its
- parent. On exec() (see exec(2)), the advice is set back to the default
- system advice unless different advice has been configured via the madv
- shared object.
+ parent. On exec(2) the advice is set back to the default system advice
+ unless different advice has been configured via the madv shared object.
Advice is only applied to mmap regions explicitly created by the user
@@ -230,5 +229,18 @@
thread stacks) are not affected.
+ Advice given via madv.so.1 must be provided before the program is
+ started. To give advice to a program that is already running, the pmad-
+ vise(1) command may be used instead.
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 11 May 2021 madv.so.1(1)
+HISTORY
+ Support for the access_many_pset advice type was added in the Oracle
+ Solaris 11.0.0 release.
+
+
+ The madv.so.1 shared object was introduced in the Solaris 9 12/02
+ (Update 2) release.
+
+
+
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 madv.so.1(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/mail.1 11.4.54/man1/mail.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/mail.1 2023-02-14 17:42:28.814289852 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/mail.1 2023-02-14 17:42:46.034715358 -0800
@@ -345,9 +345,6 @@
dead.letter unmailable text
- /etc/passwd to identify sender and locate recipients
-
-
$HOME/mbox saved mail
@@ -400,4 +397,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 11 May 2021 mail(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 mail(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/mailx.1 11.4.54/man1/mailx.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/mailx.1 2023-02-14 17:42:28.913525036 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/mailx.1 2023-02-14 17:42:46.135075859 -0800
@@ -64,9 +64,9 @@
esting nor recommended.)
- -e Test for the presence of mail. mailx prints nothing
- and exits with a successful return code if there is
- mail to read.
+ -e Test for the presence of mail. mailx prints nothing and
+ exits with a successful return code if there is mail to
+ read.
-F Record the message in a file named after the first
@@ -109,14 +109,14 @@
-r address Use address as the return address when invoking the
- delivery program. All tilde commands are disabled.
- This option and its argument is passed to the delivery
- program.
+ delivery program. All tilde commands are disabled. This
+ option and its argument is passed to the delivery pro-
+ gram.
- -s subject Set the Subject header field to subject. subject
- should be enclosed in quotes if it contains embedded
- white space.
+ -s subject Set the Subject header field to subject. subject should
+ be enclosed in quotes if it contains embedded white
+ space.
-T file Message-id and article-id header lines are recorded in
@@ -297,14 +297,14 @@
Forwarding Mail
To forward a specific message, include it in a message to the desired
- recipients with the ~f or ~m tilde escapes. See Tilde Escapes below.
- To forward mail automatically, add a comma-separated list of addresses
- for additional recipients to the .forward file in your home directory.
- This is different from the format of the alias command, which takes a
- space-separated list instead. Note: Forwarding addresses must be valid,
- or the messages will "bounce." You cannot, for instance, reroute your
- mail to a new host by forwarding it to your new address if it is not
- yet listed in the NIS aliases domain.
+ recipients with the ~f or ~m tilde escapes. See Tilde Escapes below. To
+ forward mail automatically, add a comma-separated list of addresses for
+ additional recipients to the .forward file in your home directory. This
+ is different from the format of the alias command, which takes a space-
+ separated list instead. Note: Forwarding addresses must be valid, or
+ the messages will "bounce." You cannot, for instance, reroute your mail
+ to a new host by forwarding it to your new address if it is not yet
+ listed in the name service.
Commands
Regular commands are of the form
@@ -1523,7 +1521,7 @@
MAIL
The name of the initial mailbox file to read (in lieu of the stan-
- dard system mailbox). The default is /var/mail/username .
+ dard system mailbox). The default is "/var/mail/username".
MAILRC
@@ -1651,6 +1649,10 @@
standards(7), newaliases(8), sendmail(8)
NOTES
+ mailx only supports reading mail from local files, not IMAP or POP
+ servers.
+
+
Where shell-command is shown as valid, arguments are not always
allowed. Experimentation is recommended.
@@ -1659,10 +1661,6 @@
unset.
- The full internet addressing is not fully supported by mailx. The new
- standards need some time to settle down.
-
-
Replies do not always generate correct return addresses. Try resending
the errant reply with onehop set.
@@ -1678,4 +1676,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 23 Jul 2020 mailx(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 mailx(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/mconnect.1 11.4.54/man1/mconnect.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/mconnect.1 2023-02-14 17:42:29.744929579 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/mconnect.1 2023-02-14 17:42:46.183138628 -0800
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
host, so that it can be tested independently of all other mail soft-
ware. If no host is given, the connection is made to the local host.
Servers expect to speak the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) on
- this connection. Exit by typing the quit command. Typing EOF sends an
+ this connection. Exit by typing the QUIT command. Typing EOF sends an
end of file to the server. An interrupt closes the connection immedi-
ately and exits.
@@ -25,8 +25,8 @@
-r Raw mode: disable the default line buffering and input han-
- dling. This produces an effect similar to telnet(1) to port
- number 25.
+ dling. This produces an effect similar to nc(1) or telnet(1)
+ to port number 25.
OPERANDS
@@ -39,6 +39,12 @@
The mconnect command is IPv6-enabled. For more information, see the
ip6(4P) man page.
+
+ The mconnect command is not TLS-enabled, so traffic can be observed in
+ the clear while in transit, and should be considered to be insecure.
+ The openssl s_client(1openssl) command can be used instead to make
+ TLS-enabled SMTP connections for similar debugging.
+
FILES
/etc/mail/sendmail.hf Help file for SMTP commands
@@ -54,13 +60,13 @@
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
SEE ALSO
- telnet(1), ip6(4P), attributes(7), sendmail(8)
+ nc(1), telnet(1), s_client(1openssl), ip6(4P), attributes(7), send-
+ mail(8)
- Postel, Jonathan B., RFC 821, Simple Mail Transfer Protocol, Informa-
- tion Sciences Institute, University of Southern California, August
- 1982.
+ Klensin, John C., RFC 5321, Simple Mail Transfer Protocol, October
+ 2008. https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5321
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 19 May 2017 mconnect(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 mconnect(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/mdb.1 11.4.54/man1/mdb.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/mdb.1 2023-02-14 17:42:29.890559825 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/mdb.1 2023-02-14 17:42:46.275818149 -0800
@@ -347,8 +347,11 @@
*expression
- The value of a pointer-sized quantity at virtual address expression
- in the target's virtual address space.
+ If the virtual address expression is in the type cache and the
+ type's size is less than pointer-size then the value of that size
+ quantity from expression in the target's virtual address space,
+ otherwise the value of a pointer-sized quantity at virtual address
+ expression in the target's virtual address space.
*/[csil]/expression
@@ -2883,18 +2888,18 @@
Symbol Name Resolution, above. If the type is a structured type,
the ::print dcmd recursively prints each member of the struct or
union. If the type argument is not present and a static or global
- STT_OBJECT symbol matches the address, ::print infers the appropri-
- ate type automatically. If the type argument is specified, it can
- be followed by an optional list of member expressions, in which
- case only those members and submembers of the specified type are
- displayed. If type contains other structured types, each member
- string can refer to a sub-structure element by forming a list of
- member names separated by period ('.') delimiters. The ::print dcmd
- can only be used with objects that contain symbolic debugging
- information designed for use with mdb. Refer to NOTES, Symbolic
- Debugging Information, below for more information. After displaying
- the data structure, ::print increments dot by the size of type in
- bytes.
+ STT_OBJECT symbol matches the address or the address is in the type
+ cache, ::print infers the appropriate type automatically. If the
+ type argument is specified, it can be followed by an optional list
+ of member expressions, in which case only those members and submem-
+ bers of the specified type are displayed. If type contains other
+ structured types, each member string can refer to a sub-structure
+ element by forming a list of member names separated by period ('.')
+ delimiters. The ::print dcmd can only be used with objects that
+ contain symbolic debugging information designed for use with mdb.
+ Refer to NOTES, Symbolic Debugging Information, below for more
+ information. After displaying the data structure, ::print incre-
+ ments dot by the size of type in bytes.
If the -a option is present, the address of each member is dis-
played. If the -p option is present, ::print interprets address as
@@ -2951,6 +2956,119 @@
expansions in the format string, see the ::help printf command.
+ address ::poke[ -AnFfS ][ type ][ member ][ operator ][ -AnFfS ][ -v
+ var ][ -- ]
+ [ -s size ] value [ [ member ][ operator ][ -AnFfS ][ -v var ][ --
+ ]
+ [ -s size ] value ]
+
+ Poke the supplied values into the supplied data structure. If a
+ member is given then write the valued into that member.
+
+ Multiple member value pairs can be supplied and they will all be
+ updated. If the user specifies the size and ::poke can determine
+ the correct size, the poke will only be carried out if the sizes
+ match or the -F flag is specified. If the poke is not carried out
+ then poke will report what would be done.
+
+ If no operator is specified the default is =
+
+ OPERATORS
+
+
+ % Take the module of the contents of address by value
+
+ C equivalent: *address %= value
+
+ & And the contents of address with value
+
+ C equivalent: *address &= value
+
+ * Multiply of the contents of address by value
+
+ C equivalent: *address *= value
+
+ + Add the contents of address with value
+
+ C equivalent: *address += value
+
+ - Subtract value from the contents of address
+
+ C equivalent: *address -= value
+
+ / Divide the contents of address by value
+
+ C equivalent: *address /= value
+
+ << Shift left the contents of address by value
+
+ C equivalent: *address <<= value
+
+ = Write the value to address
+
+ C equivalent: *address = value
+
+ >> Shift right the contents of address by value. Signed values
+ are sign extended, unsigned values are zero filled.
+
+ C equivalent: *address >>= value
+
+ FLIP Flip the bit specified by value at address
+
+ C equivalent: *address ^= 1 << value
+
+ MASK And the contents of address with the ones compliment of
+ value
+
+ C equivalent: *address &= ~value
+
+ OR OR the contents of address with value
+
+ C equivalent: *address |= value
+
+ ^ XOR the contents of address with value
+
+ C equivalent: *address ^= value
+
+ ~ Invert the bits in address. This operator does not take an
+ argument.
+
+ C equivalent: *address = ~*address
+
+
+ OPTIONS
+
+ -A Poke a character array. Without the force flag arrays
+ can only be poked to character arrays and pointers to
+ characters. When poking an array to a pointer, the
+ array is poked to the target of the pointer. Poking
+ an array is identical to poking a string, except the
+ terminating NUL is not poked
+
+ -f Write to the object file.
+
+ -F Force the writing when the size does not match
+
+ -S Poke a character string. Without the force flag
+ strings can only be poked to character arrays and
+ pointers to characters. When poking an string to a
+ pointer, the string is poked to the target of the
+ pointer.
+
+ -s size Set the size to poke. If the type is specified either
+ explicitly or implicitly, from a symbol the size is
+ not required. The size should only be needed if the
+ target does not have CTF debugging information. If
+ given this must be one of: 1, 2, 4 or 8.
+
+ -n variable Store the old value in variable.
+
+ -v Do not write. Just report what would have been
+ attempted
+
+
+
+
::quit
$q
@@ -3222,8 +3340,8 @@
- [ address ] ::stack [-A][-r][-t][-v][-x] [ count ]
- [ address ] $c [-A][-r][-t][-v][-x] [ count ]
+ [ address ] ::stack [-A][-r][-T][-v][-x] [ count ]
+ [ address ] $c [-A][-r][-T][-v][-x] [ count ]
Print a C stack backtrace. If the dcmd is preceded by an explicit
address, a backtrace beginning at this virtual memory address is
@@ -3238,7 +3356,7 @@
-r Print registers when available
- -t Print the types of arguments when available
+ -T Do not print the types of arguments when available
-v Verbose, print the frame pointer
@@ -3266,14 +3384,14 @@
Step the target program one instruction. If an optional signal name
or number (see signal.h(3HEAD)) is specified as an argument, the
signal is immediately delivered to the target as part of resuming
- its execution. If the optional " over" argument is specified,
- ::step steps over subroutine calls. The ::step over argument is
- the same as the ::next dcmd. If the optional "out" argument is
- specified, the target program continues until the representative
- thread returns from the current function. If no target program is
- currently running, ::step out starts a new program running as if
- by ::run and stop at the first instruction. The :s dcmd is the same
- as ::step. The :u dcmd is the same as ::step out.
+ its execution. If the optional "over" argument is specified, ::step
+ steps over subroutine calls. The ::step over argument is the same
+ as the ::next dcmd. If the optional "out" argument is specified,
+ the target program continues until the representative thread
+ returns from the current function. If no target program is cur-
+ rently running, ::step out starts a new program running as if by
+ ::run and stop at the first instruction. The :s dcmd is the same as
+ ::step. The :u dcmd is the same as ::step out.
@@ -3312,6 +3430,59 @@
scoping operators described under Symbol Name Resolution, above.
+ [addr]::typecache [-a|-f|-r [-s][ type ]]
+
+ Add, remove, flush or view the type cache. Mdb maintains three
+ caches of types:
+
+
+ system If a type can be be verified within the target to a
+ type, typically because it references a symbol or as a
+ confirmed function argument or it is derived from an
+ entry from the system cache then it is added to the
+ system cache.
+
+ user If the system is relying on the user to specify the
+ type and can not verify the type then the virtual
+ address is added to the user cache.
+
+ pipe The pipe cache only lasts as long as an mdb pipeline.
+ If an entry appears to be illegal, for example when
+ its alignment does not match the type to which it
+ refers, it is added to the pipe cache so that subse-
+ quent dcmds in the pipeline get a valid type and can
+ deal with any error. When debugging targets that are
+ not stopped, for example a live kernel, pipe cache is
+ used.
+
+ With no options ::typecache dcmd will display any type cache infor-
+ mation for addr or the entire cache if no address is given. If the
+ output is a pipe then every address in the cache is output.
+
+ The ::typecache dcmd takes the following options:
+
+
+ -a Add addr to the type cache with type type. If the out-
+ put is a pipe addr is printed.
+
+ -r Remove addr from the type cache. If type is specified
+ then remove all the entries with that type from the
+ cache.
+
+ -f Flush the type cache.
+
+ -s When adding, deleting or flushing operate on the sys-
+ tem cache. The default is to operate on the user
+ cache.
+
+ The two caches are provided as a convenience for the user, making
+ it simple to flush the user cache without disturbing system
+ entries.
+
+ When the target changes state, for example by being continued, all
+ the caches are flushed.
+
+
::typeset [ +/-t] variable-name ...
Set attributes for named variables. If one or more variable names
@@ -3822,6 +3993,28 @@
The debugger will not enforce the usage restrictions of DCMDs.
+ notypecache
+
+ The debugger will not use the type cache.
+
+
+ typecheck=action
+
+ Control whether mdb will check the types of addresses passed to
+ dcmds and walkers. action can take the following values:
+
+ off Do not do type checking.
+
+
+ stop Stop the pipeline if the type of dot does not match one
+ of the types the dcmd or walker expects.
+
+
+ warn Print a warning if the type of dot does not match one
+ of the types the dcmd or walker expects.
+
+
+
other_fork_branch_mode=mode
When the target makes a fork(), vfork(), fork1() or spawn()
@@ -4303,10 +4496,11 @@
stopped and abandoned using the ::release -a option.
Symbolic Debugging Information
- The ::list, ::offsetof, ::print, and ::sizeof dcmds require that one or
- more load objects contain compressed symbolic debugging information
- suitable for use with mdb. This information is currently only available
- for certain Solaris kernel modules.
+ The ::list, ::offsetof, ::poke, ::print, and ::sizeof dcmds require
+ that one or more load objects contain compressed symbolic debugging
+ information suitable for use with mdb. This information is currently
+ only available for certain Solaris commands, libraries and kernel mod-
+ ules.
Developer Information
The Oracle Solaris Modular Debugger Guide provides a more detailed
@@ -4321,4 +4515,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 18 May 2022 mdb(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 mdb(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/newgrp.1 11.4.54/man1/newgrp.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/newgrp.1 2023-02-14 17:42:29.928015774 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/newgrp.1 2023-02-14 17:42:46.303307355 -0800
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@
Command
/usr/bin/newgrp [-| -l] [group]
- sh Built-in
+ /usr/sunos/bin/sh Built-in
newgrp [argument]
ksh88 Built-in
@@ -44,70 +44,22 @@
A password is demanded if the group has a password and the user is not
- listed in /etc/group as being a member of that group. The only way to
- create a password for a group is to use passwd(1), then cut and paste
- the password from /etc/shadow to /etc/group. Group passwords are anti-
- quated and not often used.
+ listed in group(5) as being a member of that group. To create a pass-
+ word for a group use pwhash(1), then cut and paste the password into
+ /etc/group. Group passwords are antiquated and not often used.
- sh Built-in
+ /usr/sunos/bin/sh Built-in
Equivalent to exec newgrp argument where argument represents the
options and/or operand of the newgrp command.
ksh88 Built-in
- Equivalent to exec to/bin/newgrp argument where argument represents
+ Equivalent to exec /usr/bin/newgrp argument where argument represents
the options and/or operand of the newgrp command.
-
- On this man page, ksh88(1) commands that are preceded by one or two *
- (asterisks) are treated specially in the following ways:
-
- 1. Variable assignment lists preceding the command remain in
- effect when the command completes.
-
-
- 2. I/O redirections are processed after variable assignments.
-
-
- 3. Errors cause a script that contains them to abort.
-
-
- 4. Words, following a command preceded by ** that are in the
- format of a variable assignment, are expanded with the same
- rules as a variable assignment. This means that tilde sub-
- stitution is performed after the = sign and word splitting
- and file name generation are not performed.
-
-
-
ksh Built-in
- Equivalent to exec to/bin/newgrp argument where argument represents
+ Equivalent to exec /usr/bin/newgrp argument where argument represents
the options and/or operand of the newgrp command.
-
- On this man page, ksh(1) commands that are preceded by one or two +
- (plus signs) are treated specially in the following ways:
-
- 1. Variable assignment lists preceding the command remain in
- effect when the command completes.
-
-
- 2. I/O redirections are processed after variable assignments.
-
-
- 3. Errors cause a script that contains them to abort.
-
-
- 4. They are not valid function names.
-
-
- 5. Words, following a command preceded by ++ that are in the
- format of a variable assignment, are expanded with the same
- rules as a variable assignment. This means that tilde sub-
- stitution is performed after the = sign and field splitting
- and file name generation are not performed.
-
-
-
OPTIONS
The following option is supported:
@@ -127,8 +79,8 @@
with that group name is used as the group ID.
- argument sh and ksh88 only. Options and/or operand of the newgrp
- command.
+ argument Only for shell built-in commands. Options and/or operand of
+ the newgrp command.
ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES
@@ -145,17 +97,10 @@
>0 An error occurred.
-FILES
- /etc/group System group file
-
-
- /etc/passwd System password file
-
-
ATTRIBUTES
See attributes(7) for descriptions of the following attributes:
- /usr/bin/newgrp, ksh88, sh
+ /usr/bin/newgrp
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
| ATTRIBUTE TYPE | ATTRIBUTE VALUE |
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
@@ -166,19 +111,14 @@
|Standard |See standards(7). |
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- ksh
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- | ATTRIBUTE TYPE | ATTRIBUTE VALUE |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- |Availability |system/core-os |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- |Interface Stability |Uncommitted |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
+
+ See the respective shell man pages for attributes of the shell built-in
+ command versions of newgrp.
SEE ALSO
- ksh(1), ksh88(1), login(1), set(1), sh(1), getgrnam(3C), Intro(3),
- group(5), passwd(5), attributes(7), environ(7), standards(7)
+ ksh(1), ksh88(1), login(1), pwhash(1), set(1), sh(1s), getgrnam(3C),
+ Intro(3), group(5), passwd(5), attributes(7), environ(7), standards(7)
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 08 Aug 2018 newgrp(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 newgrp(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/newtask.1 11.4.54/man1/newtask.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/newtask.1 2023-02-14 17:42:29.969721637 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/newtask.1 2023-02-14 17:42:46.332324323 -0800
@@ -185,6 +185,19 @@
nsswitch.conf(5), proc(5), project(5), attributes(7), privileges(7),
id(8), poolbind(8)
+HISTORY
+ The -o option was added in Oracle Solaris 11.4.30.
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 3 Nov 2021 newtask(1)
+ The -d option was added in Oracle Solaris 11.3.0.
+
+
+ The -c option was added in Solaris 9.
+
+
+ The newtask command, with support for the -F, -l, -p, and -v options,
+ was introduced in the Solaris 8 06/00 (Update 1) release.
+
+
+
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 newtask(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/nohup.1 11.4.54/man1/nohup.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/nohup.1 2023-02-14 17:42:30.008165531 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/nohup.1 2023-02-14 17:42:46.384739610 -0800
@@ -32,61 +32,58 @@
long time to run and the user wants to log out of the terminal. When a
shell exits, the system sends its children SIGHUP signals, which by
default cause them to be killed. All stopped, running, and background
- jobs ignores SIGHUP and continue running, if their invocation is pre-
+ jobs ignore SIGHUP and continue running, if their invocation is pre-
ceded by the nohup command or if the process programmatically has cho-
sen to ignore SIGHUP.
- The nohup utility causes processes to ignore SIGHUP but does not in any
- way protect those processes from other signals. Since modern shells
- sometimes send signals other than SIGHUP upon logout, it is possible
- for jobs running under /usr/bin/nohup to be killed when the controlling
- shell exits.
-
- /usr/bin/nohup Processes run by /usr/bin/nohup are immune
- to SIGHUP (hangup) and SIGQUIT (quit) sig-
- nals.
-
-
- /usr/bin/nohup -p [-Fa] Processes specified by ID are made immune to
- SIGHUP and SIGQUIT, and all output to the
- controlling terminal is redirected to
- nohup.out. If -F is specified, nohup forces
- control of each process. If -a is specified,
- nohup changes the signal disposition of
- SIGHUP and SIGQUIT even if the process has
- installed a handler for either signal.
-
-
- /usr/bin/nohup -g [-Fa] Every process in the same process group as
- the processes specified by ID are made
- immune to SIGHUP and SIGQUIT, and all output
- to the controlling terminal is redirected to
- nohup.out. If -F is specified, nohup forces
- control of each process. If -a is specified,
- nohup changes the signal disposition of
- SIGHUP and SIGQUIT even if the process has
- installed a handler for either signal.
-
-
- /usr/xpg4/bin/nohup Processes run by /usr/xpg4/bin/nohup are
- immune to SIGHUP.
-
- The nohup utility does not arrange to make
- processes immune to a SIGTERM (terminate)
- signal, so unless they arrange to be immune
- to SIGTERM or the shell makes them immune to
- SIGTERM, they receive it.
-
- If nohup.out is not writable in the current
- directory, output is redirected to
- $HOME/nohup.out. If a file is created, the
- file has read and write permission (600. See
- chmod(1). If the standard error is a termi-
- nal, it is redirected to the standard out-
- put, otherwise it is not redirected. The
- priority of the process run by nohup is not
- altered.
+ The nohup utility causes processes to ignore SIGHUP (and for
+ /usr/bin/nohup, SIGQUIT) but does not in any way protect those pro-
+ cesses from other signals. Since modern shells sometimes send signals
+ other than SIGHUP upon logout, it is possible for jobs running under
+ nohup to be killed when the controlling shell exits.
+
+ /usr/bin/nohup
+
+ Processes run by /usr/bin/nohup are immune to SIGHUP (hangup) and
+ SIGQUIT (quit) signals.
+
+
+ /usr/bin/nohup -p [-Fa]
+
+ Processes specified by ID are made immune to SIGHUP and SIGQUIT,
+ and all output to the controlling terminal is redirected to
+ nohup.out. If -F is specified, nohup forces control of each
+ process. If -a is specified, nohup changes the signal disposition
+ of SIGHUP and SIGQUIT even if the process has installed a handler
+ for either signal.
+
+
+ /usr/bin/nohup -g [-Fa]
+
+ Every process in the same process group as the processes specified
+ by ID are made immune to SIGHUP and SIGQUIT, and all output to the
+ controlling terminal is redirected to nohup.out. If -F is speci-
+ fied, nohup forces control of each process. If -a is specified,
+ nohup changes the signal disposition of SIGHUP and SIGQUIT even if
+ the process has installed a handler for either signal.
+
+
+ /usr/xpg4/bin/nohup
+
+ Processes run by /usr/xpg4/bin/nohup are immune to SIGHUP.
+
+ The nohup utility does not arrange to make processes immune to a
+ SIGQUIT (quit) signal, so unless they arrange to be immune to
+ SIGQUIT or the shell makes them immune to SIGQUIT (such as via the
+ trap(1) shell built-in command), they receive it.
+
+ If nohup.out is not writable in the current directory, output is
+ redirected to $HOME/nohup.out. If a file is created, the file has
+ read and write permission (600. See chmod(1). If the standard error
+ is a terminal, it is redirected to the standard output, otherwise
+ it is not redirected. The priority of the process run by nohup is
+ not altered.
OPTIONS
@@ -182,7 +179,7 @@
ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES
See environ(7) for descriptions of the following environment variables
that affect the execution of nohup: LANG, LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, LC_MES-
- SAGES, PATH, NLSPATH, and PATH.
+ SAGES, NLSPATH, and PATH.
HOME Determine the path name of the user's home directory: if the
output file nohup.out cannot be created in the current direc-
@@ -240,8 +237,8 @@
SEE ALSO
bash(1), batch(1), chmod(1), csh(1), disown(1), ksh88(1), nice(1),
- pgrep(1), proc(1), ps(1), setpgrp(1), sh(1), shell_builtins(1), sig-
- nal(3C), proc(5), attributes(7), environ(7), standards(7)
+ pgrep(1), proc(1), ps(1), setpgrp(1), sh(1), shell_builtins(1),
+ trap(1), signal(3C), proc(5), attributes(7), environ(7), standards(7)
WARNINGS
If you are running the Korn shell (ksh88(1)) as your login shell, and
@@ -277,6 +274,17 @@
is syntactically incorrect.
+HISTORY
+ The -a, -F, -g, and -p options were added to /usr/bin/nohup in the
+ Solaris 9 release.
+
+
+ The /usr/xpg4/bin/nohup command was added in the Solaris 2.5 release.
+
+
+ The /usr/bin/nohup command has been included in all Sun and Oracle
+ releases of Solaris.
+
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 7 Feb 2012 nohup(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 nohup(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/oawk.1 11.4.54/man1/oawk.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/oawk.1 2023-02-14 17:42:30.040666396 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/oawk.1 2023-02-14 17:42:46.450829320 -0800
@@ -396,8 +396,8 @@
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
SEE ALSO
- egrep(1), grep(1), nawk(1), sed(1), printf(3C), attributes(7), envi-
- ron(7), standards(7)
+ egrep(1), gawk(1), grep(1), nawk(1), sed(1), printf(3C), attributes(7),
+ environ(7), standards(7)
NOTES
Input white space is not preserved on output if fields are involved.
@@ -408,6 +408,13 @@
expression to be treated as a string, concatenate the null string ("")
to it.
+HISTORY
+ The oawk command was installed as /usr/bin/awk in all Sun and Oracle
+ releases of Solaris up through Oracle Solaris 11.4.32. Starting in
+ 11.4.33, this version of awk was moved to /usr/bin/oawk, and the awk
+ pkg(7) mediator was created to allow sites to choose whether
+ /usr/bin/awk links to oawk or nawk.
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 11 Feb 2021 oawk(1)
+
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 oawk(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/od.1 11.4.54/man1/od.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/od.1 2023-02-14 17:42:30.077413137 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/od.1 2023-02-14 17:42:46.504189942 -0800
@@ -450,4 +445,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 11 May 2021 od(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 od(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/pargs.1 11.4.54/man1/pargs.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/pargs.1 2023-02-14 17:42:30.117345692 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/pargs.1 2023-02-14 17:42:46.532325817 -0800
@@ -3,8 +3,8 @@
NAME
- pargs - print process arguments, environment variables, or auxil-
- iary vector
+ pargs - print process arguments, environment variables, or auxiliary
+ vector
SYNOPSIS
pargs [-acCeFlLx] [pid | core]...
@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@
-F
Force. Grabs the target process even if another process has con-
- trol.
+ trol. See USAGE below.
-l
@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@
-C
Current. When applied to the -a or -e flags, get the current values
- corresponding to those flags. Fallbacks to lite mode and prints a
+ corresponding to those flags. Falls back to lite mode and prints a
message to stderr if unable to access current data.
@@ -91,7 +91,8 @@
- The -C or -L flag can only be used once on the command line.
+ Only one of the -C or -L flags can be used in the same invocation of
+ the command.
OPERANDS
The following operands are supported:
@@ -140,6 +141,20 @@
proc(1), iconv(3C), proc(5), ascii(7), attributes(7), environ(7), for-
mats(7)
+HISTORY
+ Support for the -? and --help options was added in Oracle Solaris
+ 11.4.42.
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 18 September 2021 pargs(1)
+ Support for the -C and -L options was added in Oracle Solaris 11.3.12.
+
+
+ Support for the -l option was added in Solaris 10 3/05.
+
+
+ The pargs command, including support for the -a, -c, -e, -x, and -F
+ options, was introduced in Solaris 9.
+
+
+
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 pargs(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/plgrp.1 11.4.54/man1/plgrp.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/plgrp.1 2023-02-14 17:42:30.166894542 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/plgrp.1 2023-02-14 17:42:46.562420451 -0800
@@ -72,16 +72,20 @@
Specifying lgroups
lgroup_list is a comma separated list of one or more of the following:
+ o lgroup_ID
- - lgroup_ID
- - Range of lgroup_IDs specified as
- <start lgroup_ID>-<end lgroup_ID>
- - all
- - root
- - leaves
+ o Range of lgroup_IDs specified as <start lgroup_ID>-<end
+ lgroup_ID>
+ o all
+
+
+ o root
+
+
+ o leaves
@@ -192,15 +196,12 @@
The following example gets the home lgroup for the shell:
-
-
% plgrp $$
PID/LWPID HOME
3401/1 1
- Example 2 Setting the Home lgroup of Multiple Threads to the Root
- lgroup
+ Example 2 Setting the Home lgroup of Multiple Threads
@@ -221,8 +222,7 @@
934/630 1 => 0
- Example 3 Executing plgrp with Root lgroup as the Home lgroup of Multi-
- ple Threads
+ Example 3 Executing a New Process with Home lgroup Set
@@ -230,20 +230,14 @@
multiple threads:
-
-
% plgrp -H root -e /usr/bin/firefox
-
-
- Example 4 Getting Two Threads' Affinities for lgroups 0-2
+ Example 4 Getting Specific Threads' Affinities for Given lgroups
- The following example gets two threads' affinities for lgroups 1-2:
-
-
+ The following example gets two threads' affinities for lgroups 0-2:
% plgrp -a 0-2 101398/1 101337/1
@@ -300,17 +292,12 @@
liblgrp(3LIB), proc(5), attributes(7), prstat(8)
WARNINGS
- Like the proc(1) tools, the plgrp utility stops its target processes
- while inspecting them and reports the results when invoked with any
- option.
-
-
- There are conditions under which processes can deadlock. A process can
- do nothing while it is stopped. Stopping a heavily used process in a
- production environment (even for a short amount of time) can cause
- severe bottlenecks and even hangs of these processes, making them to be
- unavailable to users. Thus, stopping a UNIX process in a production
- environment should be avoided. See proc(1).
+ The plgrp utility stops its target processes while inspecting them. A
+ process can do nothing while it is stopped. Stopping a heavily used
+ process in a production environment (even for a short amount of time)
+ can cause severe bottlenecks and even hangs of these processes, making
+ them to be unavailable to users. Thus, stopping a UNIX process in a
+ production environment should be avoided. See proc(1).
A process that is stopped by this tool might be identified by issuing
@@ -324,6 +311,14 @@
cesses, for example, sched, can show the T status by default most of
the time.
+HISTORY
+ Support for the -? and --help options was added in Oracle Solaris
+ 11.4.42.
+
+
+ The plgrp command, including support for the -a, -A, -e, -F, -h, -H,
+ -i, and -I options was introduced in Oracle Solaris 11.0.0.
+
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 18 September 2021 plgrp(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 plgrp(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/plimit.1 11.4.54/man1/plimit.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/plimit.1 2023-02-14 17:42:30.212003609 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/plimit.1 2023-02-14 17:42:46.601467209 -0800
@@ -177,15 +177,16 @@
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
SEE ALSO
- proc(1), ulimit(1), getpflags(2), getrlimit(2), setrlimit(2), proc(5),
- attributes(7), privileges(7), scale(7)
+ prctl(1), proc(1), ulimit(1), getpflags(2), getrlimit(2), setrlimit(2),
+ proc(5), attributes(7), privileges(7), scale(7)
HISTORY
- The -h and --scale options were added in Oracle Solaris 11.4.42.
+ The -?, -h, --help, and --scale options were added in Oracle Solaris
+ 11.4.42.
The plimit command was added in Solaris 7.
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 23 August 2022 plimit(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 plimit(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/pmadvise.1 11.4.54/man1/pmadvise.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/pmadvise.1 2023-02-14 17:42:30.260943453 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/pmadvise.1 2023-02-14 17:42:46.632960314 -0800
@@ -151,15 +140,10 @@
address:
-
-
% pmap $$ | grep heap
00000001AEC8C000 8K rw----- [ heap ]
- %
% pmadvise -o 78000=access_lwp $$
- %
-
Example 2 Using the -v Option
@@ -205,9 +186,6 @@
/proc/* Process files
- /usr/prob/lib/* proc tools support files
-
-
ATTRIBUTES
See attributes(7) for descriptions of the following attributes:
@@ -226,6 +204,14 @@
SEE ALSO
madv.so.1(1), pmap(1), proc(1), madvise(3C), attributes(7), scale(7)
+HISTORY
+ Support for the -?, -h, --help, and --scale options was added in the
+ Oracle Solaris 11.4.42 release.
+
+
+ The pmadvise command, including support for the -F, -l, -o, and -v
+ options, was introduced in the Oracle Solaris 11.0.0 release.
+
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 23 August 2022 pmadvise(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 pmadvise(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/pmap.1 11.4.54/man1/pmap.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/pmap.1 2023-02-14 17:42:30.324095833 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/pmap.1 2023-02-14 17:42:46.687238362 -0800
@@ -543,7 +538,7 @@
In the above example, the shell process has a resident memory size of
- 5668Kbytes. However, a large amount of the physical memory used by the
+ 5968 Kbytes. However, a large amount of the physical memory used by the
shell is shared with other processes. When more than one process runs
the same program, they share physical memory with each other where pos-
sible, and allocate anonymous memory for any non-shared portion. In the
@@ -907,6 +887,32 @@
pmap as ISM in a running process, may be reported as heap when pmap is
run against a core file from the same process.
+HISTORY
+ Support for the -?, -h, --help, and --scale options was added in the
+ Oracle Solaris 11.4.42 release.
+
+
+ Support for the -b option was added in the Oracle Solaris 11.4.0
+ release.
+
+
+ Support for the -A and -L options was added in the Oracle Solaris
+ 11.0.0 release.
+
+
+ Support for the -a, -s, and -S options was added in the Solaris 9
+ release.
+
+
+ Support for core file operands was added in the Solaris 8 release.
+
+
+ Support for the -l and -F options was added in the Solaris 7 release.
+
+
+ The pmap command, with support for the -r and -x options, was intro-
+ duced in the Solaris 2.6 release.
+
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 23 August 2022 pmap(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 pmap(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/ppriv.1 11.4.54/man1/ppriv.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/ppriv.1 2023-02-14 17:42:30.363039297 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/ppriv.1 2023-02-14 17:42:46.724202610 -0800
@@ -400,10 +400,13 @@
The invocation is Committed. The output is Uncommitted.
SEE ALSO
- gcore(1), truss(1), setpflags(2), priv_str_to_set(3C), proc(5),
- attributes(7), privileges(7), tpd(7), zones(7)
+ gcore(1), pcred(1), truss(1), setpflags(2), priv_str_to_set(3C),
+ proc(5), attributes(7), privileges(7), tpd(7), zones(7)
HISTORY
+ The -? and --help options were added in Oracle Solaris 11.4.42.
+
+
The K and R flags for the -f option were added in Oracle Solaris
11.4.0.
@@ -431,4 +434,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 18 September 2021 ppriv(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 ppriv(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/prctl.1 11.4.54/man1/prctl.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/prctl.1 2023-02-14 17:42:30.411165019 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/prctl.1 2023-02-14 17:42:46.759677125 -0800
@@ -200,7 +200,7 @@
Enables or disables specific signal action. signum is a signal
number or string representation of a signal, it may omit the
"SIG" prefix and the string is case-insensitive, that is,
- "TERm" is recognized as SIGTERM. Setting a signal action on a
+ "TERM" is recognized as SIGTERM. Setting a signal action on a
resource control with the no-local-action global flag fails.
The valid signals that can be set on a rctl value are SIGABRT,
SIGXRES, SIGHUP, SIGSTOP, SIGTERM, and SIGKILL. Additionally,
@@ -453,10 +437,9 @@
The prctl command can use the project.cpu-cap resource control (see
- resource-controls(7)) to set and modify CPU caps for a project. (The
- same resource control can be used in the /etc/project file. See
- project(5)) The following command modifies the CPU cap to limit
- user.smith to three CPUs:
+ resource-controls(7)) to set and modify CPU caps for a project. The
+ same resource control can be used in the project(5) database. The fol-
+ lowing command modifies the CPU cap to limit user.smith to three CPUs:
# prctl -r -t privileged -n project.cpu-cap -v 300 -i project user.smith
@@ -540,4 +523,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 27 Nov 2017 prctl(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 prctl(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/preap.1 11.4.54/man1/preap.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/preap.1 2023-02-14 17:42:30.441546710 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/preap.1 2023-02-14 17:42:46.788984600 -0800
@@ -43,7 +43,7 @@
OPTIONS
- The following option is supported:
+ The following options are supported:
-F Forces the parent to reap the child, overriding safety
checks.
@@ -98,6 +98,14 @@
reaped by the parent process. Otherwise, applying preap can damage the
parent process in unpredictable ways.
+HISTORY
+ Support for the -? and --help options was added in Oracle Solaris
+ 11.4.42.
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 18 September 2021 preap(1)
+ The preap command, including support for the -F option, was introduced
+ in Solaris 9.
+
+
+
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 preap(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/proc.1 11.4.54/man1/proc.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/proc.1 2023-02-14 17:42:30.483425998 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/proc.1 2023-02-14 17:42:46.827018124 -0800
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
prun, pwait, ptime, phang - proc tools
SYNOPSIS
- /usr/bin/pflags [-r] pid | core [/lwp] ...
+ /usr/bin/pflags [-r] {pid | core}[/lwp]...
/usr/bin/pcred [pid | core]...
@@ -22,10 +22,10 @@
/usr/bin/pldd [-Fl] [pid | core]...
- /usr/bin/psig [-n] pid | core [/lwp] ...
+ /usr/bin/psig [-n] {pid | core}[/lwp]...
- /usr/bin/pstack [-F] [-D options] pid | core [/lwp] ...
+ /usr/bin/pstack [-F] [-D options] {pid | core}[/lwp]...
/usr/bin/pfiles [-n] [pid | core]...
@@ -49,7 +49,7 @@
/usr/bin/ptime [-m]command [arg]...
- /usr/bin/phang [-v] command [arg ...]
+ /usr/bin/phang [-v] command [arg]...
DESCRIPTION
The proc tools are utilities that exercise features of /proc (see
@@ -65,8 +65,8 @@
Some of the proc tools can operate on individual threads. Users can
examine only selected threads by appending /thread-id to the process-id
- or core. Multiple threads can be selected using the - and , delimiters.
- For example /1,2,7-9 examines threads 1, 2, 7, 8, and 9.
+ or core file name. Multiple threads can be selected using the - and ,
+ delimiters. For example, /1,2,7-9 examines threads 1, 2, 7, 8, and 9.
See WARNINGS.
@@ -81,7 +81,7 @@
pcred
Print or set the credentials (effective, real, saved UIDs and GIDs)
- of each process.
+ of each process. See also ppriv(1).
pldd
@@ -104,27 +104,9 @@
Print a stack trace for each process or specified LWPs in each
process. Each frame is described by an address and a symbol/offset
pair; if the underlying load object contains suitable DWARF (which
- requires compilation with "-g" option) then the corresponding
+ requires compilation with the -g option) then the corresponding
source code file name and line number are also displayed.
- In addition to the general options, pstack supports the following
- options:
-
-
- -D Specify DWARF related sub-options. The supported sub-options
- are:
-
-
- absolutepaths Display source code file names by using
- absolute paths.
-
-
- frames=n Annotate only the first n frames.
-
-
-
-
-
pfiles
@@ -181,22 +163,19 @@
-F
Force. Grabs the target process even if another process has con-
- trol.
+ trol. See USAGE below.
-n
- (psig and pfiles only) Sets non-verbose mode. psig displays signal
- handler addresses rather than names. pfiles does not display ver-
- bose information for each file descriptor. Instead, pfiles limits
- its output to the information that would be retrieved if the
- process applied fstat(2) to each of its file descriptors.
-
+ (psig and pfiles only) Sets non-verbose mode.
- -r
+ psig displays signal handler addresses rather than names.
- (pflags only) If the process is stopped, displays its machine reg-
- isters.
+ pfiles does not display verbose information for each file descrip-
+ tor. Instead, pfiles limits its output to the information that
+ would be retrieved if the process applied fstat(2) to each of its
+ file descriptors.
-v
@@ -251,6 +230,21 @@
+ To set the credentials of another process, a process must have suffi-
+ cient privilege to change its user and group ids to those specified
+ according to the rules laid out in setuid(2) and it must have suffi-
+ cient privilege to control the target process.
+
+
+ In addition to the general options, pflags supports the following
+ option:
+
+ -r
+
+ If the process is stopped, displays its machine registers.
+
+
+
In addition to the general options, pldd supports the following option:
-l
@@ -259,6 +253,20 @@
+ In addition to the general options, pstack supports the following
+ options:
+
+ -D Specify DWARF related sub-options. The supported sub-options are:
+
+ absolutepaths Display source code file names by using absolute
+ paths.
+
+
+ frames=n Annotate only the first n frames.
+
+
+
+
In addition to the general options, ptime supports the following
options:
@@ -307,22 +315,17 @@
Displays a snapshot of timing statistics for the specified pid.
-
- To set the credentials of another process, a process must have suffi-
- cient privilege to change its user and group ids to those specified
- according to the rules laid out in setuid(2) and it must have suffi-
- cient privilege to control the target process.
-
USAGE
- These proc tools stop their target processes while inspecting them and
- reporting the results: pfiles, pldd, and pstack. A process can do noth-
- ing while it is stopped. Thus, for example, if the X server is
- inspected by one of these proc tools running in a window under the X
- server's control, the whole window system can become deadlocked because
- the proc tool would be attempting to print its results to a window that
- cannot be refreshed. Logging in from another system using ssh(1) and
- killing the offending proc tool would clear up the deadlock in this
- case.
+ The pldd and pstack utilities stop their target processes while
+ inspecting them and reporting the results. While normally of no conse-
+ quence, there are cases where this behavior can be disruptive, as a
+ process can do nothing while it is stopped. Thus, for example, if the X
+ server is inspected by one of these proc tools running in a window
+ under the X server's control, the whole window system can become dead-
+ locked because the proc tool would be attempting to print its results
+ to a window that cannot be refreshed. Logging in from another system
+ using ssh(1) and killing the offending proc tool would clear up the
+ deadlock in this case.
See WARNINGS.
@@ -343,8 +346,8 @@
the name of the executable corresponding to the process which dumped
core or the names of shared libraries associated with the process.
These files are needed, for example, to provide symbol table informa-
- tion for pstack(1). If the proc tool in question is unable to locate
- the needed executable or shared library, some symbol information is
+ tion for pstack. If the proc tool in question is unable to locate the
+ needed executable or shared library, some symbol information is
unavailable for display. Similarly, if a core file from one operating
system release is examined on a different operating system release, the
runtime link-editor debugging interface (librtld_db) cannot be initial-
@@ -380,19 +383,18 @@
The human readable output is Uncommitted. The options are Committed.
SEE ALSO
- gcore(1), ldd(1), pargs(1), pgrep(1), pkill(1), plimit(1), pmap(1),
- ppgsz(1), preap(1), ps(1), ptree(1), pwd(1), rlogin(1), ssh(1),
- time(1), truss(1), wait(1), fcntl(2), fstat(2), setuid(2), sigproc-
- mask(2), dlopen(3C), signal.h(3HEAD), core(5), proc(5), process(5),
- attributes(7), zones(7)
+ gcore(1), ldd(1), pargs(1), pgrep(1), pkill(1), plimit(1), plgrp(1),
+ pmadvise(1), pmap(1), ppgsz(1), ppriv(1), preap(1), prctl(1), ps(1),
+ ptree(1), pwd(1), ssh(1), time(1), truss(1), wait(1), fcntl(2),
+ fstat(2), setuid(2), sigprocmask(2), dlopen(3C), signal.h(3HEAD),
+ core(5), proc(5), process(5), attributes(7), zones(7), prstat(8)
WARNINGS
- The following proc tools stop their target processes while inspecting
- them and reporting the results: pfiles, pldd, and pstack. However, even
- if pstack operates on an individual thread, it stops the whole process.
- The whole purpose of phang is to stop the created process. This is only
- useful as a prelude to attaching to the process from a debugger running
- elsewhere.
+ The pldd and pstack utilities stop their target processes while
+ inspecting them and reporting the results. Even if pstack operates on
+ an individual thread, it stops the whole process. The whole purpose of
+ phang is to stop the created process. This is only useful as a prelude
+ to attaching to the process from a debugger running elsewhere.
A process or thread can do nothing while it is stopped. Stopping a
@@ -415,6 +417,82 @@
The process ID returned for locked files on network file systems might
not be meaningful.
+HISTORY
+ Support for the -? and --help options was added to all of these com-
+ mands in Oracle Solaris 11.4.42.
+
+
+ The phang command, including support for the -v option, was introduced
+ in Oracle Solaris 11.4.0.
+
+
+ Support for printing DWARF information, and for the -D option to con-
+ trol such display, was added to the pstack command in Oracle Solaris
+ 11.4.0.
+
+
+ Support for printing thread names was added to the pstack command in
+ Oracle Solaris 11.3.0.
+
+
+ Support for the -l option was added to the pldd command in Oracle
+ Solaris 11.0.0.
+
+
+ Support for the /lwp modifier to operands was added to the prun and
+ pstop commands in Oracle Solaris 11.0.0.
+
+
+ Support for printing Python stack frame information was added to the
+ pstack command in Oracle Solaris 11.0.0.
+
+
+ Support for attaching to a running process, and for the -F, -m, and -p
+ options, was added to the ptime command in Oracle Solaris 11.0.0,
+ thanks to a contribution to OpenSolaris by Chad Mynhier.
+
+
+ Support for changing credentials of a running process, and for the -a,
+ -g, -G, -l, and -u options was added to the pcred command in Solaris 10
+ 3/05.
+
+
+ Support for the /lwp modifier to operands was added to the pflags and
+ pstack commands in Solaris 10 3/05.
+
+
+ Support for the -n option was added to the pfiles command in Solaris 10
+ 3/05.
+
+
+ Support for printing Java Virtual Machine stack frame information was
+ added to the pstack command in Solaris 10 3/05.
+
+
+ Support for displaying the names of signal handlers, and the -n option
+ to disable such display, was added to the psig command in Solaris 9.
+
+
+ Support for core file operands was added to the pcred, pflags, pldd,
+ and pstack commands in Solaris 8.
+
+
+ Support for the -r option was added to the pflags command in Solaris 7.
+
+
+ Support for the -F option was added to the pldd command in Solaris 7.
+
+
+ Support for the -F option was added to the pstack command in Solaris
+ 2.6.
+
+
+ The pcred, pfiles, pflags, pldd, prun, psig, pstack, pstop, ptime,
+ pwait, and pwdx commands were introduced in Solaris 2.5. These commands
+ were originally delivered in /usr/proc/bin/. They were moved to
+ /usr/bin/ in Solaris 8, with symlinks left under /usr/proc/bin/ for
+ compatibility.
+
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 18 September 2021 proc(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 proc(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/profiles.1 11.4.54/man1/profiles.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/profiles.1 2023-02-14 17:42:30.632226518 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/profiles.1 2023-02-14 17:42:46.867579048 -0800
@@ -471,7 +471,7 @@
option can be used to force the action.
- export [-f output-fle]
+ export [-f output-file]
Print configuration to standard output. Use the -f option to print
the configuration to output-file. This option produces output in a
@@ -717,18 +717,6 @@
the user(s)
-FILES
- /etc/security/exec_attr
-
-
- /etc/security/prof_attr
-
-
- /etc/user_attr
-
-
- /etc/security/policy.conf
-
ATTRIBUTES
See attributes(7) for descriptions of the following attributes:
@@ -743,11 +731,11 @@
auths(1), pfexec(1), pkg(1), roles(1), getprofattr(3C), auth_attr(5),
exec_attr(5), nsswitch.conf(5), pam.conf(5), policy.conf(5),
prof_attr(5), user_attr(5), attributes(7), audit_flags(7),
- pam_user_policy(7), privileges(7), rbac(7)
+ pam_user_policy(7), privileges(7), rbac(7), account-policy(8S)
Working With Oracle Solaris 11.4 Directory and Naming Services: LDAP
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 21 Jun 2021 profiles(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 profiles(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/ps.1 11.4.54/man1/ps.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/ps.1 2023-02-14 17:42:30.767265398 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/ps.1 2023-02-14 17:42:46.969315709 -0800
@@ -1399,6 +1399,8 @@
+-------------------------------------------------+---------+
| OPTION |RELEASE |
+-------------------------------------------------+---------+
+ |--scale |11.4.30 |
+ +-------------------------------------------------+---------+
|-C, -w, --cols, --columns, --format, --Group, |11.4.27 |
|--group, --headers, --human-readable, --lgroup, | |
|--lines, --no-headers, --no-heading, --pgid, | |
@@ -1454,4 +1456,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 23 August 2022 ps(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 ps(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/ptree.1 11.4.54/man1/ptree.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/ptree.1 2023-02-14 17:42:30.826489684 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/ptree.1 2023-02-14 17:42:46.997344161 -0800
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
- -a All. Print all processes, including children of process 0.
+ -a All. Print all processes, including system processes.
-c Contracts. Print process contract memberships in addition to
@@ -99,10 +99,26 @@
SEE ALSO
gcore(1), ldd(1), pargs(1), pgrep(1), pkill(1), plimit(1), pmap(1),
- ppgsz(1), preap(1), proc(1), ps(1), pwd(1), rlogin(1), time(1),
- truss(1), wait(1), fcntl(2), fstat(2), setuid(2), dlopen(3C), sig-
- nal.h(3HEAD), core(5), proc(5), process(5), attributes(7), zones(7)
+ ppgsz(1), preap(1), proc(1), ps(1), pwd(1), time(1), truss(1), wait(1),
+ fcntl(2), fstat(2), setuid(2), dlopen(3C), signal.h(3HEAD), core(5),
+ proc(5), process(5), attributes(7), zones(7), prstat(8)
+HISTORY
+ Support for the -? and --help options was added in Oracle Solaris
+ 11.4.42.
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 19 September 2021 ptree(1)
+ Support for printing SMF service names, when applicable, as part of the
+ contract output from the -c option, was added in Oracle Solaris
+ 11.4.12.
+
+
+ Support for the -c and -z options was added in Solaris 10 3/05.
+
+
+ The ptree command, including support for the -a option, was introduced
+ in Solaris 2.5.
+
+
+
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 ptree(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/pwd.1 11.4.54/man1/pwd.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/pwd.1 2023-02-14 17:42:30.865239863 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/pwd.1 2023-02-14 17:42:47.031723231 -0800
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
directory to standard output.
- Both the Bourne shell, sh(1), and the Korn shells, ksh(1) and ksh88(1),
+ The Bourne shell, sh(1s), and the Korn shells, ksh(1) and ksh88(1),
also have a built-in pwd command.
OPTIONS
@@ -58,9 +58,10 @@
- If an error is detected, output will not be written to standard output,
- a diagnostic message will be written to standard error, and the exit
- status will not be 0.
+ If an error, other than a write error when writing to standard output,
+ is detected, output will not be written to standard output. In such
+ cases, a diagnostic message will be written to standard error, and the
+ exit status will not be 0.
ATTRIBUTES
See attributes(7) for descriptions of the following attributes:
@@ -79,21 +80,27 @@
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
SEE ALSO
- cd(1), ksh(1), ksh88(1), sh(1), shell_builtins(1), attributes(7), envi-
- ron(7), standards(7)
+ cd(1), ksh(1), ksh88(1), pwdx(1), sh(1s), shell_builtins(1),
+ attributes(7), environ(7), standards(7)
DIAGNOSTICS
pwd: cannot determine current directory!
-
- Consult your network administrator.
-
NOTES
If you move the current directory or one above it, pwd may not give the
correct response. Use the cd(1) command with a full path name to cor-
rect this situation.
+HISTORY
+ Support for the -L, --logical, -P, --physical, and --help options was
+ added to the /usr/bin/pwd command in Oracle Solaris 11.1.17, and was
+ backported to a Solaris 10 patch released in 2014.
+
+
+ The /usr/bin/pwd command has been present in all Sun and Oracle
+ releases of Solaris.
+
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 7 Sep 2012 pwd(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 pwd(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/radadrgen.1 11.4.54/man1/radadrgen.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/radadrgen.1 2023-02-14 17:42:30.949584149 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/radadrgen.1 2023-02-14 17:42:47.070311971 -0800
@@ -3,12 +3,14 @@
NAME
- radadrgen - code generator
+ radadrgen - RAD client/server code generator
SYNOPSIS
- radadrgen [-h] [-d DIRECTORY] [-k] -l {c,java,python,python27,python35} -s
- {client,server} [-v]
- adr
+ radadrgen [-kv] [-d directory] [-J legacy|camel]
+ -l c|java|python|python37|python39 -s client|server adr
+
+
+ radadrgen [-h]
DESCRIPTION
The radadrgen command is the ADR IDL processing tool. It may be used to
@@ -25,7 +27,7 @@
Shows the help message and exits.
- -d DIRECTORY, --directory DIRECTORY
+ -d directory, --directory directory
Specifies an output directory. If none is specified, the current
directory is used.
@@ -37,8 +39,8 @@
fied, radadrgen will over-write the existing output files.
- -l {c,java,python27,python35}, --language
- {c,java,python27,python35}
+ -l c|java|python|python37|python39,
+ --language c|java|python|python37|python39
Specifies the language for which bindings should be generated. The
list of supported languages (for both client and server side) is
@@ -53,7 +55,8 @@
- -s {client,server}, --side {client,server}
+
+ -s client|server, --side client|server
Specifies whether bindings should be generated for server-side
(skeleton) implementation or client-side (stub).
@@ -72,7 +75,7 @@
Reports written filenames.
- -J {legacy,camel}, --java-method-names {legacy,camel}
+ -J legacy|camel, --java-method-names legacy|camel
A private option to switch between a legacy Java method naming
scheme where interface property and struct field accessors are
@@ -117,7 +119,7 @@
file, myapi.adr, into the directory client/python:
- $ radadrgen -s client -l python27 -d client/python myapi.adr
+ $ radadrgen -s client -l python39 -d client/python myapi.adr
@@ -170,6 +170,36 @@
SEE ALSO
attributes(7), rad(8)
+HISTORY
+ The python39 argument for the -l and --language options was added in
+ Oracle Solaris 11.4.51.
+
+
+ The -J and --java-method-names options were added in Oracle Solaris
+ 11.4.30.
+
+
+ The python27 and python35 arguments for the -l and --language options
+ were removed in Oracle Solaris 11.4.30.
+
+
+ The python37 argument for the -l and --language options was added in
+ Oracle Solaris 11.4.15.
+
+
+ The python27 and python35 arguments for the -l and --language options
+ were added in Oracle Solaris 11.4.10.
+
+
+ The -v and --verbose options were added in Oracle Solaris 11.4.0.
+
+
+ Support for the python language when generating server side code was
+ added in Oracle Solaris 11.2.8.
+
+
+ The radadrgen command was introduced in Oracle Solaris 11.2.0.
+
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 11 May 2021 radadrgen(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 radadrgen(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/read.1 11.4.54/man1/read.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/read.1 2023-02-14 17:42:31.019800046 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/read.1 2023-02-14 17:42:47.105132276 -0800
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@
/usr/bin/read
/usr/bin/read [-r] var...
- sh
+ /usr/sunos/bin/sh
read name...
csh
@@ -59,11 +59,12 @@
It does not affect the shell variables in the caller's environment.
+ This includes executing the /usr/bin/read stand-alone command.
The standard input must be a text file.
- sh
+ /usr/sunos/bin/sh
One line is read from the standard input and, using the internal field
separator, IFS (normally space or tab), to delimit word boundaries, the
first word is assigned to the first name, the second word to the second
@@ -223,7 +224,7 @@
ATTRIBUTES
See attributes(7) for descriptions of the following attributes:
- /usr/bin/read, csh, ksh88, sh
+ /usr/bin/read
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
| ATTRIBUTE TYPE | ATTRIBUTE VALUE |
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
@@ -234,19 +235,14 @@
|Standard |See standards(7). |
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- ksh
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- | ATTRIBUTE TYPE | ATTRIBUTE VALUE |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- |Availability |system/core-os |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- |Interface Stability |Uncommitted |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
+
+ See the respective shell man pages for attributes of the shell built-in
+ command versions of read.
SEE ALSO
- csh(1), ksh(1), ksh88(1), line(1), set(1), sh(1), attributes(7), envi-
+ csh(1), ksh(1), ksh88(1), line(1), set(1), sh(1s), attributes(7), envi-
ron(7), standards(7)
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 12 Jul 2011 read(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 read(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/readonly.1 11.4.54/man1/readonly.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/readonly.1 2023-02-14 17:42:31.062130632 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/readonly.1 2023-02-14 17:42:47.149894401 -0800
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
variable from reassignment
SYNOPSIS
- sh
+ /usr/sunos/bin/sh
readonly [name]...
ksh88
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
++readonly [-p] [name [= value]]...
DESCRIPTION
- sh
+ /usr/sunos/bin/sh
The given names are marked readonly and the values of these names may
not be changed by subsequent assignment. If no arguments are given, a
list of all readonly names is printed.
@@ -139,18 +139,12 @@
ATTRIBUTES
- See attributes(7) for descriptions of the following attributes:
-
-
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- | ATTRIBUTE TYPE | ATTRIBUTE VALUE |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- |Availability |system/core-os |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
+ See the respective shell man pages for attributes of the shell built-in
+ commands.
SEE ALSO
- ksh(1), ksh88(1), sh(1), typeset(1), attributes(7)
+ ksh(1), ksh88(1), sh(1s), typeset(1), attributes(7)
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 11 May 2021 readonly(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 readonly(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/rm.1 11.4.54/man1/rm.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/rm.1 2023-02-14 17:42:31.095688442 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/rm.1 2023-02-14 17:42:47.203631184 -0800
@@ -6,14 +6,14 @@
rm, rmdir - remove directory entries
SYNOPSIS
- rm [-f | --force] [-iI] [--interactive[=WHEN]]
+ /usr/bin/rm [-f | --force] [-iI] [--interactive[=WHEN]]
[-r | -R | --recursive] [--one-file-system]
[--no-preserve-root] [--preserve-root] [--help]
[-v | --verbose] file ...
/usr/bin/rm -r | -R | --recursive [-f | --force] [--help] [-i]
- [--interactive=[=WHEN]] [--one-file-system] [-I] [--preserve-root]
+ [--interactive[=WHEN]] [--one-file-system] [-I] [--preserve-root]
[--no-preserve-root] [-v | --verbose] dirname... [file]...
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@
[-v | --verbose] [--help] dirname ...
DESCRIPTION
- /usr/bin/rm /usr/xpg4/bin/rm
+ /usr/bin/rm, /usr/xpg4/bin/rm
The rm utility removes the directory entry specified by each file argu-
ment. If a file has no write permission and the standard input is a
terminal, the full set of permissions (in octal) for the file are
@@ -113,11 +113,11 @@
--preserve-root
- Do not operate recursively on '/'.
+ Do not operate recursively on '/'. This is the default.
--no-preserve-root
- Do not treat '/' specially. This is the default.
+ Do not treat '/' specially.
-v, --verbose
@@ -322,12 +322,47 @@
when $x and $y expand to empty strings.
NOTES
- A - permits the user to mark explicitly the end of any command line
- options, allowing rm to recognize file arguments that begin with a -.
- As an aid to BSD migration, rm accepts -- as a synonym for -. This
- migration aid may disappear in a future release. If a -- and a - both
- appear on the same command line, the second is interpreted as a file.
+ Files with names that start with the "-" character appear to rm as
+ options rather than operands, complicating their removal. The special
+ option "--" (two hyphens) can be used to delimit the end of the
+ options. This feature can be used with rm to remove files with names
+ that start with a "-" character. See getopt(3C).
+
+
+ For compatibility with older systems, rm accepts - as a synonym for --.
+ If a -- and a - both appear on the same command line, the second is
+ interpreted as a file argument.
+
+HISTORY
+ Support for the --force, --help, -I, --interactive, --no-preserve-root,
+ --one-file-system, --preserve-root, --recursive, -v, and --verbose
+ options was added to /usr/bin/rm in Solaris 11.4.0.
+
+
+ Support for the --ignore-fail-on-non-empty, --parents, -v, --verbose,
+ and --help options was added to rmdir in Solaris 11.4.0.
+
+
+ Support for operating recursively on the filesystem root (/) was
+ removed from both rm commands in Solaris 10 3/05.
+
+
+ Support for the -R option was added to both rm commands in Solaris 2.5.
+
+
+ The /usr/xpg4/bin/rm command was added in Solaris 2.5.
+
+
+ Support for the -p and -s options was added to rmdir in Solaris 2.0.
+
+
+ The rm command, with support for the -f, -i, and -r options, has been
+ present in all Sun and Oracle releases of Solaris.
+
+
+ The rmdir command has been present in all Sun and Oracle releases of
+ Solaris.
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 27 Nov 2017 rm(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 rm(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/roles.1 11.4.54/man1/roles.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/roles.1 2023-02-14 17:42:31.146411922 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/roles.1 2023-02-14 17:42:47.246612399 -0800
@@ -18,8 +18,8 @@
Each user may have zero or more roles. Roles have most of the
attributes of normal users and are identified like normal users in
passwd(5) and shadow(5). Each role must have an entry in the
- user_attr(5) file that identifies it as a role. Roles can have their
- own authorizations and profiles. See auths(1) and profiles(1).
+ user_attr(5) database that identifies it as a role. Roles can have
+ their own authorizations and profiles. See auths(1) and profiles(1).
Roles are not allowed to log into a system as a primary user. Instead,
@@ -67,15 +67,6 @@
1 An error occurred.
-FILES
- /etc/user_attr
-
-
- /etc/security/auth_attr
-
-
- /etc/security/prof_attr
-
ATTRIBUTES
See attributes(7) for descriptions of the following attributes:
@@ -95,4 +86,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 21 Jun 2021 roles(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 roles(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/rusage.1 11.4.54/man1/rusage.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/rusage.1 2023-02-14 17:42:31.191749190 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/rusage.1 2023-02-14 17:42:47.283084026 -0800
@@ -9,13 +9,16 @@
/usr/bin/rusage command
DESCRIPTION
- The rusage command is similar to time(1). It runs the given command ,
- which must be specified; that is, command is not optional as it is in
- the C shell's timing facility. When the command is complete, rusage
- displays the real (wall clock), the system CPU, and the user CPU times
- which elapsed during execution of the command, plus other fields in the
- rusage structure, all on one long line. Times are reported in seconds
- and hundredths of a second.
+ The rusage command executes the specified command, and on completion,
+ provides provides detailed resource usage statistics. It is similar to
+ the time(1) utility in syntax and usage. Unlike the C shell's timing
+ facility, the command to run is not optional and must be specified.
+
+
+ When the command is complete, rusage displays the real (wall clock),
+ the system CPU, and the user CPU times which elapsed during execution
+ of the command, plus other fields in the rusage structure, all on one
+ long line. Times are reported in seconds and hundredths of a second.
EXAMPLES
Example 1 The format of rusage output
@@ -25,11 +28,10 @@
The example below shows the format of rusage output.
- example% rusage wc /usr/share/man/man1/csh (1)
- 3045 13423 78071 /usr/share/man/man1/csh (1)
+ example% rusage wc /usr/share/man/man1/csh.1
+ 3045 13423 78071 /usr/share/man/man1/csh.1
2.26 real 0.80 user 0.36 sys 11 pf 38 pr 0 sw 11 rb 0 wb 16 vcx 37
icx 24 mx 0 ix 1230 id 9 is
- example%
@@ -67,7 +68,7 @@
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
SEE ALSO
- csh(1), time(1), getrusage(3C), attributes(7)
+ csh(1), ptime(1), time(1), getrusage(3C), attributes(7)
BUGS
When the command being timed is interrupted, the timing values dis-
@@ -75,4 +76,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 01 Jun 2016 rusage(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 rusage(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/set.1 11.4.54/man1/set.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/set.1 2023-02-14 17:42:31.233750934 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/set.1 2023-02-14 17:42:47.318616687 -0800
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@
rent shell and its descendents
SYNOPSIS
- sh
+ /usr/sunos/bin/sh
set [--aefhkntuvx [argument]]...
@@ -56,7 +56,7 @@
++export [-p] [name[=value]]...
DESCRIPTION
- sh
+ /usr/sunos/bin/sh
The set built-in command has the following options:
-- Does not change any of the flags. This option is useful in set-
@@ -281,8 +281,8 @@
vi Puts you in insert mode of a vi style in-
- line editor until you press the Escape key.
- This puts you in control mode. A return
+ line editor until you press the Escape key,
+ which puts you in control mode. A return
sends the line.
@@ -753,19 +753,13 @@
ATTRIBUTES
- See attributes(7) for descriptions of the following attributes:
-
-
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- | ATTRIBUTE TYPE | ATTRIBUTE VALUE |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- |Availability |system/core-os |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
+ See the respective shell man pages for attributes of the shell built-in
+ commands.
SEE ALSO
- csh(1), ksh(1), ksh88(1), read(1), sh(1), typeset(1), attributes(7),
+ csh(1), ksh(1), ksh88(1), read(1), sh(1s), typeset(1), attributes(7),
environ(7)
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 11 May 2021 set(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 set(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/shift.1 11.4.54/man1/shift.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/shift.1 2023-02-14 17:42:31.277760052 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/shift.1 2023-02-14 17:42:47.356512410 -0800
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
list or a list of field-separated words
SYNOPSIS
- sh
+ /usr/sunos/bin/sh
shift [n]
csh
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@
ksh88
*shift [n]
- ksh88
+ ksh
+shift [n]
DESCRIPTION
@@ -104,18 +104,12 @@
ATTRIBUTES
- See attributes(7) for descriptions of the following attributes:
-
-
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- | ATTRIBUTE TYPE | ATTRIBUTE VALUE |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- |Availability |system/core-os |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
+ See the respective shell man pages for attributes of the shell built-in
+ commands.
SEE ALSO
- csh(1), ksh(1), ksh88(1), sh(1), attributes(7)
+ csh(1), ksh(1), ksh88(1), sh(1s), attributes(7)
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 12 Jul 2011 shift(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 shift(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/size.1 11.4.54/man1/size.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/size.1 2023-02-14 17:42:31.315403311 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/size.1 2023-02-14 17:42:47.418520910 -0800
@@ -142,6 +142,20 @@
SEE ALSO
as(1), ld(1), ar.h(3HEAD), a.out(5), attributes(7), scale(7)
+HISTORY
+ Support for the --scale option was added in Oracle Solaris 11.4.30.
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 23 August 2022 size(1)
+ Support for the -h, -?, --help, and --version options was added in Ora-
+ cle Solaris 11.4.0.
+
+
+ Support for the -F option was added in Solaris 2.0.
+
+
+ The size command, with support for the -f, -n, -o, -x, and -V options,
+ has been included in all Sun and Oracle releases of Solaris.
+
+
+
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 size(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/soljsonvalidate.1 11.4.54/man1/soljsonvalidate.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/soljsonvalidate.1 2023-02-14 17:42:31.355167746 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/soljsonvalidate.1 2023-02-14 17:42:47.456766122 -0800
@@ -16,9 +16,9 @@
By default, soljsonvalidate loads all schemas reachable through descent
from /usr/share/lib/json/soljsonvalidate. Any schema therein will iden-
tify itself w/ the 'id' tag. Any JSON files claiming adherence to one
- of those schemas (w/ the '$schema' attribute) will be validated against
- that schema. No schemas are loaded from the default path if -n option
- is specified.
+ of those schemas with the '$schema' attribute will be validated against
+ that schema. No schemas are loaded from the default path if the -n
+ option is specified.
All paths passed to soljsonvalidate are examined. Directories are
@@ -29,7 +29,7 @@
If no paths are specified, soljsonvalidate will attempt to read JSON
- file from stdin and validate that.
+ data from stdin and validate that.
All matching JSON files are opened and checked for JSON syntax errors.
@@ -42,13 +42,12 @@
with a 0 error code. If errors occur, appropriate error messages are
printed. If the -v option is specified, soljsonvalidate prints a line
for each json object successfully validated in addition to any error
- messages generated by json object failing validation.
+ messages generated by json objects failing validation.
- Note that "/usr/bin/soljsonvalidate <path>
- ..." is equivalent to "/usr/bin/soljsonvalidate -n
- /usr/share/lib/json/soljsonvalidate <path>
- ..".
+ Note that "/usr/bin/soljsonvalidate path ..." is equivalent to
+ "/usr/bin/soljsonvalidate -n /usr/share/lib/json/soljsonvalidate path
+ ...".
The output of this command, both for errors and with the -v option, is
@@ -132,12 +127,16 @@
displays the following two error messages:
+ % soljsonvalidate -n solaris.json
+ solaris.json: validation error: key 'architecture' does not have
+ value ('"ARM"') contained in enum ["SPARC", "x86"]
+ solaris.json: validation error: key 'number-of-sockets' is 0.000000,
+ less than minimum value 1.000000
- bash: soljsonvalidate -n solaris.json
- solaris.json: validation error: key 'architecture' does not have value ('"ARM"') contained in enum ["SPARC", "x86"]
- solaris.json: validation error: key 'number-of-sockets' is 0.000000, less than minimum value 1.000000
+ In the actual command output, each error would be on a single line,
+ without the line breaks shown here.
ATTRIBUTES
See attributes(7) for descriptions of the following attributes:
@@ -155,6 +154,9 @@
SEE ALSO
soljsonfmt(1)
+HISTORY
+ The soljsonvalidate command was introduced in Oracle Solaris 11.4.0.
+
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 18 Nov 2016 soljsonvalidate(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 soljsonvalidate(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/spell.1 11.4.54/man1/spell.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/spell.1 2023-02-14 17:42:31.405208536 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/spell.1 2023-02-14 17:42:47.493093461 -0800
@@ -25,9 +25,9 @@
If there are no file arguments, words to check are collected from the
- standard input. spell ignores most troff, tbl(1), and eqn constructs.
- Copies of all output words are accumulated in the history file (spell-
- hist), and a stop list filters out misspellings (for example,
+ standard input. spell ignores most troff(1), tbl(1), and eqn(1) con-
+ structs. Copies of all output words are accumulated in the history file
+ (spellhist), and a stop list filters out misspellings (for example,
their=thy-y+ier) that would otherwise pass.
@@ -88,9 +88,9 @@
local_file is the name of a user-provided file that con-
tains a sorted list of words, one per line. Words found
in local_file are removed from spell's output. Use
- sort(1) to order local_file in ASCII collating sequence.
- If this ordering is not followed, some entries in
- local_file might be ignored.
+ sort(1) to order local_file in ASCII collating sequence
+ (LC_COLLATE=C). If this ordering is not followed, some
+ entries in local_file might be ignored.
OPERANDS
@@ -145,7 +145,7 @@
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
SEE ALSO
- deroff(1), sort(1), tbl(1), attributes(7), environ(7)
+ deroff(1), eqn(1), sort(1), tbl(1), troff(1), attributes(7), environ(7)
NOTES
spell works only on English words defined in the U.S. ASCII codeset.
@@ -164,6 +164,14 @@
history file. If no monitoring is desired, one can create the appropri-
ate spell history file with write permission disabled.
+HISTORY
+ Support for the -i option was added to the spell command in Solaris
+ 2.0.
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 11 May 2021 spell(1)
+ The spell command, with support for the -b, -l, -v, and -x options, has
+ been included in all Sun and Oracle releases of Solaris.
+
+
+
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 spell(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/ssh-socks5-proxy-connect.1 11.4.54/man1/ssh-socks5-proxy-connect.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/ssh-socks5-proxy-connect.1 2023-02-14 17:42:31.441501228 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/ssh-socks5-proxy-connect.1 2023-02-14 17:42:47.528245320 -0800
@@ -6,14 +6,13 @@
ssh-socks5-proxy-connect - Secure Shell proxy for SOCKS5
SYNOPSIS
- /usr/lib/ssh/ssh-socks5-proxy-connect
- [-h socks5_proxy_host]
+ /usr/lib/ssh/ssh-socks5-proxy-connect [-h socks5_proxy_host]
[-p socks5_proxy_port] connect_host connect_port
DESCRIPTION
- A proxy command for ssh(1) that uses SOCKS5 (RFC 1928). Typical use is
- where connections external to a network are only allowed via a socks
- gateway server.
+ The ssh-socks5-proxy-connect utility is a proxy command for ssh(1) that
+ uses SOCKS5 (RFC 1928). The typical use is where connections external
+ to a network are only allowed via a socks gateway server.
This proxy command does not provide any of the SOCKS5 authentication
@@ -102,8 +101,8 @@
proxy host.
- SOCKS5_PORT Takes socks5_proxy_port operand to specify the
- default proxy port.
+ SOCKS5_PORT Takes socks5_proxy_port operand to specify the default
+ proxy port.
EXIT STATUS
@@ -128,9 +127,12 @@
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
SEE ALSO
- ssh(1), ssh-http-proxy-connect(1), attributes(7)
+ ssh(1), ssh-http-proxy-connect(1), ssh_config(5), attributes(7)
+HISTORY
+ The ssh-socks5-proxy-connect utility was introduced in Solaris 9.
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 12 Jul 2021
+
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022
ssh-socks5-proxy-connect(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/sstore.1 11.4.54/man1/sstore.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/sstore.1 2023-02-14 17:42:31.523685336 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/sstore.1 2023-02-14 17:42:47.567068349 -0800
@@ -149,7 +149,8 @@
A statistics store identifier (SSID). To specify multiple identi-
fiers, separate identifiers with spaces or use wildcards or splices
- as described in Using Oracle Solaris 11.4 Analytics.
+ as described in Using Oracle Solaris 11.4 StatsStore and System Web
+ Interface.
SUB-COMMANDS
@@ -341,7 +342,7 @@
- This example exports historical statistics for the Filesystems display-
+ This example exports historical statistics for the filesystems display-
ing all the stats which wildcard matches.
@@ -403,7 +404,7 @@
description: cpu instance
- Example 12 Display Information on all the indentifiers that are cur-
+ Example 12 Display Information on all the identifiers that are cur-
rently available in sstore.
@@ -475,8 +474,19 @@
libsstore(3LIB), ssid-metadata(7), ssid-op(7), sstoreadm(1), sstored(8)
- Using Oracle Solaris 11.4 Analytics
+ Using Oracle Solaris 11.4 StatsStore and System Web Interface
+
+HISTORY
+ The sstore export subcommand was modified in Oracle Solaris 11.4.36 to
+ allow the -p and -i options to be used together.
+
+
+ The minutes, hours, days and weeks modifiers for the -i option were
+ added in Oracle Solaris 11.4.27.
+
+
+ The sstore command was introduced in Oracle Solaris 11.4.0.
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 27 May 2021 sstore(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 sstore(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/stackdiag.1 11.4.54/man1/stackdiag.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/stackdiag.1 2023-02-14 17:42:31.570269168 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/stackdiag.1 2023-02-14 17:42:47.605015812 -0800
@@ -44,37 +44,40 @@
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
+ -n max-results
- -n max results The number following the -n option specifies the
- maximum number of potential bugs to output. The
- default is 5.
+ The number following the -n option specifies the maximum number of
+ potential bugs to output. The default is 5.
- -d stackDB-path The operand following the -d option specifies the
- location of the stackDB database file which stack-
- diag should use as the database to query. Default is
- /var/db/stackDB/stackDB.
+ -d stackDB-path
+ The operand following the -d option specifies the location of the
+ stackDB database file which stackdiag should use as the database to
+ query. The default is /var/db/stackDB/stackDB.
- -s If passed, the operand stack-resource is assumed to
- be the stack string. Useful for manually entering
- stacks on the command line.
+ -s
- -l Displays all results. Results are organized in
- groups if they are similar enough. By default,
- stackdiag only prints one result in each group.
+ If passed, the operand stack-resource is assumed to be the stack
+ string. Useful for manually entering stacks on the command line.
+ -l
+
+ Displays all results. Results are organized in groups if they are
+ similar enough. By default, stackdiag only prints one result in
+ each group.
+
OPERANDS
The following operand is supported:
+ stack-resource
- stack-resource Path to the file containing the stack string. If "-",
- then standard input is used. If -s option is passed,
- then the operand is taken as the stack string.
-
+ Path to the file containing the stack string. If "-", then standard
+ input is used. If -s option is passed, then the operand is taken as
+ the stack string.
EXIT STATUS
@@ -84,23 +87,37 @@
>0 An error occurred.
+FILES
+ /var/db/stackDB/stackDB
+
+ Default database mapping stacks to known bugs in the Oracle Solaris
+ bug database. New versions of the data are provided by updating the
+ pkg:/system/diagnostic/stackdb package. These updates may be auto-
+ mated via the svc:/system/auto-update:stackdb service.
+
EXAMPLES
- Example 1 Querying for bugs with the stack string Containing the Sym-
- bols "kadmin" and "uadmin", and Report a Maximum of 3 bugs
+ Example 1 Querying for bugs by stack string
+
+
+
+ This command queries for bugs with the stack string containing the sym-
+ bols "kadmin" and "uadmin", and reports a maximum of 3 bugs:
$ stackdiag -n 3 -s "kadmin | uadmin"
+ Example 2 Using a Different Stack Database, and the Stack in a File
- Example 2 Querying for bugs by Using a Different Stack Database, and
- the stack String Being Present in a File
- $ stackdiag -d ./mystackDB ./panicstack.txt
+ This command queries for bugs using a different stack database, and
+ with the stack specified in a file:
+ $ stackdiag -d ./mystackDB ./panicstack.txt
+
ATTRIBUTES
See attributes(7) for descriptions of the following attributes:
@@ -122,6 +139,14 @@
SEE ALSO
asr-notify(8), fmadm(8), smtp-notify(8), snmp-notify(8)
+HISTORY
+ The svc:/system/auto-update:stackdb service was introduced in Oracle
+ Solaris 11.4.36.
+
+
+ The stackdiag command, with support for the -d, -l, -n, and -s options,
+ was introduced in Oracle Solaris 11.4.0.
+
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 31 Aug 2020 stackdiag(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 stackdiag(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/strchg.1 11.4.54/man1/strchg.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/strchg.1 2023-02-14 17:42:31.609710203 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/strchg.1 2023-02-14 17:42:47.642474122 -0800
@@ -32,8 +32,8 @@
driver.
OPTIONS
- The following options apply to strchg and, -h, -f, and -p are mutually
- exclusive.
+ The following options apply to strchg. The options -h, -f, and -p are
+ mutually exclusive.
-a
@@ -73,8 +73,8 @@
- The following options apply to strconf and, -m and -t are mutually
- exclusive.
+ The following options apply to strconf. The options -m and -t are mutu-
+ ally exclusive.
-m module Determine if the named module is present on a stream. If
it is, strconf prints the message yes and returns zero. If
@@ -197,4 +198,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 24 Mar 2005 strchg(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 strchg(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/suspend.1 11.4.54/man1/suspend.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/suspend.1 2023-02-14 17:42:31.641932403 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/suspend.1 2023-02-14 17:42:47.669778495 -0800
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@
suspend - shell built-in function to halt the current shell
SYNOPSIS
- sh
+ /usr/sunos/bin/sh
suspend
csh
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@
suspend
DESCRIPTION
- sh
+ /usr/sunos/bin/sh
Stops the execution of the current shell (but not if it is the login
shell).
@@ -29,18 +29,12 @@
shell).
ATTRIBUTES
- See attributes(7) for descriptions of the following attributes:
-
-
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- | ATTRIBUTE TYPE | ATTRIBUTE VALUE |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- |Availability |system/core-os |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
+ See the respective shell man pages for attributes of the shell built-in
+ commands.
SEE ALSO
- kill(1), sh(1), csh(1), ksh(1), attributes(7), su(8)
+ kill(1), sh(1s), csh(1), ksh(1), attributes(7), su(8)
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 15 Apr 1994 suspend(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 suspend(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/svc-create-first-boot.1 11.4.54/man1/svc-create-first-boot.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/svc-create-first-boot.1 2023-02-14 17:42:31.693512996 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/svc-create-first-boot.1 2023-02-14 17:42:47.706441267 -0800
@@ -6,8 +6,8 @@
svc-create-first-boot - create a first boot service package
SYNOPSIS
- svc-create-first-boot [-s|--source <script_path>] [-d|--destination <p5ppath|repoURI>]
- [-o|--options <name=value>]... [-h |--help]
+ svc-create-first-boot [-h|--help] [-s|--source <script_path>]
+ [-d|--destination <p5ppath|repoURI>] [-o|--options <name=value>]...
DESCRIPTION
The svc-create-first-boot command is used to create a first boot ser-
@@ -58,69 +58,75 @@
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
+ -h
- -h Display the command usage
+ Display the command usage
- -s <script_path> Path to the script to be run on first boot
+ -s <script_path>
+ Path to the script to be run on first boot
- -d <p5ppath|repoURI> URI to an existing repository or path to where
- the p5p archive will be stored. file:, file://
- prefix are supported for repository or p5p ar-
- chive file. http:// prefix is supported only
- for repository URI
+ -d <p5ppath|repoURI>
- -o name=value Name value pairs to customize different aspects
- of first boot service package
+ URI to an existing repository or path to where the p5p archive will
+ be stored. file:, file:// prefix are supported for repository or
+ p5p archive file. http:// prefix is supported only for repository
+ URI
+ -o name=value
+
+ Name value pairs to customize different aspects of first boot ser-
+ vice package
+
EXTENDED DESCRIPTION
The names and their corresponding values supported are as follows:
+ service-name
+
+ The name of the first boot service which would run the first boot
+ configuration script in the client. Any string of the form
+ svc:/site/<service_name>:[<instance_name>] is supported. Default
+ service-name is 'first-boot-svc'.
+
- service-name The name of the first boot service which would
- run the first boot configuration script in the
- client. Any string of the form svc:/site/<ser-
- vice_name>:[<instance_name>] is supported.
- Default service-name is 'first-boot-svc'.
+ service-start-timeout
+ Refer to the timeout section of smf_method(7) man-page to configure
+ this option. Default value is 60 seconds.
- service-start-timeout Refer to the timeout section of smf_method(7)
- man-page to configure this option. Default
- value is 60 seconds.
+ service-dependency
- service-dependency The services on which the first boot service
- would depend on.
+ The services on which the first boot service would depend on.
- package-fmri The fmri of the first boot service package to
- be installed on the AI client. The value sup-
- ported is any valid package fmri. Default
+ package-fmri
+
+ The fmri of the first boot service package to be installed on the
+ AI client. The value supported is any valid package fmri. Default
package-fmri is 'first-boot-svc'.
- package-publisher The publisher name for the first boot service
- package. The value supported is any valid
- package publisher name prefix. Default pub-
+ package-publisher
+
+ The publisher name for the first boot service package. The value
+ supported is any valid package publisher name prefix. Default pub-
lisher-name is 'firstboot'.
- rerun-on-clone rerun-on-clone, which has a default value of
- true, controls whether the first boot script
- is run on every deployment of a clone ar-
- chive/zone that contains this package. Note
- that, when the script reruns on clone sys-
- tems/zones, it should be able to detect what
- has already been configured as a result of
- this being a cloned system/zone and behave
- accordingly. See archiveadm(8) for information
- on clone archives, and zoneadm(8) for informa-
- tion on zone cloning.
+ rerun-on-clone
+ rerun-on-clone, which has a default value of true, controls whether
+ the first boot script is run on every deployment of a clone ar-
+ chive/zone that contains this package. Note that, when the script
+ reruns on clone systems/zones, it should be able to detect what has
+ already been configured as a result of this being a cloned sys-
+ tem/zone and behave accordingly. See archiveadm(8) for information
+ on clone archives, and zoneadm(8) for information on zone cloning.
@@ -128,9 +134,13 @@
svc:/milestone/multiuser will be added to first boot smf service.
EXAMPLES
- Example 1 Creating first boot service package in interactive mode:
+ Example 1 Using Interactive Mode
+
+ The following command creates a first boot service package using the
+ interactive mode of the command.
+
# svc-create-first-boot
Enter the path to the script to be run at first boot:
@@ -176,8 +186,7 @@
Enter the URI to an existing repository or the path to the generated p5p archive []:
-
- Example 2 Creating a first boot service package in command line mode
+ Example 2 Using Command Line Mode
@@ -188,14 +197,12 @@
svc-create-first-boot -s /home/myscript -d myp5p.p5p
-
- Example 3 Creating a first boot service package and publishing to an
- existing repository
+ Example 3 Publishing to an Existing Repository
- The first boot service package can be published to a local or a non-
- local repository (via HTTP)
+ The first boot service package can be published to a local repository,
+ or via HTTP to a non-local repository.
@@ -200,17 +207,28 @@
Local repository:
+
+
svc-create-first-boot -s /home/myscript -d file:///export/repoSolaris11
+
svc-create-first-boot -s /home/myscript -d /export/repoSolaris11
+
+
+
+
Non-local repository:
+
+
svc-create-first-boot -s ./myscript -d \
http://<host_name>:<port_no>
+ Example 4 Providing Customizations using the Command Line
+
- Example 4 Creating a first boot service package with customizations
- provided using command line
+ The following command creates a first boot service package with cus-
+ tomizations provided using command line options.
svc-create-first-boot -s ./myscript -d ./myp5p.p5p \
@@ -220,9 +238,12 @@
-o package-fmri=svcpack -o package-publisher=svcpub
+ Example 5 Preventing Rerun on Cloned Instance of the Installed Client
- Example 5 Creating a first boot service which will not rerun on cloned
- instance of the installed client
+
+
+ The following command creates a first boot service which will not rerun
+ on cloned instance of the installed client.
@@ -256,8 +274,12 @@
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
SEE ALSO
- pkgrecv(1), pkgrepo(1), pkgsend(1), svcprop(1), svcbundle(8)
+ pkgrecv(1), pkgrepo(1), pkgsend(1), svcprop(1), smf(7), svcbundle(8)
+
+HISTORY
+ The svc-create-first-boot command was introduced in Oracle Solaris
+ 11.4.0.
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 11 May 2021 svc-create-first-boot(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 svc-create-first-boot(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/svcprop.1 11.4.54/man1/svcprop.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/svcprop.1 2023-02-14 17:42:31.735850636 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/svcprop.1 2023-02-14 17:42:47.750385441 -0800
@@ -11,21 +11,19 @@
svcprop [-afqtv] [-C | -c |-s snapshot] [-G name [-G name]... [-P name]]
- [-g pgtype]... -l layer[,...]
- {FMRI | pattern}...
+ [-g pgtype]... -l layer[,...] {FMRI | pattern}...
svcprop -w [-fqtv] [-p [name/]name] {FMRI | pattern}
- svcprop -w [-fqtv] [-G name [-G name]... [-P name]]
- {FMRI | pattern}
+ svcprop -w [-fqtv] [-G name [-G name]... [-P name]] {FMRI | pattern}
DESCRIPTION
- The svcprop utility prints values of properties in the service configu-
- ration repository. Properties are selected by -p options and the oper-
- ands. The template property group types can be any one of the follow-
- ing; template, template_pg_pattern, and template_prop_pattern.
+ The svcprop utility prints values of properties in the smf(7) service
+ configuration repository. Properties are selected by -p options and the
+ operands. The template property group types can be any one of the fol-
+ lowing: template, template_pg_pattern, and template_prop_pattern.
The default behavior of svcprop without the -C, -c, or -s options is to
@@ -37,9 +35,9 @@
The effective properties of a service instance includes properties in
- the composed view of its running snapshot(see smf(7) for an explanation
- of property composition and snapshot states). A composed view of all
- the properties in the non-persistent property groups of the service
+ the composed view of its running snapshot (see smf(7) for an explana-
+ tion of property composition and snapshot states). A composed view of
+ all the properties in the non-persistent property groups of the service
instance are also included in the effective properties despite them not
being part of the running snapshot. If the running snapshot does not
exist then the instance's directly attached properties are used
@@ -399,7 +375,7 @@
example% svcprop -p config -l admin svc:/network/dns/client
- config/domain astring admin my.domain.com
+ config/domain astring admin corp.example.com
config/nameserver net_address admin 10.22.33.44 10.44.33.11
@@ -491,6 +458,16 @@
smf_method(7), smf_security(7), inetd(8), svc.startd(8), svcadm(8),
svccfg(8)
+HISTORY
+ The -G and -P options were added in Oracle Solaris 11.4.0.
+
+
+ The -a, -g, and -l options were added in Oracle Solaris 11.1.0.
+
+
+ The svcprop command, with support for the -C, -c, -f, -p, -q, -s, -t,
+ -v, and -w options, was introduced in Solaris 10 3/05.
+
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 21 May 2021 svcprop(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 svcprop(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/svcs.1 11.4.54/man1/svcs.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/svcs.1 2023-02-14 17:42:31.786574195 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/svcs.1 2023-02-14 17:42:47.792083596 -0800
@@ -100,6 +100,12 @@
Omits the column headers.
+ -i
+
+ Displays date/time in the legacy non-parsable format instead of ISO
+ 8601-1:2019.
+
+
-L
Prints the path to the logfile created by the service restarter of
@@ -259,12 +265,6 @@
- -i
-
- Displays date/time in the legacy non-parsable format instead of ISO
- 8601:22019.
-
-
OPERANDS
The following operands are supported:
@@ -314,7 +312,7 @@
The following is a typical example of a glob pattern:
- qexample% svcs \*ssh\*
+ example% svcs \*ssh\*
STATE STIME FMRI
online 2022-03-14T10:25:22 svc:/network/ssh:default
@@ -318,12 +316,10 @@
STATE STIME FMRI
online 2022-03-14T10:25:22 svc:/network/ssh:default
-
Note that changing the pattern to remove the leading glob results
in different behavior:
-
- qexample% svcs ssh\*
+ example% svcs ssh\*
svcs: Pattern 'svc:/ssh:*' doesn't match any instances
STATE STIME FMRI
@@ -590,7 +577,7 @@
tem/webui.
- example%
+ example% svcs -x
svc:/system/identity:cert (System identity (X.509 certificate))
State: maintenance since 2022-04-13T12:18:35
Reason: Maintenance requested by an administrator.
@@ -601,8 +588,7 @@
-
- example%
+ example% svcs -xv
svc:/system/identity:cert (System identity (X.509 certificate))
State: maintenance since 2022-04-13T12:18:35
Reason: Maintenance requested by an administrator.
@@ -698,12 +682,21 @@
smf(7), svc.periodicd(8), svc.startd(8), svcadm(8), svccfg(8)
HISTORY
- Support for the -i option and variable SMF_SVCS_DATE_FMT, was added in
- the Oracle Solaris 11.4.48 release.
+ Support for the -i option and the SMF_SVCS_DATE_FMT environment vari-
+ able was added in the Oracle Solaris 11.4.48 release.
+
+
+ Support for the -L option was added in the Oracle Solaris 11.2.0
+ release.
+
+
+ Support for the -n option was added in the Oracle Solaris 11.0.0
+ release.
- The svcs command was added in Solaris 10.
+ The svcs command, with support for the -a, -d, -D, -H, -l, -o, -p, -R,
+ -s, -S, -v, -x, and -? options, was introduced in Solaris 10 3/05.
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 12 April 2022 svcs(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 svcs(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/tabs.1 11.4.54/man1/tabs.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/tabs.1 2023-02-14 17:42:31.816151186 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/tabs.1 2023-02-14 17:42:47.821001425 -0800
@@ -7,8 +7,8 @@
SYNOPSIS
tabs [-n | --file
- [[-code] | -a | -a2 | -c | -c2 | -c3 | -f | -p | -s | -u]]
- q!! [+m [n]] [-T type]
+ [[-code] -a | -a2 | -c | -c2 | -c3 | -f | -p | -s | -u]]
+ [+m [n]] [-T type]
tabs [-T type] [+ m [n]] n1 [, n2 ,...]
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@
DESCRIPTION
The tabs utility sets the tab stops on the user's terminal according to
a tab specification, after clearing any previous settings. The user's
- terminal must have remotely settable hardware tabs.
+ terminal must have remotely settable tabs.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported. If a given flag occurs more than
@@ -43,7 +43,7 @@
Tab Specification
Four types of tab specification are accepted. They are described below:
- canned, repetitive (-n), arbitrary (n1,n2,...), and file (-file).
+ canned, repetitive (-n), arbitrary (n1,n2,...), and file (--file).
If no tab specification is given, the default value is -8, that is,
@@ -125,14 +125,15 @@
See OPERANDS.
File
- -file If the name of a file is given, tabs reads the first line of
- the file, searching for a format specification (see fspec(5)).
- If it finds one there, it sets the tab stops according to it,
- otherwise it sets them as -8. This type of specification may
- be used to make sure that a tabbed file is printed with cor-
- rect tab settings, and would be used with the pr command:
+ --file If the name of a file is given, tabs reads the first line of
+ the file, searching for a format specification (see
+ fspec(5)). If it finds one there, it sets the tab stops
+ according to it, otherwise it sets them as -8. This type of
+ specification may be used to make sure that a tabbed file is
+ printed with correct tab settings, and would be used with the
+ pr command:
- example% tabs - file; pr file
+ example% tabs --file; pr file
@@ -186,12 +187,12 @@
- The last command is an example of using -file (file specification) to
+ The last command is an example of using --file (file specification) to
indicate that tabs should be set according to the first line of
$HOME/fspec.list/att4425 (see fspec(5)).
- example% tabs -$HOME/fspec.list/att4425
+ example% tabs --$HOME/fspec.list/att4425
ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES
@@ -249,4 +250,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 1 Feb 1995 tabs(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 tabs(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/talk.1 11.4.54/man1/talk.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/talk.1 2023-02-14 17:42:31.866784753 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/talk.1 2023-02-14 17:42:47.852884945 -0800
@@ -136,9 +136,6 @@
FILES
- /etc/hosts host name database
-
-
/var/adm/utmpx user and accounting information for talk
@@ -157,8 +154,8 @@
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
SEE ALSO
- mail(1), mesg(1), pr(1), stty(1), who(1), write(1), termios(3C),
- attributes(7), environ(7), standards(7), talkd(8)
+ mail(1), mesg(1), stty(1), who(1), write(1), termios(3C), utmpx(5),
+ attributes(7), environ(7), standards(7), in.talkd(8)
NOTES
Typing Control-L redraws the screen, while the erase, kill, and word
@@ -168,4 +165,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 11 May 2021 talk(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 talk(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/test.1 11.4.54/man1/test.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/test.1 2023-02-14 17:42:31.915967980 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/test.1 2023-02-14 17:42:47.886841932 -0800
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@
[ [condition] ]
- sh
+ /usr/sunos/bin/sh
test [condition]
@@ -110,194 +110,241 @@
The following primaries can be used to construct condition:
- -a file True if file exists. (Not available in sh.)
+ -a file
+ True if file exists. (Not available in /usr/sunos/bin/sh.)
- -b file True if file exists and is a block special
- file.
+ -b file
- -c file True if file exists and is a character spe-
- cial file.
+ True if file exists and is a block special file.
- -d file True if file exists and is a directory.
+ -c file
+ True if file exists and is a character special file.
- -e file True if file exists. (Not available in sh.)
+ -d file
- -f file True if file exists and is a regular file.
- Alternatively, if /usr/bin/sh users specify
- /usr/ucb before /usr/bin in their PATH
- environment variable, then test returns
- true if file exists and is (not-a-direc-
- tory). The csh test and [ built-ins always
- use this alternative behavior.
+ True if file exists and is a directory.
- -g file True if file exists and its set group ID
- flag is set.
+ -e file
+ True if file exists. (Not available in /usr/sunos/bin/sh.)
- -G file True if file exists and its group matches
- the effective group ID of this process.
- (Not available in sh.)
+ -f file
- -h file True if file exists and is a symbolic link.
+ True if file exists and is a regular file. For the csh test and [
+ built-ins, this returns true if file exists and is not a directory.
- -k file True if file exists and has its sticky bit
- set.
+ -g file
+ True if file exists and its set group ID flag is set.
- -L file True if file exists and is a symbolic link.
+ -G file
- -n string True if the length of string is non-zero.
+ True if file exists and its group matches the effective group ID of
+ this process. (Not available in /usr/sunos/bin/sh.)
- -o option True if option named option is on. This
- option is not available in csh or sh.
+ -h file
+ True if file exists and is a symbolic link.
- -O file True if file exists and is owned by the
- effective user ID of this process. This
- option is not available in sh.
+ -k file
- -p file True if file is a named pipe (FIFO).
+ True if file exists and has its sticky bit set.
- -r file True if file exists and is readable.
+ -L file
+ True if file exists and is a symbolic link.
- -s file True if file exists and has a size greater
- than zero.
+ -n string
- -S file True if file exists and is a socket. This
- option is not available in sh.
+ True if the length of string is non-zero.
- -t [file_descriptor] True if the file whose file descriptor num-
- ber is file_descriptor is open and is asso-
- ciated with a terminal. If file_descriptor
- is not specified, 1 is used as a default
- value.
+ -o option
+ True if option named option is on. (Not available in csh or
+ /usr/sunos/bin/sh.)
- -u file True if file exists and its set-user-ID
- flag is set.
+ -O file
- -w file True if file exists and is writable. True
- indicates only that the write flag is on.
- The file is not writable on a read-only
- file system even if this test indicates
- true.
+ True if file exists and is owned by the effective user ID of this
+ process. (Not available in /usr/sunos/bin/sh.)
- -x file True if file exists and is executable. True
- indicates only that the execute flag is on.
- If file is a directory, true indicates that
- file can be searched.
+ -p file
+ True if file exists and is a named pipe (FIFO).
- -z string True if the length of string string is
- zero.
+ -r file
- file1 -nt file2 True if file1 exists and is newer than
- file2. This option is not available in sh.
+ True if file exists and is readable.
- file1 -ot file2 True if file1 exists and is older than
- file2. This option is not available in sh.
+ -s file
+ True if file exists and has a size greater than zero.
- file1 -ef file2 True if file1 and file2 exist and refer to
- the same file. This option is not available
- in sh.
+ -S file
- string True if the string string is not the null
- string.
+ True if file exists and is a socket. (Not available in
+ /usr/sunos/bin/sh.)
- string1 = string2 True if the strings string1 and string2 are
- identical.
+ -t [file_descriptor]
+ True if the file whose file descriptor number is file_descriptor is
+ open and is associated with a terminal. If file_descriptor is not
+ specified, 1 is used as a default value.
- string1 != string2 True if the strings string1 and string2 are
- not identical.
+ -u file
- n1 -eq n2 True if the numbers n1 and n2 are algebrai-
- cally equal. A number may be integer,
- floating point or floating-point constant
- (such as [+/-]Inf, [+/-]NaN) in any format
- specified by C99/XPG6/SUS.
+ True if file exists and its set-user-ID flag is set.
- n1 -ne n2 True if the numbers n1 and n2 are not alge-
- braically equal. A number may be integer,
- floating point or floating-point constant
- (such as [+/-]Inf, [+/-]NaN) in any format
- specified by C99/XPG6/SUS.
+ -w file
+ True if file exists and the file permissions specify that it is
+ writable. Note that file may not be writable for other reasons that
+ test cannot detect, such as if it is on a file system mounted read-
+ only.
- n1 -gt n2 True if the number n1 is algebraically
- greater than the number n2. A number may be
- integer, floating point or floating-point
- constant (such as [+/-]Inf, [+/-]NaN) in
- any format specified by C99/XPG6/SUS.
+ -x file
- n1 -ge n2 True if the number n1 is algebraically
- greater than or equal to the number n2. A
- number may be integer, floating point or
- floating-point constant (such as [+/-]Inf,
- [+/-]NaN) in any format specified by
+ True if file exists and the file permissions specify that is exe-
+ cutable. Note that file may not be executable for other reasons
+ that test cannot detect, such as if it is on a file system mounted
+ with the noexec option.
+
+ If file is a directory, true indicates that file can be searched.
+
+
+ -z string
+
+ True if the length of string string is zero.
+
+
+ file1 -nt file2
+
+ True if file1 exists and is newer than file2. (Not available in
+ /usr/sunos/bin/sh.)
+
+
+ file1 -ot file2
+
+ True if file1 exists and is older than file2. (Not available in
+ /usr/sunos/bin/sh.)
+
+
+ file1 -ef file2
+
+ True if file1 and file2 exist and refer to the same file. (Not
+ available in /usr/sunos/bin/sh.)
+
+
+ string
+
+ True if the string string is not the null string.
+
+
+ string1 = string2
+
+ True if the strings string1 and string2 are identical.
+
+
+ string1 != string2
+
+ True if the strings string1 and string2 are not identical.
+
+
+ n1 -eq n2
+
+ True if the numbers n1 and n2 are algebraically equal. A number may
+ be integer, floating point or floating-point constant (such as
+ [+/-]Inf, [+/-]NaN) in any format specified by C99/XPG6/SUS.
+
+
+ n1 -ne n2
+
+ True if the numbers n1 and n2 are not algebraically equal. A number
+ may be integer, floating point or floating-point constant (such as
+ [+/-]Inf, [+/-]NaN) in any format specified by C99/XPG6/SUS.
+
+
+ n1 -gt n2
+
+ True if the number n1 is algebraically greater than the number n2.
+ A number may be integer, floating point or floating-point constant
+ (such as [+/-]Inf, [+/-]NaN) in any format specified by
+ C99/XPG6/SUS.
+
+
+ n1 -ge n2
+
+ True if the number n1 is algebraically greater than or equal to the
+ number n2. A number may be integer, floating point or floating-
+ point constant (such as [+/-]Inf, [+/-]NaN) in any format specified
+ by C99/XPG6/SUS.
+
+
+ n1 -lt n2
+
+ True if the number n1 is algebraically less than the number n2. A
+ number may be integer, floating point or floating-point constant
+ (such as [+/-]Inf, [+/-]NaN) in any format specified by
C99/XPG6/SUS.
- n1 -lt n2 True if the number n1 is algebraically less
- than the number n2. A number may be inte-
- ger, floating point or floating-point con-
- stant (such as [+/-]Inf, [+/-]NaN) in any
- format specified by C99/XPG6/SUS.
+ n1 -le n2
+ True if the number n1 is algebraically less than or equal to the
+ number n2. A number may be integer, floating point or floating-
+ point constant (such as [+/-]Inf, [+/-]NaN) in any format specified
+ by C99/XPG6/SUS.
- n1 -le n2 True if the number n1 is algebraically less
- than or equal to the number n2. A number
- may be integer, floating point or floating-
- point constant (such as [+/-]Inf, [+/-]NaN)
- in any format specified by C99/XPG6/SUS.
+ condition1 -a condition2
- condition1 -a condition2 True if both condition1 and condition2 are
- true. The -a binary primary is left asso-
- ciative and has higher precedence than the
- -o binary primary.
+ True if both condition1 and condition2 are true. The -a binary pri-
+ mary is left associative and has higher precedence than the -o
+ binary primary.
- condition1 -o condition2 True if either condition1 or condition2 is
- true. The -o binary primary is left asso-
- ciative.
+ condition1 -o condition2
+
+ True if either condition1 or condition2 is true. The -o binary pri-
+ mary is left associative.
These primaries can be combined with the following operators:
- ! condition True if condition is false.
+ ! condition
+
+ True if condition is false.
+
+ ( condition )
- ( condition ) True if condition is true. The parentheses ( ) can be
- used to alter the normal precedence and associativity.
- The parentheses are meaningful to the shell and,
- therefore, must be quoted.
+ True if condition is true. The parentheses ( ) can be used to alter
+ the normal precedence and associativity. The parentheses are mean-
+ ingful to the shell and, therefore, must be quoted.
@@ -369,7 +416,7 @@
effect grouping.
- Parentheses must be escaped when using sh. For example:
+ Parentheses must be escaped when using /usr/sunos/bin/sh. For example:
test \( expr1 -a expr2 \) -o expr3
@@ -510,8 +557,8 @@
- If one really wants to use the -e option in sh, use /usr/bin/test, as
- in the following:
+ If one really wants to use the -e option in /usr/sunos/bin/sh, use
+ /usr/bin/test, as in the following:
if [ ! -h $PKG_INSTALL_ROOT$rLink ] && /usr/bin/test -e
@@ -611,7 +658,7 @@
ATTRIBUTES
See attributes(7) for descriptions of the following attributes:
- /usr/bin/test, csh, ksh88, sh
+ /usr/bin/test
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
| ATTRIBUTE TYPE | ATTRIBUTE VALUE |
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
@@ -622,22 +669,19 @@
|Standard |See standards(7). |
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- ksh
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- | ATTRIBUTE TYPE | ATTRIBUTE VALUE |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- |Availability |system/core-os |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- |Interface Stability |Uncommitted |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
+
+ See the respective shell man pages for attributes of the shell built-in
+ commands.
SEE ALSO
- csh(1), ksh(1), ksh88(1), sh(1), attributes(7), environ(7), stan-
+ csh(1), ksh(1), ksh88(1), sh(1s), attributes(7), environ(7), stan-
dards(7)
NOTES
- The not-a-directory alternative to the -f option is a transition aid
- for BSD applications and may not be supported in future releases.
+ In Oracle Solaris 11.3 and prior releases, the system also provided a
+ /usr/ucb/test command in which -f option returned true for any file
+ that was not a directory, as a transition aid for BSD applications.
+ This is not supported in Oracle Solaris 11.4.0 and later releases.
XPG4 sh, ksh88, ksh
Use arithmetic expressions such as
@@ -661,4 +705,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 4 Feb 2015 test(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 test(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/times.1 11.4.54/man1/times.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/times.1 2023-02-14 17:42:31.962873376 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/times.1 2023-02-14 17:42:47.936330393 -0800
@@ -7,14 +7,14 @@
shell
SYNOPSIS
- sh
+ /usr/sunos/bin/sh
times
ksh
times
DESCRIPTION
- sh
+ /usr/sunos/bin/sh
Print the accumulated user and system times for processes run from the
shell.
@@ -22,41 +22,13 @@
Print the accumulated user and system times for the shell and for pro-
cesses run from the shell.
-
- On this man page, ksh(1) commands that are preceded by one or two *
- (asterisks) are treated specially in the following ways:
-
- 1. Variable assignment lists preceding the command remain in
- effect when the command completes.
-
-
- 2. I/O redirections are processed after variable assignments.
-
-
- 3. Errors cause a script that contains them to abort.
-
-
- 4. Words, following a command preceded by ** that are in the
- format of a variable assignment, are expanded with the same
- rules as a variable assignment. This means that tilde sub-
- stitution is performed after the = sign and word splitting
- and file name generation are not performed.
-
-
-
ATTRIBUTES
- See attributes(7) for descriptions of the following attributes:
-
-
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- | ATTRIBUTE TYPE | ATTRIBUTE VALUE |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- |Availability |system/core-os |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
+ See the respective shell man pages for attributes of the shell built-in
+ commands.
SEE ALSO
- sh(1), ksh(1), time(1), attributes(7)
+ ksh(1), sh(1s), time(1), attributes(7)
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 15 Apr 1994 times(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 times(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/tip.1 11.4.54/man1/tip.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/tip.1 2023-02-14 17:42:32.049417987 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/tip.1 2023-02-14 17:42:48.011007877 -0800
@@ -79,10 +79,11 @@
the following escape sequences:
~^D Drop the connection and exit (you may still be logged
- ~. in on the remote machine). Note: If you rlogin and
- then run tip on the remote host, you must type ~~.
- (tilde tilde dot) to end the tip session. If you type
- ~. (tilde dot), it terminates the rlogin.
+ ~. in on the remote machine). Note: If you ssh or rlogin
+ and then run tip on the remote host, you must type
+ ~~. (tilde tilde dot) to end the tip session. If you
+ type ~. (tilde dot), it terminates the ssh or rlogin
+ session instead.
@@ -172,7 +173,7 @@
Auto-call Units
tip may be used to dial up remote systems using a number of auto-call
- unit's (ACUs). When the remote system description contains the du capa-
+ units (ACUs). When the remote system description contains the du capa-
bility, tip uses the call-unit (cu), ACU type (at), and phone numbers
(pn) supplied. Normally, tip displays verbose messages as it dials.
@@ -182,8 +183,8 @@
nection. The user should never assume that the first characters typed
to the foreign host are the first ones presented to it. The recommended
practice is to immediately type a kill character upon establishing a
- connection (most UNIX systems either support @ or Control-U as the ini-
- tial kill character).
+ connection (most UNIX systems support Control-U as the initial kill
+ character).
tip currently supports the Ventel MD-212+ modem and DC Hayes-compatible
@@ -582,4 +583,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 11 May 2021 tip(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 tip(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/trap.1 11.4.54/man1/trap.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/trap.1 2023-02-14 17:42:32.091657319 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/trap.1 2023-02-14 17:42:48.059257295 -0800
@@ -3,11 +3,10 @@
NAME
- trap, onintr - shell built-in functions to respond to (hardware) sig-
- nals
+ trap, onintr - shell built-in functions to respond to signals
SYNOPSIS
- sh
+ /usr/sunos/bin/sh
trap [argument n [n2]...]
csh
@@ -20,7 +19,7 @@
+trap [-p] [action condition...]
DESCRIPTION
- sh
+ /usr/sunos/bin/sh
The trap command argument is to be read and executed when the shell
receives numeric or symbolic signal(s) (n). (Note: argument is scanned
once when the trap is set and once when the trap is taken.) Trap com-
@@ -177,18 +176,12 @@
ATTRIBUTES
- See attributes(7) for descriptions of the following attributes:
-
-
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- | ATTRIBUTE TYPE | ATTRIBUTE VALUE |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- |Availability |system/core-os |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
+ See the respective shell man pages for attributes of the shell built-in
+ commands.
SEE ALSO
- csh(1), eval(1), exit(1), ksh(1), ksh88(1), sh(1), attributes(7)
+ csh(1), eval(1), exit(1), ksh(1), ksh88(1), sh(1s), attributes(7)
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 11 May 2021 trap(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 trap(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/truss.1 11.4.54/man1/truss.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/truss.1 2023-02-14 17:42:32.135494483 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/truss.1 2023-02-14 17:42:48.112943401 -0800
@@ -560,10 +545,11 @@
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
SEE ALSO
- date(1), find(1), proc(1), ps(1), sh(1), spell(1), exec(2), fork(2),
- lseek(2), open(2), read(2), spawn(2), time(2), vfork(2), write(2),
- ctime(3C), signal.h(3HEAD), Intro(3), proc(5), attributes(7), mwac(7),
- privileges(7), threads(7), tpd(7), init(8)
+ apptrace(1), date(1), find(1), proc(1), ps(1), sh(1), spell(1),
+ exec(2), fork(2), lseek(2), open(2), read(2), spawn(2), time(2),
+ vfork(2), write(2), ctime(3C), signal.h(3HEAD), Intro(3), proc(5),
+ attributes(7), mwac(7), privileges(7), threads(7), tpd(7), dtrace(8),
+ init(8)
man pages section 2: System Calls
@@ -657,4 +643,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 12 Oct 2019 truss(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 truss(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/umask.1 11.4.54/man1/umask.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/umask.1 2023-02-14 17:42:32.165082674 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/umask.1 2023-02-14 17:42:48.192882816 -0800
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@
SYNOPSIS
/usr/bin/umask [-S] [mask]
- sh
+ /usr/sunos/bin/sh
umask [ooo]
csh
@@ -46,7 +46,7 @@
value of the invoking process's file mode creation mask to standard
output.
- sh
+ /usr/sunos/bin/sh
The user file-creation mode mask is set to ooo. The three octal digits
refer to read/write/execute permissions for owner, group, and other,
respectively (see chmod(1), chmod(2), and umask(2)). The value of each
@@ -68,7 +68,8 @@
csh
- See the description above for the Bourne shell (sh)umask built-in.
+ See the description above for the Bourne shell (/usr/sunos/bin/sh)
+ umask built-in.
ksh88
The user file-creation mask is set to mask. mask can either be an octal
@@ -251,7 +252,7 @@
ATTRIBUTES
See attributes(7) for descriptions of the following attributes:
- /usr/bin/umask, csh, ksh88, sh
+ /usr/bin/umask
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
| ATTRIBUTE TYPE | ATTRIBUTE VALUE |
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
@@ -262,19 +263,14 @@
|Standard |See standards(7). |
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- ksh
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- | ATTRIBUTE TYPE | ATTRIBUTE VALUE |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- |Availability |system/core-os |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- |Interface Stability |Volatile |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
+
+ See the respective shell man pages for attributes of the shell built-in
+ command versions of umask.
SEE ALSO
- chmod(1), csh(1), ksh(1), ksh88(1), sh(1), chmod(2), creat(2),
+ chmod(1), csh(1), ksh(1), ksh88(1), sh(1s), chmod(2), creat(2),
umask(2), profile(5), attributes(7), environ(7), standards(7)
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 12 Jul 2011 umask(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 umask(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/units.1 11.4.54/man1/units.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/units.1 2023-02-14 17:42:32.214098830 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/units.1 2023-02-14 17:42:48.223542906 -0800
@@ -13,8 +13,8 @@
units converts quantities expressed in various standard scales to their
equivalents in other scales. It works interactively in this fashion:
- You have:~~inch
- You want:~~cm
+ You have: inch
+ You want: cm
* 2.540000e+00
/ 3.937008e-01
@@ -24,8 +24,8 @@
optionally preceded by a numeric multiplier. Powers are indicated by
suffixed positive integers, division by the usual sign:
- You have:~~15 lbs force/in2
- You want:~~atm
+ You have: 15 lbs force/in2
+ You want: atm
* 1.020689e+00
/ 9.797299e-01
@@ -64,10 +64,10 @@
Pound is not recognized as a unit of mass; lb is. Compound names are
run together, (for example, lightyear). British units that differ from
their U.S. counterparts are prefixed thus: brgallon. For a complete
- list of units, type:
+ list of units, run:
- cat /usr/share/lib/unittab
+ less /usr/share/lib/unittab
FILES
/usr/share/lib/unittab
@@ -87,4 +87,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 14 Sep 1992 units(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 units(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/userattr.1 11.4.54/man1/userattr.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/userattr.1 2023-02-14 17:42:32.283592411 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/userattr.1 2023-02-14 17:42:48.266810356 -0800
@@ -33,15 +33,6 @@
no
-FILES
- /etc/user_attr
-
-
- /etc/security/policy.conf
-
-
- /etc/security/prof_attr
-
EXIT STATUS
The following exit values are returned:
@@ -76,4 +67,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 21 Jun 2021 userattr(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 userattr(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/wait.1 11.4.54/man1/wait.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/wait.1 2023-02-14 17:42:32.377137410 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/wait.1 2023-02-14 17:42:48.310956550 -0800
@@ -6,25 +6,32 @@
wait - await process completion
SYNOPSIS
- /bin/sh
+ /usr/bin/wait [pid]...
+
+ /usr/sunos/bin/sh
wait [pid]...
- /bin/jsh /bin/ksh88 /usr/xpg4/bin/sh
+ /bin/jsh, /bin/ksh88, /usr/xpg4/bin/sh
wait [pid]...
- wait [% jobid...]
+ wait [%jobid]...
/bin/csh
wait
ksh
- wait [job...]
+ wait [job]...
DESCRIPTION
- The shell itself executes wait, without creating a new process. If you
- get the error message cannot fork,too many processes, try using the
- wait command to clean up your background processes. If this doesn't
+ The wait command is used to block until the specified processes exit.
+ Although provided as a standalone utility, shells typically implement
+ the wait functionality internally as a built-in, rather than creating a
+ new process.
+
+
+ If you get the error message cannot fork, too many processes, try using
+ the wait command to clean up your background processes. If this doesn't
help, the system process table is probably full or you have too many
active foreground processes. There is a limit to the number of process
IDs associated with your login, and to the number the system can keep
@@ -34,7 +41,7 @@
Not all the processes of a pipeline with three or more stages are chil-
dren of the shell, and thus cannot be waited for.
- /bin/sh, /bin/jsh
+ /usr/sunos/bin/sh, /bin/jsh
Wait for your background process whose process ID is pid and report its
termination status. If pid is omitted, all your shell's currently
active background processes are waited for and the return code is 0.
@@ -119,18 +126,20 @@
USAGE
- On most implementations, wait is a shell built-in. If it is called in a
- subshell or separate utility execution environment, such as one of the
- following,
+ On most implementations, wait is a shell built-in. If wait is called in
+ a subshell, or separate utility execution environment, it returns imme-
+ diately because there is no known process IDs to wait for in those con-
+ texts. Examples include the following:
(wait)
nohup wait ...
find . -exec wait ... \;
+ /usr/bin/wait ...
- it returns immediately because there is no known process IDs to wait
- for in those environments.
+ To wait for a process started outside of the current shell execution
+ environment, see pwait(1).
EXAMPLES
Example 1 Using A Script To Identify The Termination Signal
@@ -193,7 +202,7 @@
ATTRIBUTES
See attributes(7) for descriptions of the following attributes:
-
+ /usr/bin/wait
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
| ATTRIBUTE TYPE | ATTRIBUTE VALUE |
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
@@ -204,10 +213,14 @@
|Standard |See standards(7). |
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
+
+ See the respective shell man pages for attributes of the shell built-in
+ versions of wait.
+
SEE ALSO
- csh(1), jobs(1), ksh(1), ksh88(1), sh(1), attributes(7), environ(7),
- standards(7)
+ csh(1), jobs(1), ksh(1), ksh88(1), pwait(1), sh(1s), attributes(7),
+ environ(7), standards(7)
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 9 Apr 2020 wait(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 wait(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/who.1 11.4.54/man1/who.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/who.1 2023-02-14 17:42:32.447038583 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/who.1 2023-02-14 17:42:48.354899008 -0800
@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@
[-H | --heading] [-l | --login] [--lookup] [-m]
[-p | --process] [-q | --count] [-r | --runlevel]
[-s | --short] [-t | --time]
- [-T | -w | --mesg | --message | --writable]
+ [-T | -w | --mesg | --message | --writeable]
[-u | --users] [file]
@@ -49,7 +49,7 @@
The general format for output is:
- name [state] line time [idle] [pid] [comment] [exit]
+ name [state] line time [idle] [pid] [comment] [exit] [(host)]
@@ -79,120 +79,134 @@
exit Exit status for dead processes
+ host Host from which login originated
+
+
OPTIONS
The following options are supported in /usr/bin/who:
- -a, --all Processes /var/adm/utmpx or the named file with
- -b, -d, -l, -p, -r, -t, -T, and -u options
- turned on.
+ -a, --all
+
+ Processes /var/adm/utmpx or the named file with -b, -d, -l, -p, -r,
+ -t, -T, and -u options turned on.
+
+
+ -b, --boot
+
+ Indicates the time and date of the last reboot.
+
+
+ -d, --dead
+
+ Displays all processes that have expired and not been respawned by
+ init. The exit field appears for dead processes and contains the
+ termination and exit values (as returned by wait(3C)), of the dead
+ process. This can be useful in determining why a process termi-
+ nated.
+
+
+ -H, --heading
+
+ Outputs column headings above the regular output.
+
+
+ -l, --login
+
+ Lists only those lines on which the system is waiting for someone
+ to login. The name field is LOGIN in such cases. Other fields are
+ the same as for user entries except that the state field does not
+ exist.
+
+
+ --lookup
+ Performs a lookup of the host in the configured name services to
+ find the canonical (first defined) name of the host (see NOTES).
- -b, --boot Indicates the time and date of the last reboot.
+ -m
- -d, --dead Displays all processes that have expired and
- not been respawned by init. The exit field
- appears for dead processes and contains the
- termination and exit values (as returned by
- wait(3C)), of the dead process. This can be
- useful in determining why a process terminated.
+ Outputs only information about the current terminal.
- -H, --heading Outputs column headings above the regular out-
- put.
+ -n x
+ Takes a numeric argument, x, which specifies the number of users to
+ display per line. x must be at least 1. The -n option can only be
+ used with -q.
- -l, --login Lists only those lines on which the system is
- waiting for someone to login. The name field is
- LOGIN in such cases. Other fields are the same
- as for user entries except that the state field
- does not exist.
+ -p, --process
- --lookup Performs a lookup of the host in the configured
- name services to find the canonical (first
- defined) name of the host (see NOTES).
+ Lists any other process that is currently active and has been pre-
+ viously spawned by init. The name field is the name of the program
+ executed by init as found in /usr/sbin/inittab. The state, line,
+ and idle fields have no meaning. The comment field shows the id
+ field of the line from /usr/sbin/inittab that spawned this process.
+ See inittab(5).
- -m Outputs only information about the current ter-
- minal.
+ -q, --count
+ (Quick who) Displays only the names and the number of users cur-
+ rently logged on. When this option is used, all options other than
+ -n are ignored.
- -n x Takes a numeric argument, x, which specifies
- the number of users to display per line. x must
- be at least 1. The -n option can only be used
- with -q.
+ -r, --runlevel
- -p, --process Lists any other process that is currently
- active and has been previously spawned by init.
- The name field is the name of the program exe-
- cuted by init as found in /usr/sbin/inittab.
- The state, line, and idle fields have no mean-
- ing. The comment field shows the id field of
- the line from /usr/sbin/inittab that spawned
- this process. See inittab(5).
+ Indicates the current run-level of the init process.
- -q, --count (Quick who) Displays only the names and the
- number of users currently logged on. When this
- option is used, all options other than -n are
- ignored.
+ -s, --short
+ (Default) Lists only the name, line, time, and (if the host field
+ is present in the utmpx entry) host fields.
- -r, --runlevel Indicates the current run-level of the init
- process.
+ -T, --mesg, --message
- -s, --short (Default) Lists only the name, line, and time
- fields.
+ Same as the -s option, except that the state, idle, pid, and com-
+ ment fields are also written. state is one of the following charac-
+ ters:
+ + The terminal allows write access to other users.
- -T, -mesg, --message Same as the -s option, except that the state
- idle, pid, and comment, fields are also writ-
- ten. state is one of the following characters:
- + The terminal allows write access to
- other users.
+ - The terminal denies write access to other users.
- - The terminal denies write access to
- other users.
+ ? The terminal write-access state cannot be determined.
- ? The terminal write-access state cannot
- be determined.
+ -t, --time
+ Indicates the last change to the system clock (using the date util-
+ ity) by root. See su(8) and date(1).
- -t, --time Indicates the last change to the system clock
- (using the date utility) by root. See su(8) and
- date(1).
+ -u, --users
- -u, --users Lists only those users who are currently logged
- in. The name is the user's login name. The line
- is the name of the line as found in the direc-
- tory /dev. The time is the time that the user
- logged in. The idle column contains the number
- of hours and minutes since activity last
- occurred on that particular line. A dot (.)
- indicates that the terminal has seen activity
- in the last minute and is therefore current. If
- more than twenty-four hours have elapsed or the
- line has not been used since boot time, the
- entry is marked old. This field is useful when
- trying to determine whether a person is working
- at the terminal or not. The pid is the process-
- ID of the user's shell. The comment is the com-
- ment field associated with this line as found
- in /usr/sbin/inittab (see inittab(5)). This can
- contain information about where the terminal is
- located, the telephone number of the dataset,
- type of terminal if hard-wired, and so forth.
+ Lists only those users who are currently logged in. The name is the
+ user's login name. The line is the name of the line as found in the
+ directory /dev. The time is the time that the user logged in. The
+ idle column contains the number of hours and minutes since activity
+ last occurred on that particular line. A dot (.) indicates that the
+ terminal has seen activity in the last minute and is therefore cur-
+ rent. If more than twenty-four hours have elapsed or the line has
+ not been used since boot time, the entry is marked old. This field
+ is useful when trying to determine whether a person is working at
+ the terminal or not. The pid is the process-ID of the user's shell.
+ The comment is the comment field associated with this line as found
+ in /usr/sbin/inittab (see inittab(5)). This can contain information
+ about where the terminal is located, the telephone number of the
+ dataset, type of terminal if hard-wired, and so forth.
- -w, --writable Same as -T option
+ -w, --writeable
+
+ Same as -T option
/usr/xpg4/bin/who
@@ -347,5 +361,31 @@
getaddrinfo(3C) function supplied with the AI_CANONNAME hint.
+ The host field is set by the login software, and may include informa-
+ tion other than a network address or hostname, such as an X Window Sys-
+ tem DISPLAY id or a Solaris zone name.
+
+HISTORY
+ Support for the --all, --boot, --count, --dead, --heading, --help,
+ --login, --lookup, --mesg, --message, --process, --runlevel, --short,
+ --time, --users, --writeable, and -w options was added to /usr/bin/who
+ in Solaris 11.4.0.
+
+
+ Support for the -m option was added to both who commands in Solaris
+ 2.5.
+
+
+ The /usr/xpg4/bin/who command was added in Solaris 2.5.
+
+
+ Support for the -a, -b, -d, -H, -l, -n, -p, -q, -r, -s, -t, -T, and -u
+ options was added to /usr/bin/who in Solaris 2.0.
+
+
+ The who command, with support for the am i and file arguments has been
+ present in all Sun and Oracle releases of Solaris.
+
+
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 3 Nov 2021 who(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 who(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/yacc.1 11.4.54/man1/yacc.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/yacc.1 2023-02-14 17:42:32.552987277 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/yacc.1 2023-02-14 17:42:48.431021203 -0800
@@ -221,7 +218,7 @@
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------------+
SEE ALSO
- lex(1), attributes(7), environ(7), standards(7)
+ bison(1), lex(1), attributes(7), environ(7), standards(7)
DIAGNOSTICS
The number of reduce-reduce and shift-reduce conflicts is reported on
@@ -238,4 +235,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 30 August 2017 yacc(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 yacc(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man1/zonestat.1 11.4.54/man1/zonestat.1
--- 11.4.51/man1/zonestat.1 2023-02-14 17:42:32.632448052 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man1/zonestat.1 2023-02-14 17:42:48.474348719 -0800
@@ -297,7 +291,7 @@
Similar to total, but only intervals in which a zone is running
are factored in. For example, if a zone was only running for a
single interval, and during that interval, the zone used 200M
- of virtual memory, then it's average virtual-memory is 200M,
+ of virtual memory, then its average virtual-memory is 200M,
regardless of the number of intervals reported before the sum-
mary report.
@@ -413,7 +407,7 @@
u A printed representation of the internal representation of
- time. See time(2). This is also known as unix time.
+ time. See time(2). This is also known as Unix time.
@@ -826,8 +806,7 @@
2 Invalid usage.
- 3 svc:system/zones_monitoring: default not running or not respond-
- ing.
+ 3 svc:/system/zones-monitoring not running or not responding.
ATTRIBUTES
@@ -847,18 +826,29 @@
output (default output) is Uncommitted.
SEE ALSO
- attributes(7), date(1), pooladm(8), poolcfg(8), prctl(1), privi-
- leges(7), psrset(8), rcapadm(8), resource-controls(7), resource-manage-
- ment(7), solaris-kz(7), time(2), timezone(5), zoneadm(8), zonecfg(8),
+ date(1), prctl(1), time(2), timezone(5), attributes(7), privileges(7),
+ resource-controls(7), resource-management(7), solaris-kz(7),
+ pooladm(8), poolcfg(8), psrset(8), rcapadm(8), zoneadm(8), zonecfg(8),
zonestatd(8)
NOTES
- The zonestat utility depends on the zones monitoring service: svc/sys-
- tem/zonestat:default. If the zonestat service is stopped while the zon-
- estat utility is running, the zonestat command invocation quits without
- printing additional reports. The reports (-R) is printed if zonestat is
- interrupted (by CTRL/c, SIGINT) before reaching the next report period.
+ The zonestat utility depends on the zones monitoring service: svc:/sys-
+ tem/zones-monitoring:default. If the zones-monitoring service is
+ stopped while the zonestat utility is running, the zonestat command
+ invocation quits without printing additional reports. The reports (-R)
+ are printed if zonestat is interrupted (by CTRL/c, SIGINT) before
+ reaching the next report period.
+
+HISTORY
+ The -b option was added in Oracle Solaris 11.4.0.
+
+
+ Reporting of Stolen Time was added in Oracle Solaris 11.2.8.
+
+
+ The zonestat command, with support for the -n, -p, -P, -q, -r, -R, -S,
+ -T, -x, and -z options, was introduced in Oracle Solaris 11.0.0.
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 23 July 2018 zonestat(1)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Nov 2022 zonestat(1)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man3c/ctime.3c 11.4.54/man3c/ctime.3c
--- 11.4.51/man3c/ctime.3c 2023-02-14 17:42:32.754943147 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man3c/ctime.3c 2023-02-14 17:42:48.509336652 -0800
@@ -181,8 +181,9 @@
The tzset() function uses the contents of the environment variable TZ
to override the value of the different external variables. It is called
by asctime() and can also be called by the user. If TZ is not specified
- or has an invalid setting, tzset() uses GMT0. See environ(7) for a
- description of the TZ environment variable.
+ or has an invalid setting, tzset() uses "localtime". If that does not
+ work, it falls back to "GMT0". See environ(7) for a description of the
+ TZ environment variable.
Starting and ending times are relative to the current local time zone.
@@ -194,9 +195,9 @@
tzname.
- Note that in most installations, TZ is set to the correct value by
- default when the user logs on, using the local /etc/default/init file
- (see timezone(5)).
+ Note that in most installations, TZ is not set by default when the user
+ logs on, instead using the "localtime" setting to get the system time
+ zone, as described in the TZ section of environ(7).
The asctime_s(), ctime_s(), gmtime_s(), and localtime_s() functions are
@@ -409,4 +410,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 11 May 2021 ctime(3C)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 ctime(3C)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man3c/getaddrinfo.3c 11.4.54/man3c/getaddrinfo.3c
--- 11.4.51/man3c/getaddrinfo.3c 2023-02-14 17:42:32.808956673 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man3c/getaddrinfo.3c 2023-02-14 17:42:48.545851432 -0800
@@ -393,10 +393,6 @@
called.
FILES
- /etc/inet/hosts local database that associates names of nodes with
- IP addresses
-
-
/etc/netconfig network configuration database
@@ -442,4 +438,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 20 Jan 2021 getaddrinfo(3C)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 getaddrinfo(3C)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man3c/getauthattr.3c 11.4.54/man3c/getauthattr.3c
--- 11.4.51/man3c/getauthattr.3c 2023-02-14 17:42:32.858725473 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man3c/getauthattr.3c 2023-02-14 17:42:48.575719182 -0800
@@ -28,12 +28,13 @@
int chkauthattr(const char *authname, const char *username);
- int chkauthattr_ucred(const char *authname, const char *username, ucred_t ucred);
+ int chkauthattr_ucred(const char *authname, const char *username,
+ ucred_t ucred);
DESCRIPTION
The getauthattr() and getauthnam() functions each return an
auth_attr(5) entry. Entries can come from any of the sources specified
- in the nsswitch.conf(5) file.
+ in the nsswitch.conf(5) configuration.
The getauthattr() function enumerates auth_attr entries. The getauth-
@@ -83,19 +84,19 @@
When chkauthattr() finds a profile called "Stop", further profiles are
- ignored, the authorizations and profiles mentioned in /etc/secu-
- rity/policy.conf are ignored and it returns 0. If it does not find a
- match in the user's profiles, chkauthattr() reads the AUTHS_GRANTED key
- in the /etc/security/policy.conf file and returns 1 if it finds a match
- for the given authorization. If chkauthattr() does not find a match and
- the username is the name of the "console user", defined as the owner of
- /dev/console, it first reads the CONSOLE_USER key in /etc/security/pol-
- icy.conf and returns 1 if the given authorization is in any of the pro-
- files specified in the CONSOLE_USER keyword, then reads the
- PROFS_GRANTED key in /etc/security/policy.conf and returns 1 if the
- given authorization is in any profiles specified with the PROFS_GRANTED
- keyword. The chkauthattr() function returns 0 if it does not find a
- match in any of the three sources or if the user does not exist.
+ ignored, the authorizations and profiles mentioned in policy.conf(5)
+ are ignored and it returns 0. If it does not find a match in the user's
+ profiles, chkauthattr() reads the AUTHS_GRANTED key in the policy.conf
+ configuration and returns 1 if it finds a match for the given autho-
+ rization. If chkauthattr() does not find a match and the username is
+ the name of the "console user", defined as the owner of /dev/console,
+ it first reads the CONSOLE_USER key in the policy.conf configuration
+ and returns 1 if the given authorization is in any of the profiles
+ specified for the CONSOLE_USER keyword, then reads the PROFS_GRANTED
+ key in the policy.conf configuration and returns 1 if the given autho-
+ rization is in any profiles specified with the PROFS_GRANTED keyword.
+ The chkauthattr() function returns 0 if it does not find a match in any
+ of the three sources or if the user does not exist.
The chkauthattr_ucred() function is identical to the chkauthattr()
@@ -153,8 +154,8 @@
which a user is assigned an authorization.
- Authorization name /etc/security/policy.conf, Authorized?
- user_attr, or prof_attr entry
+ Authorization name policy.conf, user_attr, or Authorized?
+ prof_attr entry
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
solaris.printer.postscript solaris.printer.postscript Yes
solaris.printer.postscript solaris.printer.* Yes
@@ -196,23 +197,6 @@
Because the list of legal keys is likely to expand, code must be writ-
ten to ignore unknown key-value pairs without error.
-FILES
- /etc/nsswitch.conf configuration file lookup information for
- the name service switch
-
-
- /etc/user_attr extended user attributes
-
-
- /etc/security/auth_attr authorization attributes
-
-
- /etc/security/policy.conf policy definitions
-
-
- /etc/security/prof_attr profile information
-
-
ATTRIBUTES
See attributes(7) for descriptions of the following attributes:
@@ -227,9 +211,9 @@
SEE ALSO
getexecattr(3C), getprofattr(3C), getuserattr(3C), auth_attr(5), nss-
- witch.conf(5), prof_attr(5), user_attr(5), attributes(7), rbac(7),
- fnmatch(7)
+ witch.conf(5), policy.conf(5), prof_attr(5), user_attr(5),
+ attributes(7), fnmatch(7), rbac(7), account-policy(8S)
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 17 Aug 2018 getauthattr(3C)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 getauthattr(3C)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man3c/getexecattr.3c 11.4.54/man3c/getexecattr.3c
--- 11.4.51/man3c/getexecattr.3c 2023-02-14 17:42:32.903817767 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man3c/getexecattr.3c 2023-02-14 17:42:48.605852392 -0800
@@ -82,8 +82,8 @@
The getexecuser() function returns a linked list of entries that match
the type and id arguments and have a profile that has been assigned to
the user specified by username, as described in passwd(5). Profiles for
- the user are obtained from the list of default profiles in /etc/secu-
- rity/policy.conf (see policy.conf(5)) and the user_attr(5) database.
+ the user are obtained from the list of default profiles in the pol-
+ icy.conf(5) configuration and the user_attr(5) database.
Two sets of profiles may be assigned to a user, an authenticated set
@@ -151,9 +151,9 @@
USAGE
The getexecattr(), getexecuser(), and getexecprof() functions all allo-
cate memory for the pointers they return. This memory should be deallo-
- cated with the free_execattr() call. The match_execattr()( function
- does not allocate any memory. Therefore, pointers returned by this
- function should not be deallocated.
+ cated with the free_execattr() call. The match_execattr() function does
+ not allocate any memory. Therefore, pointers returned by this function
+ should not be deallocated.
Individual attributes may be referenced in the attr structure by call-
@@ -204,20 +204,6 @@
}
-FILES
- /etc/nsswitch.conf configuration file lookup information for
- the name service switch
-
-
- /etc/user_attr extended user attributes
-
-
- /etc/security/exec_attr execution profiles
-
-
- /etc/security/policy.conf policy definitions
-
-
ATTRIBUTES
See attributes(7) for descriptions of the following attributes:
@@ -230,8 +216,9 @@
SEE ALSO
getauthattr(3C), getuserattr(3C), kva_match(3C), exec_attr(5),
- passwd(5), policy.conf(5), prof_attr(5), user_attr(5), attributes(7)
+ passwd(5), policy.conf(5), prof_attr(5), user_attr(5), attributes(7),
+ rbac(7), account-policy(8S)
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 17 Aug 2018 getexecattr(3C)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 getexecattr(3C)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man3c/getgrnam.3c 11.4.54/man3c/getgrnam.3c
--- 11.4.51/man3c/getgrnam.3c 2023-02-14 17:42:32.950764309 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man3c/getgrnam.3c 2023-02-14 17:42:48.672737048 -0800
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@
DESCRIPTION
These functions are used to obtain entries describing user groups.
Entries can come from any of the sources for group specified in the
- /etc/nsswitch.conf file (see nsswitch.conf(5)).
+ nsswitch.conf(5) configuration.
The getgrnam() function searches the group database for an entry with
@@ -274,4 +274,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 17 Aug 2018 getgrnam(3C)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 getgrnam(3C)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man3c/gethostbyname.3c 11.4.54/man3c/gethostbyname.3c
--- 11.4.51/man3c/gethostbyname.3c 2023-02-14 17:42:33.002744095 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man3c/gethostbyname.3c 2023-02-14 17:42:48.729685497 -0800
@@ -254,10 +254,6 @@
threaded applications.
FILES
- /etc/hosts hosts file that associates the names of hosts with
- their Internet Protocol (IP) addresses
-
-
/etc/netconfig network configuration database
@@ -353,4 +349,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 2 Feb 2021 gethostbyname(3C)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 gethostbyname(3C)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man3c/getnetbyname.3c 11.4.54/man3c/getnetbyname.3c
--- 11.4.51/man3c/getnetbyname.3c 2023-02-14 17:42:33.038339469 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man3c/getnetbyname.3c 2023-02-14 17:42:48.762193450 -0800
@@ -189,13 +189,6 @@
Intro(2) for the proper usage and interpretation of errno in multi-
threaded applications.
-FILES
- /etc/networks network name database
-
-
- /etc/nsswitch.conf configuration file for the name service switch
-
-
ATTRIBUTES
See attributes(7) for descriptions of the following attributes:
@@ -209,7 +202,7 @@
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
SEE ALSO
- Intro(2), byteorder(3C), inet(3C), netdb.h(3HEAD), intro(3), net-
+ Intro(2), byteorder(3C), inet(3C), netdb.h(3HEAD), Intro(3), net-
works(5), nsswitch.conf(5), attributes(7)
@@ -244,4 +237,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 2 Feb 2021 getnetbyname(3C)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 getnetbyname(3C)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man3c/getprofattr.3c 11.4.54/man3c/getprofattr.3c
--- 11.4.51/man3c/getprofattr.3c 2023-02-14 17:42:33.080407870 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man3c/getprofattr.3c 2023-02-14 17:42:48.790274067 -0800
@@ -104,10 +102,6 @@
the pointers they return. This memory should be deallocated with the
free_profattr() function.
-FILES
- /etc/security/prof_attr profiles and their descriptions
-
-
ATTRIBUTES
See attributes(7) for descriptions of the following attributes:
@@ -123,4 +117,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 17 Aug 2018 getprofattr(3C)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 getprofattr(3C)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man3c/getprotobyname.3c 11.4.54/man3c/getprotobyname.3c
--- 11.4.51/man3c/getprotobyname.3c 2023-02-14 17:42:33.116773179 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man3c/getprotobyname.3c 2023-02-14 17:42:48.823207841 -0800
@@ -132,9 +132,6 @@
enough to store the result.
-FILES
- /etc/protocols
-
ATTRIBUTES
See attributes(7) for descriptions of the following attributes:
@@ -192,4 +189,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 2 Feb 2021 getprotobyname(3C)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 getprotobyname(3C)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man3c/getpublickey.3c 11.4.54/man3c/getpublickey.3c
--- 11.4.51/man3c/getpublickey.3c 2023-02-14 17:42:33.150293441 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man3c/getpublickey.3c 2023-02-14 17:42:48.848936045 -0800
@@ -27,8 +27,8 @@
- The sources and their lookup order are specified in the /etc/nss-
- witch.conf file. See nsswitch.conf(5).
+ The sources and their lookup order are specified in the nss-
+ witch.conf(5) configuration.
getsecretkey() has an extra argument, passwd, which is used to decrypt
@@ -56,4 +56,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 10 Dec 2009 getpublickey(3C)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 getpublickey(3C)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man3c/getrpcbyname.3c 11.4.54/man3c/getrpcbyname.3c
--- 11.4.51/man3c/getrpcbyname.3c 2023-02-14 17:42:33.186926324 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man3c/getrpcbyname.3c 2023-02-14 17:42:48.880522678 -0800
@@ -151,12 +151,6 @@
Intro(2) for the proper usage and interpretation of errno in multi-
threaded applications.
-FILES
- /etc/rpc
-
-
- /etc/nsswitch.conf
-
ATTRIBUTES
See attributes(7) for descriptions of the following attributes:
@@ -183,4 +177,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 17 Aug 2018 getrpcbyname(3C)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 getrpcbyname(3C)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man3c/getservbyname.3c 11.4.54/man3c/getservbyname.3c
--- 11.4.51/man3c/getservbyname.3c 2023-02-14 17:42:33.221895714 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man3c/getservbyname.3c 2023-02-14 17:42:48.933376046 -0800
@@ -192,13 +192,6 @@
Intro(2) for the proper usage and interpretation of errno in multi-
threaded applications.
-FILES
- /etc/services Internet network services
-
-
- /etc/netconfig network configuration file
-
-
ATTRIBUTES
See attributes(7) for descriptions of the following attributes:
@@ -264,4 +257,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 11 May 2021 getservbyname(3C)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 getservbyname(3C)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man3c/getuserattr.3c 11.4.54/man3c/getuserattr.3c
--- 11.4.51/man3c/getuserattr.3c 2023-02-14 17:42:33.272687098 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man3c/getuserattr.3c 2023-02-14 17:42:48.977423900 -0800
@@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
DESCRIPTION
The getuserattr(), getusernam(), and getuseruid() functions each return
a user_attr(5) entry. Entries can come from any of the sources speci-
- fied in the nsswitch.conf(5) file. The getuserattr() function enumer-
- ates user_attr entries. Successive calls to this function returns
+ fied in the nsswitch.conf(5) configuration. The getuserattr() function
+ enumerates user_attr entries. Successive calls to this function returns
either successive user_attr entries or NULL.
@@ -103,14 +101,6 @@
Because the list of legal keys is likely to expand, code must be writ-
ten to ignore unknown key-value pairs without error.
-FILES
- /etc/user_attr extended user attributes
-
-
- /etc/nsswitch.conf configuration file lookup information for the
- name service switch
-
-
ATTRIBUTES
See attributes(7) for descriptions of the following attributes:
@@ -122,9 +112,9 @@
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
SEE ALSO
- getauthattr(3C), getexecattr(3C), getprofattr(3C), user_attr(5),
- attributes(7)
+ getauthattr(3C), getexecattr(3C), getprofattr(3C), nsswitch.conf(5),
+ user_attr(5), attributes(7)
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 17 Aug 2018 getuserattr(3C)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 getuserattr(3C)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man3c/putpwent.3c 11.4.54/man3c/putpwent.3c
--- 11.4.51/man3c/putpwent.3c 2023-02-14 17:42:33.338488072 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man3c/putpwent.3c 2023-02-14 17:42:49.012709560 -0800
@@ -11,10 +11,10 @@
int putpwent(const struct passwd *p, FILE *f);
DESCRIPTION
- The putpwent() function is the inverse of getpwent(). See getpwnam(3C).
- Given a pointer to a passwd structure created by getpwent(), getp-
- wuid(), or getpwnam(), putpwent() writes a line on the stream f that
- matches the format of /etc/passwd.
+ The putpwent() function is the inverse of getpwent(3C). Given a pointer
+ to a passwd structure created by getpwent(), getpwuid(), or getpwnam(),
+ putpwent() writes a line on the stream f that matches the format of
+ passwd(5).
RETURN VALUES
The putpwent() function returns a non-zero value if an error was
@@ -22,10 +22,10 @@
USAGE
The putpwent() function is of limited utility, since most password
- files are maintained as Network Information Service (NIS) files that
- cannot be updated with this function. For this reason, the use of this
- function is discouraged. If used at all, it should be used with put-
- spent(3C) to update the shadow file.
+ entries are maintained in LDAP or NIS repositories that cannot be
+ updated with this function. For this reason, the use of this function
+ is discouraged. If used at all, it should be used with putspent(3C) to
+ update the shadow file.
ATTRIBUTES
See attributes(7) for descriptions of the following attributes:
@@ -38,8 +38,8 @@
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
SEE ALSO
- getpwnam(3C), putspent(3C), attributes(7)
+ getpwnam(3C), putspent(3C), passwd(5), attributes(7)
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Dec 1996 putpwent(3C)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 putpwent(3C)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man3c/putspent.3c 11.4.54/man3c/putspent.3c
--- 11.4.51/man3c/putspent.3c 2023-02-14 17:42:33.384664357 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man3c/putspent.3c 2023-02-14 17:42:49.046171123 -0800
@@ -11,10 +11,9 @@
int putspent(const struct spwd *p, FILE *fp);
DESCRIPTION
- The putspent() function is the inverse of getspent(). See getspnam(3C).
- Given a pointer to a spwd structure created by getspent() or getsp-
- nam(), putspent() writes a line on the stream fp that matches the for-
- mat of /etc/shadow.
+ The putspent() function is the inverse of getspent(3C). Given a pointer
+ to a spwd structure created by getspent() or getspnam(), putspent()
+ writes a line on the stream fp that matches the format of shadow(5).
The spwd structure contains the following members:
@@ -33,7 +32,7 @@
If the sp_min, sp_max, sp_lstchg, sp_warn, sp_inact, or sp_expire mem-
ber of the spwd structure is -1, or if sp_flag is 0, the corresponding
- /etc/shadow field is cleared.
+ shadow field is cleared.
RETURN VALUES
The putspent() function returns a non-zero value if an error was
@@ -55,8 +54,8 @@
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
SEE ALSO
- getpwnam(3C), getspnam(3C), putpwent(3C), attributes(7)
+ getpwnam(3C), getspnam(3C), putpwent(3C), shadow(5), attributes(7)
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 23 Jan 2008 putspent(3C)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 putspent(3C)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man3c/rpc_soc.3c 11.4.54/man3c/rpc_soc.3c
--- 11.4.51/man3c/rpc_soc.3c 2023-02-14 17:42:33.435971336 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man3c/rpc_soc.3c 2023-02-14 17:42:49.107022379 -0800
@@ -270,7 +270,7 @@
Broadcast packets are limited in size to
the maximum transfer unit of the transports
- involved. For Ethernet, the callers argu-
+ involved. For Ethernet, the caller's argu-
ment size is approximately 1500 bytes.
Since the call message is sent to all con-
nected networks, it may potentially lead to
@@ -407,8 +407,9 @@
get_myaddress() Places the local system's IP address into
*addr, without consulting the library rou-
- tines that deal with /etc/hosts. The port
- number is always set to htons(PMAPPORT).
+ tines that deal with the hosts(5) database.
+ The port number is always set to
+ htons(PMAPPORT).
This routine is only intended for use with
the RPC library. It returns the local sys-
@@ -463,7 +464,7 @@
col. The value of protocol is most likely
IPPROTO_UDP or IPPROTO_TCP. A return value
of 0 means that the mapping does not exist
- or that the RPC system failured to contact
+ or that the RPC system failed to contact
the remote portmap service. In the latter
case, the global variable rpc_createerr
contains the RPC status.
@@ -765,4 +766,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 10 Dec 2020 rpc_soc(3C)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 rpc_soc(3C)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man3project/getprojent.3project 11.4.54/man3project/getprojent.3project
--- 11.4.51/man3project/getprojent.3project 2023-02-14 17:42:33.476106044 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man3project/getprojent.3project 2023-02-14 17:42:49.138575108 -0800
@@ -46,7 +46,7 @@
DESCRIPTION
These functions are used to obtain entries describing user projects.
Entries can come from any of the sources for a project specified in the
- /etc/nsswitch.conf file (see nsswitch.conf(5)).
+ nsswitch.conf(5) configuration.
The setprojent(), getprojent(), and endprojent() functions are used to
@@ -245,9 +245,9 @@
ify valid project(5) name service sources. In the case of an incom-
pletely configured name service switch configuration, getprojbyid() and
other functions can return error values other than those documented
- above. These conditions usually occur when the nsswitch.conf file indi-
- cates that one or more name services is providing entries for the
- project database when that name service does not actually make a
+ above. These conditions usually occur when the nsswitch.conf configura-
+ tion indicates that one or more name services is providing entries for
+ the project database when that name service does not actually make a
project table available.
USAGE
@@ -274,4 +274,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 27 Nov 2017 getprojent(3PROJECT)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 getprojent(3PROJECT)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man3stmf/stmfModifyLu.3stmf 11.4.54/man3stmf/stmfModifyLu.3stmf
--- 11.4.51/man3stmf/stmfModifyLu.3stmf 2023-02-14 17:42:33.526919545 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man3stmf/stmfModifyLu.3stmf 2023-02-14 17:42:49.166896556 -0800
@@ -89,6 +89,15 @@
Default: "false"
+ STMF_LU_PROP_LBP_ENABLE
+
+ Logical block provisioning enable. When specified as "true" or
+ "false", specifies whether the device's SCSI logical block provi-
+ sioning is supported or not.
+
+ Default: "false"
+
+
RETURN VALUES
The following values are returned:
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man3stmf/stmfSetLuProp.3stmf 11.4.54/man3stmf/stmfSetLuProp.3stmf
--- 11.4.51/man3stmf/stmfSetLuProp.3stmf 2023-02-14 17:42:33.557077496 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man3stmf/stmfSetLuProp.3stmf 2023-02-14 17:42:49.196043307 -0800
@@ -199,6 +199,15 @@
Default: "false"
+ STMF_LU_PROP_LBP_ENABLE
+
+ Logical block provisioning enable. When specified as "true" or
+ "false", specifies whether the device's SCSI logical block provi-
+ sioning is supported or not.
+
+ Default: "false"
+
+
RETURN VALUES
The following values are returned:
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man5/autofs.5 11.4.54/man5/autofs.5
--- 11.4.51/man5/autofs.5 2023-02-14 17:42:33.622340820 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man5/autofs.5 2023-02-14 17:42:49.241315211 -0800
@@ -3,73 +3,50 @@
NAME
- autofs - file containing parameter values for automountd daemon and
- automount command
-
-SYNOPSIS
- /etc/default/autofs
+ autofs - configuration properties for the automountd daemon and auto-
+ mount command
DESCRIPTION
The settings formerly managed by the autofs file have been moved to SMF
- properties and are now managed by sharectl(8). The functionality
- described here is provided for backward compatibility only.
-
-
- The autofs file resides in directory /etc/default and supplies default
- parameters for the automountd(8) daemon and the automount(8) command.
-
-
- The autofs file format is ASCII; comment lines begin with the cross-
- hatch (#) character. Parameters consist of a keyword followed by an
- equal sign followed by the parameter value, of the form:
-
- keyword=value
+ properties and are now managed by sharectl command. For more informa-
+ tion, see the sharectl(8) man page.
+ An authorized user can use the sharectl command to set global values
+ for these properties in SMF.
- As shipped, the parameters in the autofs file are commented out. You
- must uncomment a keyword-value line to make the value for that parame-
- ter take effect.
+ The following list describes the properties:
- Administrators can make changes to the startup parameters for auto-
- mountd by editing the autofs file. Changes made to autofs values on an
- automount or automountd command line override values in
- /etc/default/autofs. The /etc/default/autofs file is preserved across
- operating system upgrades.
-
-
- The following parameters are currently supported in the autofs file:
-
- AUTOMOUNT_TIMEOUT=<num>
+ timeout=<num>
Specifies a duration, in seconds, that a file system is to remain
mounted when not in use. The default value is 600 (10 minutes).
Equivalent to the -t option in automount.
- AUTOMOUNT_VERBOSE=TRUE | FALSE
+ automount_verbose=true | false
- Verbose mode. Causes you to be notified of non-critical events,
- suchs as autofs mounts and unmounts. The default value is FALSE.
- Equivalent to the -v option in automount.
+ Verbose mode. Causes the automount command to report non-critical
+ events, such as autofs mounts and unmounts. The default value is
+ false. Equivalent to the -v option in automount.
- AUTOMOUNTD_VERBOSE=TRUE | FALSE
+ automountd_verbose=true | false
Verbose mode. Causes status messages to be logged to
/var/svc/log/system-filesystem-autofs:default.log. (See smf(7).)
- The default value is FALSE. Equivalent to the -v option in auto-
+ The default value is false. Equivalent to the -v option in auto-
mountd.
- AUTOMOUNTD_NOBROWSE=<num>
+ nobrowse=<num>
Turn on or off browsing for all autofs mount points. The default
- value is FALSE. Equivalent to the -n option in automountd.
+ value is false. Equivalent to the -n option in automountd.
- AUTOMOUNTD_TRACE=<num>
+ trace=<num>
Expands each RPC call and logs it to /var/svc/log/system-filesys-
tem-autofs:default.log. (See smf(7).) The default value, 0, turns
@@ -77,12 +54,19 @@
bosity of trace output increases.
- AUTOMOUNTD_ENV=<name>=<value>
+ ktrace=<num>
+
+ Controls kernel autofs tracing, which writes to the in-kernel log
+ readable via the mdb -k command ::nfs4_diag -b -C autofs_info. The
+ default value, 0, turns off such tracing. A value of 20 will pro-
+ duce maximal logging.
+
+
+ environment=<name>=<value>
- Environment variables. Each environment variable-value pairing must
- be on its own line. You can specify multiple such pairings. There
- are no environment variable settings supplied. For example: AUTO-
- MOUNTD_ENV=DAY=TUES
+ Environment variables. You can specify multiple such pairings, sep-
+ arated by commas. There are no environment variable settings sup-
+ plied. For example: environment=DAY=TUES
SEE ALSO
@@ -90,4 +74,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 3 Nov 2021 autofs(5)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 12 Sept 2022 autofs(5)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man5/ftpusers.5 11.4.54/man5/ftpusers.5
--- 11.4.51/man5/ftpusers.5 2023-02-14 17:42:33.658003684 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man5/ftpusers.5 2023-02-14 17:42:49.279353783 -0800
@@ -19,33 +19,32 @@
where name is the user's login name.
- The FTP Server, in.ftpd, reads the ftpusers file. If the login name of
- the user matches one of the entries listed, it rejects the login
- attempt.
-
-
- The ftpusers file has the following default configuration entries:
+ The FTP Server, typically proftpd(8), reads the ftpusers file. If the
+ login name of the user matches one of the entries listed, it rejects
+ the login attempt.
+ The default ftpusers file is populated by the user actions with
+ ftpuser=false attributes in the installed pkg(7) packages. A sample
+ installation may have entries such as:
root
daemon
bin
sys
adm
- lp
- uccp
- nuucp
dladm
+ netadm
+ netcfg
+ dhcpserv
+ ftp
+ sshd
smmsp
- listen
- gdm
- upnp
- xvm
- mysql
+ aiuser
+ ikeuser
+ lp
openldap
webservd
- svctag
unknown
nobody
noaccess
@@ -53,7 +52,6 @@
- These entries match the default instantiated entries from passwd(5).
The list of default entries typically contains the superuser root and
other administrative and system application identities.
@@ -87,18 +85,12 @@
leges are disallowed by default.
- /etc/ftpusers This is symbolic link to /etc/ftpd/ftpusers.
+ /etc/ftpusers This is a symbolic link to /etc/ftpd/ftpusers.
/etc/default/login Establishes login environment.
- /etc/passwd Password file.
-
-
- /etc/shadow Shadow password file.
-
-
ATTRIBUTES
See attributes(7) for descriptions of the following attributes:
@@ -108,15 +100,13 @@
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
|Availability |service/network/ftp |
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- |Interface Stability |See below. |
+ |Interface Stability |Volatile |
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
-
- The Interface Stability for /etc/ftpd/ftpusers is Volatile.
-
SEE ALSO
- login(1), passwd(5), shadow(5), attributes(7), environ(7)
+ login(1), passwd(5), shadow(5), attributes(7), environ(7), pkg(7),
+ proftpd(8)
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 7 Jan 2019 ftpusers(5)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 ftpusers(5)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man5/logindevperm.5 11.4.54/man5/logindevperm.5
--- 11.4.51/man5/logindevperm.5 2023-02-14 17:42:33.690099595 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man5/logindevperm.5 2023-02-14 17:42:49.326857945 -0800
@@ -10,22 +10,23 @@
DESCRIPTION
The /etc/logindevperm file contains information that is used by
- login(1) and ttymon(8) to change the owner, group, and permissions of
- devices upon logging into or out of a console device. By default, this
- file contains lines for the keyboard, mouse, audio, and frame buffer
- devices.
+ login(1), gdm(8), and ttymon(8) to change the owner, group, and permis-
+ sions of devices upon logging into or out of a console device. By
+ default, this file contains lines for the keyboard, mouse, audio,
+ removable media, and frame buffer devices.
The owner of the devices listed in /etc/logindevperm is set to the
- owner of the console by login(1). The group of the devices is set to
- the owner's group specified in /etc/passwd. The permissions are set as
- specified in /etc/logindevperm.
+ owner of the console by login(1) and gdm(8). The group of the devices
+ is set to the owner's group specified in the passwd(5) database. The
+ permissions are set as specified in /etc/logindevperm.
If the console is /dev/vt/active, the owner of the devices is the first
user logged in on the consoles (/dev/console or /dev/vt/#). Upon this
first user's logout the owner and group of these devices is reset by
- ttymon(8) to owner root and root's group as specified in /etc/passwd.
+ ttymon(8) to owner root and root's group as specified in the passwd(5)
+ database.
Fields are separated by a TAB or SPACE characters. Blank lines and com-
@@ -97,16 +98,13 @@
Upon logout the owner and group of these devices are reset by ttymon(8)
- to owner root and root's group as specified in /etc/passwd (typically
- other). The permissions are set as specified in the /etc/logindevperm
- file.
-
-FILES
- /etc/passwd File that contains user group information.
-
+ to owner root and root's group as specified in the passwd(5) database
+ (typically other). The permissions are set as specified in the
+ /etc/logindevperm file.
SEE ALSO
- chmod(1), chown(1), login(1), ugen(4D), passwd(5), regexp(7), ttymon(8)
+ chmod(1), chown(1), login(1), ugen(4D), passwd(5), regexp(7), gdm(8),
+ ttymon(8)
NOTES
/etc/logindevperm provides a superset of the functionality provided by
@@ -114,4 +112,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 31 Jan 2018 logindevperm(5)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 logindevperm(5)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man5/netid.5 11.4.54/man5/netid.5
--- 11.4.51/man5/netid.5 2023-02-14 17:42:33.732258652 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man5/netid.5 2023-02-14 17:42:49.353350533 -0800
@@ -78,25 +78,9 @@
Here is a sample netid file:
- [email protected] 789:30,65
- unix.123@Bldg_xy.Sun.COM 123:20,1521
- [email protected] 0:candlestick
-
-
-FILES
- /etc/group groups file
-
-
- /etc/hosts hosts database
-
-
- /etc/netid netname database
-
-
- /etc/passwd password file
-
-
- /etc/publickey public key database
+ [email protected] 789:30,65
+ unix.123@Bldg_xy.Example.COM 123:20,1521
+ [email protected] 0:candlestick
SEE ALSO
@@ -105,4 +89,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 10 Dec 2009 netid(5)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 netid(5)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man5/nsswitch.conf.5 11.4.54/man5/nsswitch.conf.5
--- 11.4.51/man5/nsswitch.conf.5 2023-02-14 17:42:33.773979400 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man5/nsswitch.conf.5 2023-02-14 17:42:49.408521948 -0800
@@ -409,9 +409,10 @@
getspnam(3C), getuserattr(3C), getusernam(3C), netdir(3C),
secure_rpc(3C), getdefaultproj(3PROJECT), getprojent(3PROJECT),
inproj(3PROJECT), setproject(3PROJECT), auth_attr(5), hosts(5),
- netconfig(5), project(5), resolv.conf(5), user_attr(5), ypfiles(5),
- ad(7), ldap(7), nis(7), pam_list(7), automount(8), getent(8), ipadm(8),
- mdnsd(8), nscd(8), nscfg(8), rpc.bootparamd(8), sendmail(8), svccfg(8)
+ netconfig(5), project(5), protocols(5), resolv.conf(5), services(5),
+ user_attr(5), ypfiles(5), ad(7), ldap(7), nis(7), pam_list(7),
+ automount(8), getent(8), ipadm(8), mdnsd(8), nscd(8), nscfg(8),
+ rpc.bootparamd(8), sendmail(8), svccfg(8)
Chapter 4, Administering Naming and Directory Services on an Oracle
@@ -459,4 +460,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 11 May 2021 nsswitch.conf(5)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 nsswitch.conf(5)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man5/policy.conf.5 11.4.54/man5/policy.conf.5
--- 11.4.51/man5/policy.conf.5 2023-02-14 17:42:33.806809011 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man5/policy.conf.5 2023-02-14 17:42:49.439139458 -0800
@@ -244,15 +244,6 @@
might occur.
FILES
- /etc/user_attr Defines extended user attributes.
-
-
- /etc/security/auth_attr Defines authorizations.
-
-
- /etc/security/prof_attr Defines profiles.
-
-
/etc/security/policy.conf Defines policy for the system.
@@ -278,4 +269,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 27 Apr 2020 policy.conf(5)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 policy.conf(5)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man5/protocols.5 11.4.54/man5/protocols.5
--- 11.4.51/man5/protocols.5 2023-02-14 17:42:33.833587720 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man5/protocols.5 2023-02-14 17:42:49.472495923 -0800
@@ -65,10 +65,6 @@
ipv6-opts 60 IPv6-Opts # Destination Options for IPv6
-FILES
- /etc/nsswitch.conf configuration file for name-service switch
-
-
SEE ALSO
getprotobyname(3C), nsswitch.conf(5)
@@ -78,4 +74,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 13 Nov 2017 protocols(5)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 protocols(5)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man5/rpc.5 11.4.54/man5/rpc.5
--- 11.4.51/man5/rpc.5 2023-02-14 17:42:33.865231625 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man5/rpc.5 2023-02-14 17:42:49.510246356 -0800
@@ -52,13 +50,9 @@
keyserv 100029 keyserver
-FILES
- /etc/nsswitch.conf
-
-
SEE ALSO
nsswitch.conf(5)
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 11 May 2021 rpc(5)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 rpc(5)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man5/services.5 11.4.54/man5/services.5
--- 11.4.51/man5/services.5 2023-02-14 17:42:33.893726028 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man5/services.5 2023-02-14 17:42:49.558444786 -0800
@@ -51,10 +51,6 @@
Any changes to a port assignment do not affect the actual port regis-
tration of the service.
-FILES
- /etc/nsswitch.conf configuration file for name-service switch
-
-
SEE ALSO
getservbyname(3C), inetd.conf(5), nsswitch.conf(5)
@@ -64,4 +60,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 10 Dec 2009 services(5)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 services(5)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man5/shadow.5 11.4.54/man5/shadow.5
--- 11.4.51/man5/shadow.5 2023-02-14 17:42:33.931024802 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man5/shadow.5 2023-02-14 17:42:49.586217046 -0800
@@ -94,7 +94,7 @@
To update this file, use the passwd(1), useradm(8), useradd(8), user-
mod(8), or userdel(8) commands; the pam_chauthtok(3PAM) or user-
- mgr-1(3RAD) APIs; or the Oracle Solaris Account Management BUI.
+ mgr-1(3rad) APIs; or the Oracle Solaris Account Management BUI.
To make system administration manageable, /etc/shadow entries should
@@ -131,9 +131,6 @@
/etc/passwd Password file
- /etc/nsswitch.conf Name-service switch configuration file
-
-
/var/adm/lastlog Time of last login
@@ -150,7 +147,7 @@
SEE ALSO
login(1), passwd(1), pwhash(1), strtol(3C), crypt(3C), crypt_gen-
salt(3C), getspnam(3C), putspent(3C), pam_chauthtok(3PAM), user-
- mgr-1(3RAD), nsswitch.conf(5), passwd(5), attributes(7),
+ mgr-1(3rad), nsswitch.conf(5), passwd(5), attributes(7),
pam_unix_account(7), pam_unix_auth(7), useradm(8), useradd(8),
userdel(8), usermod(8)
@@ -170,4 +167,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 11 May 2021 shadow(5)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 shadow(5)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man5/smb.5 11.4.54/man5/smb.5
--- 11.4.51/man5/smb.5 2023-02-14 17:42:33.969774895 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man5/smb.5 2023-02-14 17:42:49.643823413 -0800
@@ -85,28 +85,6 @@
The default value is false.
- disposition
-
- A value that controls whether the Oracle Solaris SMB server discon-
- nects the share or proceed if the map command fails. The disposi-
- tion property only has meaning when the map property has been set.
- Otherwise it has no effect.
-
- disposition = [ continue | terminate ]
-
-
- continue
-
- Proceed with share connection if the map command fails. This is
- the default in the event that disposition is not specified.
-
-
- terminate
-
- Disconnect the share if the map command fails.
-
-
-
ddns_enable
Enables or disables dynamic DNS updates. A value of true enables
@@ -131,6 +109,28 @@
server will be removed for this interface.
+ disposition
+
+ A value that controls whether the Oracle Solaris SMB server discon-
+ nects the share or proceed if the map command fails. The disposi-
+ tion property only has meaning when the map property has been set.
+ Otherwise it has no effect.
+
+ disposition = [ continue | terminate ]
+
+
+ continue
+
+ Proceed with share connection if the map command fails. This is
+ the default in the event that disposition is not specified.
+
+
+ terminate
+
+ Disconnect the share if the map command fails.
+
+
+
dns_suffix
Specifies a primary DNS suffix for this system. Some domain member
@@ -250,6 +250,22 @@
65536.
+ max_machine_pwd_age
+
+ Specifies the number of days the system's Active Directory computer
+ account password will last until the next password change opera-
+ tion. If set to 0, the periodic machine password change operation
+ is disabled. Valid values are 0 to 999 days. The default value is 0
+ (disabled).
+
+ We recommend that you set the maximum machine account password age
+ to about 30 days. Setting the value to fewer days can increase
+ replication and affect domain controllers. Significantly increasing
+ the password change interval (or disabling password changes) gives
+ an attacker more time to undertake a brute-force password-guessing
+ attack against one of the machine accounts.
+
+
max_workers
Specifies the maximum number of worker threads that are launched to
@@ -279,6 +295,15 @@
automatically excluded.
+ netbios_enable
+
+ Enables or disables all NetBIOS services. A value of true enables
+ NetBIOS name (UDP port 137), datagram (UDP port 138), session (TCP
+ port 139) services and the capability of locating domain controller
+ via NetBIOS-based discovery. A value of false disables all of them.
+ The default value is true.
+
+
oplock_enable
Enables oplocks on the server. The valid values are true or false.
@@ -428,15 +453,6 @@
take the same substitutions listed on the map property.
- netbios_enable
-
- Enables or disables all NetBIOS services. A value of true enables
- NetBIOS name (UDP port 137), datagram (UDP port 138), session (TCP
- port 139) services and the capability of locating domain controller
- via NetBIOS-based discovery. A value of false disables all of them.
- The default value is true.
-
-
ATTRIBUTES
See the attributes(7) man page for descriptions of the following
attributes:
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man7/ldap.7 11.4.54/man7/ldap.7
--- 11.4.51/man7/ldap.7 2023-02-14 17:42:34.002603702 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man7/ldap.7 2023-02-14 17:42:49.703833602 -0800
@@ -9,12 +9,12 @@
LDAP refers to Lightweight Directory Access Protocol, which is an
industry standard for accessing directory servers. By initializing the
client using ldapclient(8) and using the keyword ldap in the name ser-
- vice switch file, /etc/nsswitch.conf, Oracle Solaris clients can obtain
- naming information from an LDAP server. Information such as usernames,
- hostnames, and passwords are stored on the LDAP server in a Directory
- Information Tree or DIT. The DIT consists of entries which in turn are
- composed of attributes. Each attribute has a type and one or more val-
- ues.
+ vice switch configuration, nsswitch.conf(5), Oracle Solaris clients can
+ obtain naming information from an LDAP server. Information such as
+ usernames, hostnames, and passwords are stored on the LDAP server in a
+ Directory Information Tree or DIT. The DIT consists of entries which in
+ turn are composed of attributes. Each attribute has a type and one or
+ more values.
Oracle Solaris LDAP clients use the LDAP v3 protocol to access naming
@@ -144,8 +144,8 @@
When the credential level is configured as self, DNS must be configured
and the authentication method must be sasl/GSSAPI. The hosts and ipn-
- odes in /etc/nsswitch.conf must be configured to use DNS, for example
- hosts: dns files and ipnodes: dns files.
+ odes databases in nsswitch.conf must be configured to use DNS, for
+ example: hosts: dns files and ipnodes: dns files.
sasl/GSSAPI automatically uses GSSAPI confidentiality and integrity
@@ -183,9 +183,9 @@
A sample nsswitch.conf(5) file called nsswitch.ldap is provided in the
- /etc directory. This is copied to /etc/nsswitch.conf by the ldap-
- client(8) utility. This file uses LDAP as a repository for the differ-
- ent databases in the nsswitch.conf file.
+ /etc directory. This shows the entries that will be applied by the
+ ldapclient(8) utility to use LDAP as a repository for the different
+ databases in the nsswitch.conf configuration.
The following list consists of the user commands related to LDAP:
@@ -217,10 +217,6 @@
- /etc/nsswitch.conf Configuration file for the name-service
- switch.
-
-
/etc/nsswitch.ldap Sample configuration file for the name-
service switch configured with LDAP and
files.
@@ -242,4 +238,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 25 Mar 2020 ldap(7)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 ldap(7)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man7/pf.conf.7 11.4.54/man7/pf.conf.7
--- 11.4.51/man7/pf.conf.7 2023-02-14 17:42:34.125882396 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man7/pf.conf.7 2023-02-14 17:42:49.776865379 -0800
@@ -166,8 +163,7 @@
This rule applies only to packets of this protocol. Common proto-
cols are ICMP, ICMP6, TCP, and UDP. For a list of all the protocol
- name to number mappings used by pfctl(8), see the file /etc/proto-
- cols.
+ name to number mappings used by pfctl(8), see protocols(5).
from <source> port <source> os <source> to <dest> port <dest>
@@ -223,7 +215,7 @@
Ports can be specified either by number or by name. For example,
port 80 can be specified as www. For a list of all port name to
- number mappings used by pfctl(8), see the file /etc/services.
+ number mappings used by pfctl(8), see services(5).
Ports and ranges of ports are specified using these operators:
@@ -2182,24 +2103,14 @@
FILES
- /etc/hosts Host name database.
-
-
/etc/pf.conf Default location of the ruleset file.
/etc/pf.os Default location of OS fingerprints.
- /etc/protocols Protocol name database.
-
-
- /etc/services Service name database.
-
-
-
SEE ALSO
- pf.os(7), pfctl(8)
+ protocols(5), services(5), pf.os(7), pfctl(8)
HISTORY
The pf.conf file format first appeared in OpenBSD 3.0. It was added to
@@ -2214,4 +2125,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 21 Jun 2021 pf.conf(7)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 pf.conf(7)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man7/scale.7 11.4.54/man7/scale.7
--- 11.4.51/man7/scale.7 2023-02-14 17:42:34.165564094 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man7/scale.7 2023-02-14 17:42:49.818574907 -0800
@@ -22,8 +22,8 @@
arguments enables default scaled output. The specific defaults depend
on the utility in question, as follows.
- df(8), du(1), ls(1), plimit(1), pmadvise(1), pmap(1), ps(1), size(1),
- swap(8)
+ df(8), du(8), ipstat(8), ls(1), plimit(1), pmadvise(1), pmap(1), ps(1),
+ quota(8), ramdiskadm(8), size(1), swap(8), tcpstat(8),
--scale=max,1024
@@ -33,6 +33,11 @@
--scale=min,1024
+ dlstat(8), flowstat(8)
+
+ --scale=max,1000
+
+
OPTIONS
--scale[=item1,item2,...]
@@ -92,8 +97,9 @@
SEE ALSO
du(1), ls(1), plimit(1), pmadvise(1), pmap(1), ps(1), size(1), df(8),
- swap(8)
+ dlstat(8), flowstat(8), ipstat(8), quota(8), ramdiskadm(8), swap(8),
+ tcpstat(8),
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 23 August 2022 scale(7)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 28 October 2022 scale(7)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man7/suri.7 11.4.54/man7/suri.7
--- 11.4.51/man7/suri.7 2023-02-14 17:42:34.195610283 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man7/suri.7 2023-02-14 17:42:49.865975855 -0800
@@ -72,6 +72,7 @@
lu:luname.naa.5000c5000288fa25
lu:luname.eui.0021280001cf80f6
+ lu:luname.eui.0021280001cf80f6469b06c9ce900e9e
lu:initiator.naa.2100001d38089fb0,target.naa.2100001d38089fb0,luname.naa.5000c5000288fa25
lu:initiator.naa.2100001d38089fb0,target.naa.2100001d38089fb0,luname.eui.0021280001cf80f6
@@ -86,9 +87,10 @@
IDs are represented by using the SCSI-3 VPD page (0x83) logical unit
- names formatted as hexadecimal numbers (64/128 bits). IDs are case
- insensitive. Only logical unit names based on NAA or EUI-64 identifiers
- are supported. See NOTES for information on identifier formats.
+ names formatted as hexadecimal numbers. IDs are case insensitive. Only
+ logical unit names based on NAA and EUI-64 identifiers with length of 8
+ and 16 bytes are supported. See NOTES for information on identifier
+ formats.
In general it is recommended using multipathing in conjunction with
@@ -121,29 +123,18 @@
- IQN stands for iSCSI Qualified Name, which has the form iqn.YYYY-
- MM.<org-naming-auth>[:<string-defined-by-org>]. IQN format is defined
- and elaborated with examples in RFC 3721 on Internet Small Computer
- Systems Interface (iSCSI) Naming and Discovery. It is recommended that
- <string-defined-by-org> be a Universally Unique Identifier (UUID).
-
-
- The use of the target,lun form of the iSCSI URI will only be transfer-
- able between hosts if the mapping from the initiator, target, and LUN
- to the logical unit name is configured to be independent of the initia-
- tor.
-
-
Examples:
iscsi:///luname.eui.0021280001cf80f6
+ iscsi:///luname.eui.0021280001cf80f6469b06c9ce900e9e
iscsi:///luname.naa.600144f03d70c80000004ea57da10001
iscsi://[::1]/luname.naa.600144f03d70c80000004ea57da10001
iscsi://127.0.0.1/luname.naa.600144f03d70c80000004ea57da10001
iscsi://127.0.0.1:3260/luname.naa.600144f03d70c80000004ea57da10001
- iscsi://hostname:3260/luname.eui.0021280001cf80f6
- iscsi://hostname:3260/luname.naa.600144f03d70c80000004ea57da10001
+ iscsi://myhost:3260/luname.eui.0021280001cf80f6
+ iscsi://myhost:3260/luname.eui.0021280001cf80f6469b06c9ce900e9e
+ iscsi://myhost:3260/luname.naa.600144f03d70c80000004ea57da10001
iscsi://127.0.0.1/target.iqn.com.sun:02:d0f2d311-f703,lun.0
iscsi://127.0.0.1/target.eui.bbbbbbbbbbff0011,lun.0
iscsi://127.0.0.1:3260/target.iqn.com.sun:02:d0f2d311-f703,lun.3
@@ -152,21 +143,37 @@
iscsi:///target.eui.bbbbbbbbbbff0011,lun.6
iscsi://[::1]/target.iqn.com.sun:02:d0f2d311-f703,lun.2
iscsi://[::1]/target.eui.bbbbbbbbbbff0011,lun.2
- iscsi://hostname:3260/target.iqn.com.sun:4db41b76-e3d7-cd2f-bf2d-9abef784d76c,lun.0
- iscsi://hostname:3260/target.eui.bbbbbbbbbbff0011,lun.0
+ iscsi://myhost:3260/target.iqn.com.sun:4db41b76-e3d7-cd2f-bf2d-9abef784d76c,lun.0
+ iscsi://myhost:3260/target.eui.bbbbbbbbbbff0011,lun.0
+
+ The iSCSI URI specifies an object based on a logical unit accessible
+ via iSCSI protocol.
- The iSCSI URI specifies an object based on a logical unit number acces-
- sible via iSCSI protocol. Optional hostname[:<port>] authority section
- provides information for a consumer to set up a send-targets discovery
- address. IPv6 addresses must be enclosed in square brackets.
+
+ The optional host[:port] authority URI part provides information for a
+ consumer to set up a SendTargets discovery address. IPv6 addresses must
+ be enclosed in square brackets. If the host authority is omitted, the
+ iSCSI initiator discovery method must be configured manually.
Format of an ID is explained in the Logical Unit URI section. See NOTES
for information on NAA and EUI-64 based identifier formats.
+ IQN stands for iSCSI Qualified Name, which has the form iqn.YYYY-
+ MM.org-naming-auth[:string-defined-by-org]. IQN format is defined and
+ elaborated with examples in RFC 3721 on Internet Small Computer Systems
+ Interface (iSCSI) Naming and Discovery. It is recommended that string-
+ defined-by-org be a Universally Unique Identifier (UUID).
+
+
+ The use of the target,lun form of the iSCSI URI will only be transfer-
+ able between hosts if the mapping from the initiator, target, and LUN
+ to the logical unit is configured to be independent of the initiator.
+
+
The iscsi URI type does not support the create operation.
NFS URI
@@ -256,9 +263,9 @@
tifier that specifies the format and length of that identifier. NAA
identifier format is defined in SCSI Primary Commands - 3 specifica-
tion, section 7.6.3.6 NAA identifier format. WWN (World Wide Name)
- identifiers use an NAA identifier format. EUI-64 stands for 64-bit
- extended unique identifier and its format is defined by IEEE.
+ identifiers use the NAA identifier format. EUI-64 stands for Extended
+ Unique Identifier and its format is defined by IEEE.
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 11 May 2021 suri(7)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 23 Sep 2022 suri(7)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man7/webui-preferences.7 11.4.54/man7/webui-preferences.7
--- 11.4.51/man7/webui-preferences.7 2023-02-14 17:42:34.246475138 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man7/webui-preferences.7 2023-02-14 17:42:49.892539872 -0800
@@ -30,7 +30,7 @@
Defaults for documented preferences can be customized by creating files
- in the site directory; /usr/lib/webui/site/preferences/.
+ in the site directory; /usr/lib/webui/htdocs/solaris/site/preferences/.
There is no specific order for loading any files located in this direc-
@@ -42,4 +42,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 01 Feb 2016 webui-preferences(7)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 29 Sept 2022 webui-preferences(7)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man8/acctprc.8 11.4.54/man8/acctprc.8
--- 11.4.51/man8/acctprc.8 2023-02-14 17:42:34.291192251 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man8/acctprc.8 2023-02-14 17:42:49.942017503 -0800
@@ -57,10 +57,6 @@
example% acctprc2 > ptacct
-FILES
- /etc/passwd system password file
-
-
ATTRIBUTES
See attributes(7) for descriptions of the following attributes:
@@ -108,4 +104,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 16 Aug 2011 acctprc(8)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 acctprc(8)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man8/automount.8 11.4.54/man8/automount.8
--- 11.4.51/man8/automount.8 2023-02-14 17:42:34.358459969 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man8/automount.8 2023-02-14 17:42:49.977552018 -0800
@@ -35,21 +35,21 @@
- The +auto_master entry is a reference to an external NIS master map. If
- one exists, then its entries are read as if they occurred in place of
- the +auto_master entry. The remaining entries in the master file spec-
- ify a directory on which an autofs mount will be made followed by the
- automounter map to be associated with it. Optional mount options may be
- supplied as an optional third field in the each entry. These options
- are used for any entries in the map that do not specify mount options
- explicitly. The automount command is usually run without arguments. It
- compares the entries /etc/auto_master with the current list of autofs
- mounts in /etc/mnttab and adds, removes or updates autofs mounts to
- bring the /etc/mnttab up to date with the /etc/auto_master. At boot
- time it installs all autofs mounts from the master map. Subsequently,
- it may be run to install autofs mounts for new entries in the master
- map or the direct map, or to perform unmounts for entries that have
- been removed from these maps.
+ The +auto_master entry is a reference to an external LDAP or NIS master
+ map. If one exists, then its entries are read as if they occurred in
+ place of the +auto_master entry. The remaining entries in the master
+ file specify a directory on which an autofs mount will be made followed
+ by the automounter map to be associated with it. Optional mount options
+ may be supplied as an optional third field in the each entry. These
+ options are used for any entries in the map that do not specify mount
+ options explicitly. The automount command is usually run without argu-
+ ments. It compares the entries /etc/auto_master with the current list
+ of autofs mounts in /etc/mnttab and adds, removes or updates autofs
+ mounts to bring the /etc/mnttab up to date with the /etc/auto_master.
+ At boot time it installs all autofs mounts from the master map. Subse-
+ quently, it may be run to install autofs mounts for new entries in the
+ master map or the direct map, or to perform unmounts for entries that
+ have been removed from these maps.
SMF Management
The automount service is managed by the service management facility,
@@ -389,7 +383,7 @@
If mapname begins with a slash, it is assumed to be the pathname of a
local file. Otherwise, the location of the map is determined by the
policy of the name service switch according to the entry for the auto-
- mounter in /etc/nsswitch.conf, such as
+ mounter in nsswitch.conf(5), such as
automount: files nis
@@ -511,10 +501,6 @@
/etc/auto_home Map to support automounted home directories.
- /etc/nsswitch.conf Name service switch configuration file. See nss-
- witch.conf(5).
-
-
ATTRIBUTES
See attributes(7) for descriptions of the following attributes:
@@ -526,9 +512,9 @@
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
SEE ALSO
- isainfo(1), ls(1), svcs(1), uname(1), updatehome(1), attributes(7),
- nfssec(7), smf(7), automountd(8), mount(8), mount_nfs(8), sharectl(8),
- svcadm(8)
+ isainfo(1), ls(1), svcs(1), uname(1), updatehome(1), nsswitch.conf(5),
+ attributes(7), nfssec(7), smf(7), automountd(8), mount(8),
+ mount_nfs(8), sharectl(8), svcadm(8)
Managing Network File Systems in Oracle Solaris 11.4
@@ -579,4 +565,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 22 Nov 2017 automount(8)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 automount(8)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man8/dd.8 11.4.54/man8/dd.8
--- 11.4.51/man8/dd.8 2023-02-14 17:42:34.393780776 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man8/dd.8 2023-02-14 17:42:50.012120362 -0800
@@ -12,10 +12,9 @@
The dd utility copies the specified input file to the specified output
with possible conversions. The standard input and output are used by
default. The input and output block sizes may be specified to take
- advantage of raw physical I/O. Sizes are specified in bytes; a number
- may end with k, b, or w to specify multiplication by 1024, 512, or 2,
- respectively. Numbers may also be separated by x to indicate multipli-
- cation.
+ advantage of raw physical I/O. Sizes are specified in bytes; As
+ described below, an optional scale suffix can be specified, and numbers
+ may be separated by x to indicate multiplication.
The dd utility reads the input one block at a time, using the specified
@@ -41,6 +40,16 @@
After completion, dd reports the number of whole and partial input and
output blocks.
+OPTIONS
+ The following options are supported:
+
+ -?
+ --help
+
+ Print usage message and immediately exit.
+
+
+
OPERANDS
The following operands are supported:
@@ -242,20 +251,23 @@
For the bs=, cbs=, ibs=, and obs= operands, the application must supply
an expression specifying a size in bytes. The expression, expr, can be:
- 1. a positive decimal number
+ 1. A positive decimal number.
- 2. a positive decimal number followed by k, specifying multi-
- plication by 1024
+ 2. A positive decimal number followed by a scale factor suffix,
+ representing multiples of 1024 bytes: k, m, g, t, p, or e,
+ denoting kilobytes, megabytes, gigabytes, terabytes,
+ petabytes, or exabytes respectively.
- 3. a positive decimal number followed by b, specifying multi-
- plication by 512
+ 3. A positive decimal number followed by the scale factor b
+ (block), or w (word), specifying multiplication by 512, or 2
+ respectively.
- 4. two or more positive decimal numbers (with or without k or
- b) separated by x, specifying the product of the indicated
- values.
+ 4. Two or more positive decimal numbers as described above,
+ separated by x, specifying the product of the indicated val-
+ ues.
@@ -372,4 +384,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 11 May 2021 dd(8)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 18 October 2022 dd(8)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man8/dlstat.8 11.4.54/man8/dlstat.8
--- 11.4.51/man8/dlstat.8 2023-02-14 17:42:34.434272376 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man8/dlstat.8 2023-02-14 17:42:50.079631583 -0800
@@ -6,38 +6,45 @@
dlstat - report data links statistics
SYNOPSIS
- dlstat [-r] [-t] [-Z] [-i interval] [-z zone[,...]] [-T d|u] [link] [interval [count]]
+ dlstat [-r] [-t] [-Z] [-i interval] [-z zone[,...]] [-T d|u]
+ [link] [interval [count]
- dlstat [-a | -A] [-Z] [-i interval] [-p] [ -o field[,...]] [interval [count]]
- [-u R|K|M|G|T|P] [-z zone[,...]] [link] [-T d|u] [link]
+ dlstat [-a | -A] [-Z] [-i interval] [-o field[,...]]
+ [-p] [-u R|K|M|G|T|P|E] [--scale=...] [-z zone[,...]] [-T d|u]
+ [link] [interval [count]
- dlstat show-phys [-r] [-t] [-Z] [-i interval] [-a]
- [-p] [-o field[,...]] [-u R|K|M|G|T|P] [-z zone[,...]] [-T d|u] [link] [interval [count]]
+ dlstat show-phys [-r] [-t] [-Z] [-i interval] [-a] [-o field[,...]]
+ [-p] [-u R|K|M|G|T|P|E] [--scale=...] [-z zone[,...]] [-T d|u]
+ [link] [interval [count]
- dlstat show-link [-r] [-t] [-Z] [-i interval] [-a] [-f]
- [-p] [-o field[,...]] [-u R|K|M|G|T|P] [-z zone[,...]] [-T d|u] [link] [interval [count]]
+ dlstat show-link [-r] [-t] [-Z] [-i interval] [-a] [-o field[,...]]
+ [-p] [-u R|K|M|G|T|P|E] [--scale=...] [-z zone[,...]] [-T d|u]
+ [link] [interval [count]
- dlstat show-link -h [-Z] [-a] -f filename [-d] [-F format] [-s time]
- [-e time] [-z zone[,...]] [link]
+ dlstat show-link -h [-Z] [-a] -f filename [-d] [-F format] [-s
+ time] [-e time] [-z zone[,...]] [link]
- dlstat show-aggr [-r] [-t] [-Z] [-i interval] [-P probetype[,...]] [-p]
- [-o field[,...]] [-u R|K|M|G|T|P] [-z zone[,...]] [-T d|u] [link] [interval [count]]
+ dlstat show-aggr [-r] [-t] [-Z] [-i interval] [-P probetype[,...]]
+ [-o field[,...]] [-p] [-u R|K|M|G|T|P|E] [--scale=...]
+ [-z zone[,...]] [-T d|u] [link] [interval [count]
- dlstat show-ether -P protocol [-Z] [-i interval] [-p] [-o field[,...]]
- [-u R|K|M|G|T|P] [-T d|u] [ether-link] [interval [count]]
+ dlstat show-ether -P protocol [-Z] [-i interval]
+ [-o field[,...]] [-p] [-u R|K|M|G|T|P|E] [--scale=...] [-T d|u]
+ [ether-link] [interval [count]
- dlstat show-bridge [-r] [-t] [-Z] [-i interval] [-p] [-o field[,...]] [-u R|K|M|G|T|P] [-z zone[,...]] [bridge]
+ dlstat show-bridge [-r] [-t] [-Z] [-i interval] [-o field[,...]]
+ [-p] [-u R|K|M|G|T|P|E] [--scale=...] [-z zone[,...]] [bridge]
- dlstat show-cap [-i <interval>] [-a] [-p] -ofield,[...]] [-u
- R|K|M|G|T|P] [link] [interval [count]]
+ dlstat show-cap [-i interval] [-a] [-o field[,...]]
+ [-p] [-u R|K|M|G|T|P|E] [--scale=...] [link] [interval [count]]
dlstat help [subcommand-name]
@@ -158,7 +165,7 @@
-p
- Display output in a stable, machine-parseable format.
+ Display output in a stable, machine-parsable format.
-r
@@ -177,14 +184,14 @@
sent, drops, and so forth. See "Examples" for complete listing.
- -u R|K|M|G|T|P
+ -u R|K|M|G|T|P|E
- If used, allows choosing the unit in which to display all statis-
- tics, for example, R:raw count, K:Kilobytes, M:Megabytes, G:Giga-
- bytes, T:Terabytes, P:Petabytes. If not used, then different units,
- as appropriate, are used to display the statistics, using the for-
- mat xy.zU, where x, y, and z are numbers and U is the appropriate
- unit.
+ Specifies scale factor representing multiples of 1000 bytes, in
+ which to display all statistics: K, M, G, T, P, or E, denoting
+ kilobytes, megabytes, gigabytes, terabytes, petabytes, or exabytes
+ respectively. Alternatively, the scale factor R enables the display
+ of raw unscaled values. The scale factor can be uppercase or lower-
+ case.
-Z
@@ -211,6 +218,15 @@
date(1) man page.
+ --scale[=item1,item2,...]
+
+ dlstat prints values in a scaled human readable format, for exam-
+ ple, 14K, 234M, 2.7G, or 3.0T. Scaling is done by repetitively
+ dividing by a scale factor of 1000, unless otherwise specified. The
+ default format is equivalent to --scale=max,1000. See scale(7) for
+ a complete description of --scale features.
+
+
interval
If specified, it denotes the interval at which output rows are
@@ -262,8 +278,8 @@
- dlstat [-a | -A] [-Z] [-i interval] [-p] [ -o field[,...]] [-u
- R|K|M|G|T|P] [-z zone[,...]] [link] [interval [count]]
+ dlstat [-a | -A] [-Z] [-i interval] [ -o field[,...]] [-p] [-u
+ R|K|M|G|T|P|E] [--scale=...] [-z zone[,...]] [link] [interval [count]]
Allows specifying which statistics to display.
@@ -271,8 +287,9 @@
above.
- dlstat show-phys [-r] [-t] [-Z] [-i interval] [-a] [-p] [ -o
- field[,...]] [-u R|K|M|G|T|P] [-z zone[,...]] [link] [interval [count]]
+ dlstat show-phys [-r] [-t] [-Z] [-i interval] [-a] [ -o field[,...]]
+ [-p] [-u R|K|M|G|T|P|E] [--scale=...] [-z zone[,...]] [link] [interval
+ [count]]
Display statistics for a physical device.
@@ -280,8 +297,9 @@
above.
- dlstat show-link [-r] [-t] [-Z] [-i interval] [-a] [-f] [-p] [ -o
- field[,...]] [-u R|K|M|G|T|P] [-z zone[,...]] [link] [interval [count]]
+ dlstat show-link [-r] [-t] [-Z] [-i interval] [-a] [-f] [ -o
+ field[,...]] [-p] [-u R|K|M|G|T|P|E] [--scale=...] [-z zone[,...]]
+ [link] [interval [count]]
Display statistics for a link. In show-link output, under the ID
heading, there can be:
@@ -362,9 +380,9 @@
- dlstat show-aggr [-r] [-t] [-Z] [-i interval] [-P probetype[,...]] [-p]
- [ -o field[,...]] [-u R|K|M|G|T|P] [-z zone[,...]] [link] [interval
- [count]]
+ dlstat show-aggr [-r] [-t] [-Z] [-i interval] [-P probetype[,...]] [ -o
+ field[,...]] [-p] [-u [--scale=...] R|K|M|G|T|P|E] [-z zone[,...]]
+ [link] [interval [count]]
Display per-port statistics for an aggregation. Note that -r and -t
options display per-ring statistics of the aggregation.
@@ -458,8 +476,8 @@
- dlstat show-ether -P protocol [-Z] [-I interval] [-p] [-o field[,...]]
- [-u R|K|M|G|T|P] [ether-link] [interval [count]]
+ dlstat show-ether -P protocol [-Z] [-I interval] [-o field[,...]] [-p]
+ [-u R|K|M|G|T|P|E] [--scale=...] [ether-link] [interval [count]]
Display statistics for a given Ethernet protocol on a link. Sup-
ported IEEE protocols include vdp, the VSI Discovery and Configura-
@@ -532,9 +550,8 @@
- dlstat show-bridge [-r] [-t] [-Z] [-i interval ]
- [-p] [-o field[,...]] [-u R|K|M|G|T|P]
- [-z zone[,...]] [bridge]
+ dlstat show-bridge [-r] [-t] [-Z] [-i interval ] [-o field[,...]] [-p]
+ [-u R|K|M|G|T|P|E] [--scale=...] [-z zone[,...]] [bridge]
Displays per-link statistics for bridges. The options for this sub-
command are described under "Options". The optional bridge field is
@@ -590,8 +607,8 @@
RBYTES, OPKTS, OBYTES, DROPS and FORWARDS fields are shown.
- dlstat show-cap [-i interval] [-p] [-o field[,...]]
- [-u R|K|M|G|T|P] [link] [interval [count]]
+ dlstat show-cap [-i interval] [-o field[,...]] [-p] [-u R|K|M|G|T|P|E]
+ [--scale=...] [link] [interval [count]]
Display statistics for capture links/individual link bound to zone,
where dlstat command is running. The options for this subcommand
@@ -935,8 +952,8 @@
# dlstat help show-phys
usage:
- show-phys [-r] [-t] [-Z] [-i interval] [-a]
- [-p] [-o field[,...]] [-u R|K|M|G|T|P]
+ show-phys [-r] [-t] [-Z] [-i interval] [-a] [-o field[,...]]
+ [-p] [-u R|K|M|G|T|P|E] [--scale=...]
[-z zone[,...]] [link]
example:
@@ -960,8 +977,9 @@
Screen output is Uncommitted. The invocation is Committed.
SEE ALSO
- attributes(7), acctadm(8), dladm(8), ifconfig(8), kstat(8), netstat(8)
+ attributes(7), scale(7), acctadm(8), dladm(8), ifconfig(8), kstat(8),
+ netstat(8)
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 11 May 2021 dlstat(8)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 September 2022 dlstat(8)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man8/domainname.8 11.4.54/man8/domainname.8
--- 11.4.51/man8/domainname.8 2023-02-14 17:42:34.468336257 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man8/domainname.8 2023-02-14 17:42:50.123071771 -0800
@@ -74,13 +74,6 @@
use check-hostname(8) as a troubleshooting aid. This script can offer
guidance as to appropriate corrective action.
-FILES
- o /etc/defaultdomain
-
-
- o /etc/nsswitch.conf
-
-
ATTRIBUTES
See attributes(7) for descriptions of the following attributes:
@@ -111,4 +104,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 3 Nov 2021 domainname(8)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 domainname(8)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man8/flowstat.8 11.4.54/man8/flowstat.8
--- 11.4.51/man8/flowstat.8 2023-02-14 17:42:34.497381561 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man8/flowstat.8 2023-02-14 17:42:50.194738597 -0800
@@ -6,11 +6,13 @@
flowstat - report flow statistics
SYNOPSIS
- flowstat [-r | -t] [-v] [-i interval] [-l link] [-T d|u] [flow] [interval [count]]
+ flowstat [-r | -t] [-v] [-i interval] [-l link] [-T d|u]
+ [flow] [interval [count]]
- flowstat [-S] [-A] [-i interval] [-p] [ -o field[,...]]
- [-u R|K|M|G|T|P] [-v] [link] [-l link] [-T d|u] [flow] [interval [count]]
+ flowstat [-S] [-A] [-i interval] [ -o field[,...]] [-p]
+ [-u R|K|M|G|T|P|E] [--scale=...] [-v] [-l link] [-T d|u]
+ [flow] [interval [count]]
flowstat -h [-a] -f filename [-d] [-F format] [-s time]
@@ -83,7 +85,7 @@
flowstat [-S] [-A] [-i interval] [-p] [ -o field[,...]] [-u
- R|K|M|G|T|P] [-l link] [-T d|u] [flow] [interval [count]]
+ R|K|M|G|T|P||E] [-l link] [-T d|u] [flow] [interval [count]]
This form of the command allows you to specify which statistics to
display.
@@ -155,7 +157,7 @@
-p
- Display output in a stable, machine-parseable format.
+ Display output in a stable, machine-parsable format.
-S
@@ -165,12 +167,14 @@
process.
- -u R|K|M|G|T|P
+ -u R|K|M|G|T|P|E
- If used, allows choosing the unit in which to display all sta-
- tistics, for example, R: Raw Numbers, K:Kilobits, M:Megabits,
- T:Terabits, P:Petabits. If not used, then different units, as
- appropriate, are used to display the statistics.
+ Specifies scale factor representing multiples of 1000 bytes, in
+ which to display all statistics: K, M, G, T, P, or E, denoting
+ kilobytes, megabytes, gigabytes, terabytes, petabytes, or
+ exabytes respectively. Alternatively, the scale factor R
+ enables the display of raw unscaled values. The scale factor
+ can be uppercase or lowercase.
-v
@@ -178,6 +182,16 @@
Display output for the flow and all its flow filters.
+ --scale[=item1,item2,...]
+
+ flowstat prints values in a scaled human readable format, for
+ example, 14K, 234M, 2.7G, or 3.0T. Scaling is done by repeti-
+ tively dividing by a scale factor of 1000, unless otherwise
+ specified. The default format is equivalent to
+ --scale=max,1000. See scale(7) for a complete description of
+ --scale features.
+
+
flowstat -h [-a] -f filename [-d] [-F format] [-s time] [-e time]
[flow]
@@ -377,9 +391,9 @@
Screen output is Uncommitted. The invocation is Committed.
SEE ALSO
- dlpi(4P), attributes(7), acctadm(8), dladm(8), dlstat(8), flowadm(8),
- ifconfig(8), prstat(8), route(8)
+ dlpi(4P), attributes(7), scale(7), acctadm(8), dladm(8), dlstat(8),
+ flowadm(8), ifconfig(8), prstat(8), route(8)
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 11 May 2021 flowstat(8)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 September 2022 flowstat(8)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man8/getent.8 11.4.54/man8/getent.8
--- 11.4.51/man8/getent.8 2023-02-14 17:42:34.529584527 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man8/getent.8 2023-02-14 17:42:50.259932377 -0800
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@
DESCRIPTION
getent gets a list of entries from the administrative database speci-
fied by database. The information generally comes from one or more of
- the sources that are specified for the database in /etc/nsswitch.conf.
+ the sources that are specified for the database in nsswitch.conf(5).
database is the name of the database to be examined. This value can be
@@ -98,8 +98,8 @@
In this case, getent retrieves the contents of map from the sources
- listed for automount in /etc/nsswitch.conf. As with other databases,
- one or more specific search keys can be passed.
+ listed for automount in nsswitch.conf(5). As with other databases, one
+ or more specific search keys can be passed.
Each key must be in a format appropriate for searching on the respec-
@@ -240,54 +240,6 @@
3 There is no support for enumeration on this database.
-FILES
- /etc/nsswitch.conf Name service switch configuration file
-
-
- /etc/passwd Password file
-
-
- /etc/group Group file
-
-
- /etc/inet/hosts IPv4 and IPv6 host name database
-
-
- /etc/services Internet services and aliases
-
-
- /etc/project Project file
-
-
- /etc/protocols Protocol name database
-
-
- /etc/ethers Ethernet address to hostname database or
- domain
-
-
- /etc/networks Network name database
-
-
- /etc/netmasks Network mask database
-
-
- /etc/user_attr Extended user attributes
-
-
- /etc/security/prof_attr Profile description database
-
-
- /etc/security/auth_attr Authorization description
-
-
- /etc/security/exec_attr Execution profiles database
-
-
- /etc/auto_master Automounter databases
- /etc/auto_home
-
-
ATTRIBUTES
See attributes(7) for descriptions of the following attributes:
@@ -301,16 +253,17 @@
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
SEE ALSO
- ethers(3C), ether_hostton(3C), getauthattr(3C), getexecattr(3C), getgr-
- nam(3C), getgrouplist(3C), gethostbyaddr(3C), gethostbyname(3C), geth-
- ostent(3C), getipnodebyaddr(3C), getipnodebyname(3C), getnetbyname(3C),
+ ethers(3C), getauthattr(3C), getexecattr(3C), getgrnam(3C),
+ getgrouplist(3C), gethostbyaddr(3C), gethostbyname(3C), gethostent(3C),
+ getipnodebyaddr(3C), getipnodebyname(3C), getnetbyname(3C),
getnetgrent(3C), getprofattr(3C), getprotobyname(3C), getpwnam(3C),
- getservbyname(3C), getspnam(3C), getuserattr(3C), getprojby-
- name(3PROJECT), getrpcbyname(3C), auth_attr(5), ethers(5),
- exec_attr(5), group(5), hosts(5), netmasks(5), networks(5), nss-
- witch.conf(5), passwd(5), prof_attr(5), project(5), protocols(5), ser-
- vices(5), user_attr(5), automount(8)
+ getservbyname(3C), getspnam(3C), getuserattr(3C),
+ getprojbyname(3PROJECT), getrpcbyname(3C), auth_attr(5), ethers(5),
+ exec_attr(5), group(5), hosts(5), netgroup(5), netmasks(5),
+ networks(5), nsswitch.conf(5), passwd(5), prof_attr(5), project(5),
+ protocols(5), rpc(5), services(5), shadow(5), user_attr(5),
+ automount(8)
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 05 Aug 2018 getent(8)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 getent(8)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man8/ilbadm.8 11.4.54/man8/ilbadm.8
--- 11.4.51/man8/ilbadm.8 2023-02-14 17:42:34.568692115 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man8/ilbadm.8 2023-02-14 17:42:50.305009306 -0800
@@ -155,13 +155,13 @@
port[-port]
Port number or name, for example, telnet or dns. A port can
- be specified by port number or symbolic name (as in
- /etc/services). Port number ranges are also supported.
+ be specified by port number or symbolic name (as in ser-
+ vices(5)). Port number ranges are also supported.
protocol
- TCP (the default) or UDP (see /etc/services).
+ TCP (the default) or UDP (see services(5)).
@@ -776,7 +776,7 @@
# ilbadm create-servergroup -s server=60.0.0.10 sg1
- # lbadm create-rule -e -i vip=81.0.0.10,port=5000 \
+ # ilbadm create-rule -e -i vip=81.0.0.10,port=5000 \
-m lbalg=rr,type=NAT,proxy-src=60.0.0.105 \
-o servergroup=sg1 rule1
# ilbadm add-server -e -s server=60.0.0.11sg1
@@ -1170,4 +1170,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 30 Jul 2010 ilbadm(8)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 ilbadm(8)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man8/in.fingerd.8 11.4.54/man8/in.fingerd.8
--- 11.4.51/man8/in.fingerd.8 2023-02-14 17:42:34.594776048 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man8/in.fingerd.8 2023-02-14 17:42:50.342538896 -0800
@@ -33,9 +33,6 @@
/var/adm/utmpx User and accounting information.
- /etc/passwd System password file.
-
-
/var/adm/lastlog Last login times.
@@ -95,4 +92,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 13 Aug 2014 in.fingerd(8)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 in.fingerd(8)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man8/in.rarpd.8 11.4.54/man8/in.rarpd.8
--- 11.4.51/man8/in.rarpd.8 2023-02-14 17:42:34.623390190 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man8/in.rarpd.8 2023-02-14 17:42:50.376394512 -0800
@@ -66,22 +66,6 @@
example# /usr/sbin/in.rarpd le 0
-FILES
- /etc/ethers File or other source, as specified by nsswitch.conf(5).
-
-
- /etc/hosts File or other source, as specified by nsswitch.conf(5).
-
-
- /tftpboot
-
-
- /dev/ip
-
-
- /dev/arp
-
-
ATTRIBUTES
See attributes(7) for descriptions of the following attributes:
@@ -109,12 +93,10 @@
-
-
Administrative actions on this service, such as enabling, disabling, or
requesting restart, can be performed using svcadm(8). The service's
status can be queried using the svcs(1) command.
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 14 May 2018 in.rarpd(8)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 in.rarpd(8)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man8/in.rlogind.8 11.4.54/man8/in.rlogind.8
--- 11.4.51/man8/in.rlogind.8 2023-02-14 17:42:34.665331237 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man8/in.rlogind.8 2023-02-14 17:42:50.418794589 -0800
@@ -26,12 +26,12 @@
o The server checks the client's source address. If an entry
- for the client exists in both /etc/hosts and
+ for the client exists in both the hosts database and
/etc/hosts.equiv, a user logging in from the client is not
prompted for a password. If the address is associated with a
- host for which no corresponding entry exists in /etc/hosts,
- the user is prompted for a password, regardless of whether
- or not an entry for the client is present in
+ host for which no corresponding entry exists in the hosts
+ database, the user is prompted for a password, regardless of
+ whether or not an entry for the client is present in
/etc/hosts.equiv. For more information, see the hosts(5) and
hosts.equiv(5) man pages.
@@ -104,12 +104,12 @@
With this configuration, the server checks the client's source address.
- If an entry for the client exists in both /etc/hosts and
+ If an entry for the client exists in both the hosts database and
/etc/hosts.equiv, a user logging in from the client is not prompted for
a password. If the address is associated with a host for which no cor-
- responding entry exists in /etc/hosts, the user is prompted for a pass-
- word, regardless of whether or not an entry for the client is present
- in /etc/hosts.equiv. For more information, see the hosts(5) and
+ responding entry exists in the hosts database, the user is prompted for
+ a password, regardless of whether or not an entry for the client is
+ present in /etc/hosts.equiv. For more information, see the hosts(5) and
hosts.equiv(5) man pages.
@@ -140,9 +140,9 @@
login(1), rlogin(1), ssh(1), svcs(1), pam(3PAM), hosts(5),
hosts.equiv(5), pam.conf(5), attributes(7), environ(7), pam_auth-
tok_check(7), pam_authtok_get(7), pam_authtok_store(7), pam_dhkeys(7),
- pam_passwd_auth(7), pam_unix_account(7), pam_unix_auth(7),
- pam_unix_session(7), smf(7), in.rshd(8), inetadm(8), inetd(8), sshd(8),
- svcadm(8)
+ pam_passwd_auth(7), pam_rhosts_auth(7), pam_unix_account(7),
+ pam_unix_auth(7), pam_unix_session(7), smf(7), in.rshd(8), inetadm(8),
+ inetd(8), sshd(8), svcadm(8)
DIAGNOSTICS
All diagnostic messages are returned on the connection associated with
@@ -219,4 +219,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 12 May 2022 in.rlogind(8)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 in.rlogind(8)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man8/ipstat.8 11.4.54/man8/ipstat.8
--- 11.4.51/man8/ipstat.8 2023-02-14 17:42:34.724707809 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man8/ipstat.8 2023-02-14 17:42:50.474204742 -0800
@@ -7,9 +7,10 @@
SYNOPSIS
ipstat [-cegkLmnrt] [-a address[,address...]] [-A address[,address...]]
- [-d d|u] [-E all|event[,event...]] [-i interface[,interface...]] [-l nlines]
- [-p protocol[,protocol...]] [-s key | -S key] [-u R|K|M|G|T|P]
- [-x opt[=val][,opt[=val]...]] [interval [count]]
+ [-d d|u] [-E all|event[,event...]] [-i interface[,interface...]]
+ [-l nlines] [-p protocol[,protocol... ]] [-s key | -S key]
+ [-u R|K|M|G|T|P|E] [--scale=...] [-z [-x opt[=val][,opt[=val]...]]
+ [interval [count]]
DESCRIPTION
The ipstat utility gathers and reports statistics on IP traffic, IP
@@ -131,13 +132,14 @@
Only display data for packets being transmitted.
- -u R|K|M|G|T|P
+ -u R|K|M|G|T|P|E
- If used, allows choosing the unit in which to display all statis-
- tics, for example, R: raw count, K: Kilobits, M:Megabits, T: Ter-
- abits, P: Petabits. If not used, then different units, as appropri-
- ate, are used to display the statistics, using the format xy.zU,
- where x, y, and z are numbers and U is the appropriate unit.
+ Specifies scale factor representing multiples of 1024 bytes, in
+ which to display all statistics: K, M, G, T, P, or E, denoting
+ kilobytes, megabytes, gigabytes, terabytes, petabytes, or exabytes
+ respectively. Alternatively, the scale factor R enables the display
+ of raw unscaled values. The scale factor can be uppercase or lower-
+ case.
-x opt=val[,opt=val]
@@ -154,6 +156,15 @@
The default for aggsize is 512k. The default for aggrate is 1Hz.
+ --scale[=item1,item2,...]
+
+ ipstat prints values in a scaled human readable format, for exam-
+ ple, 14K, 234M, 2.7G, or 3.0T. Scaling is done by repetitively
+ dividing by a scale factor of 1024, unless otherwise specified. The
+ default format is equivalent to --scale=max,1024. See scale(7) for
+ a complete description of --scale features.
+
+
OUTPUT
The following list defines the column headings and the meanings of an
ipstat report:
@@ -389,7 +400,7 @@
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
SEE ALSO
- dtrace(8), netstat(8), tcpstat(8)
+ scale(7), dtrace(8), netstat(8), tcpstat(8)
NOTES
The data presented are not sampled data. The values represent an accu-
@@ -398,4 +409,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 11 May 2021 ipstat(8)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 18 September 2022 ipstat(8)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man8/ldapaddent.8 11.4.54/man8/ldapaddent.8
--- 11.4.51/man8/ldapaddent.8 2023-02-14 17:42:34.763740593 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man8/ldapaddent.8 2023-02-14 17:42:50.510969857 -0800
@@ -157,14 +157,12 @@
or authenticationMethod is set to none, the user must use this
option to provide an authentication method. If the authentication
method is sasl/GSSAPI, bindDN and bindPassword is not required and
- the hosts and ipnodes fields of /etc/nsswitch.conf must be config-
- ured as:
-
+ the hosts and ipnodes fields of nsswitch.conf(5) must be configured
+ as:
hosts: dns files
ipnodes: dns files
- See nsswitch.conf(5).
-b baseDN
@@ -420,4 +414,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 2 Apr 2020 ldapaddent(8)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 ldapaddent(8)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man8/pfctl.8 11.4.54/man8/pfctl.8
--- 11.4.51/man8/pfctl.8 2023-02-14 17:42:34.796279956 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man8/pfctl.8 2023-02-14 17:42:50.624473864 -0800
@@ -230,7 +230,8 @@
-P
- Print ports using their names in /etc/services if available.
+ Print ports using their names in the services(5) database if avail-
+ able.
-p device
@@ -631,4 +632,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 21 Jun 2021 pfctl(8)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 pfctl(8)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man8/praudit.8 11.4.54/man8/praudit.8
--- 11.4.51/man8/praudit.8 2023-02-14 17:42:34.824217548 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man8/praudit.8 2023-02-14 17:42:50.680887467 -0800
@@ -49,11 +49,11 @@
Display records in their short form. Numeric fields' ASCII equiva-
lents are looked up by means of the sources specified in the
- /etc/nsswitch.conf file (see nsswitch.conf(5)). All numeric fields
- are converted to ASCII and then displayed. The short ASCII repre-
- sentations for the record type and event fields are used. This
- option and the -r option are exclusive. If both are used, a format
- usage error message is output.
+ nsswitch.conf(5) configuration. All numeric fields are converted to
+ ASCII and then displayed. The short ASCII representations for the
+ record type and event fields are used. This option and the -r
+ option are exclusive. If both are used, a format usage error mes-
+ sage is output.
-x
@@ -119,11 +119,11 @@
SEE ALSO
xsltproc(1), getpwuid(3C), audit.log(5), audit_class(5),
audit_event(5), group(5), nsswitch.conf(5), passwd(5), attributes(7),
- privileges(7), auditrecord(8), auditreduce(8), getent(8)
+ privileges(7), admhist(8), auditrecord(8), auditreduce(8), getent(8)
Managing Auditing in Oracle Solaris 11.4.
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 28 Jun 2021 praudit(8)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 praudit(8)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man8/projmod.8 11.4.54/man8/projmod.8
--- 11.4.51/man8/projmod.8 2023-02-14 17:42:34.854603769 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man8/projmod.8 2023-02-14 17:42:50.723277173 -0800
@@ -362,19 +362,9 @@
FILES
- /etc/group System file containing group definitions
-
-
/etc/project System project file
- /etc/passwd System password file
-
-
- /etc/shadow System file containing users' encrypted passwords and
- related information
-
-
ATTRIBUTES
See attributes(7) for descriptions of the following attributes:
@@ -405,4 +395,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 17 Mar 2015 projmod(8)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 projmod(8)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man8/quota.8 11.4.54/man8/quota.8
--- 11.4.51/man8/quota.8 2023-02-14 17:42:34.882163829 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man8/quota.8 2023-02-14 17:42:50.757814653 -0800
@@ -6,12 +6,13 @@
quota - display a user's ufs or zfs file system disk quota and usage
SYNOPSIS
- quota [-v] [username]
+ quota [-hv] [--scale[=item1,item2,...]] [username]
DESCRIPTION
- quota displays users' UFS or ZFS disk usage and limits. The
- {PRIV_SYS_MOUNT} privilege is required to use the optional username
- argument to view the usage and limits of other users.
+ quota displays users' UFS or ZFS disk usage and limits. File sizes are
+ displayed as 1024 byte blocks, while UFS inode counts are displayed
+ directly. The {PRIV_SYS_MOUNT} privilege is required to use the
+ optional username argument to view the usage and limits of other users.
quota without options only display warnings about mounted file systems
@@ -27,10 +28,34 @@
quota mount option.
OPTIONS
- -v Display user's quota on all mounted file systems not mounted with
+ -h
+
+ Prints all quota values scaled to a human readable format. The -h
+ option is equivalent to using the --scale=max,1024 option.
+
+
+ --scale[=item1,item2,...]
+
+ Prints all quota values scaled to a human readable format. Scaling
+ is done by repetitively dividing by 1024, unless otherwise speci-
+ fied. --scale specified without arguments enables default scaled
+ output, and is equivalent to --scale=max,1024. See scale(7) for a
+ complete description of --scale features.
+
+
+ -v
+
+ Display user's quota on all mounted file systems not mounted with
noquota where quotas exist.
+ -?
+ --help
+
+ Print usage message and immediately exit.
+
+
+
FILES
/etc/mnttab list of currently mounted filesystems
@@ -46,8 +71,8 @@
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
SEE ALSO
- attributes(7), privileges(7), zones(7), edquota(8), mount_nfs(8), quo-
- tacheck(8), quotaon(8), repquota(8), rquotad(8)
+ attributes(7), privileges(7), scale(7), zones(7), edquota(8),
+ mount_nfs(8), quotacheck(8), quotaon(8), repquota(8), rquotad(8)
NOTES
quota displays quotas for NFS mounted UFS- or ZFS-based file systems if
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man8/ramdiskadm.8 11.4.54/man8/ramdiskadm.8
--- 11.4.51/man8/ramdiskadm.8 2023-02-14 17:42:34.917176785 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man8/ramdiskadm.8 2023-02-14 17:42:50.788575840 -0800
@@ -6,13 +6,13 @@
ramdiskadm - administer ramdisk pseudo device
SYNOPSIS
- /usr/sbin/ramdiskadm -a name size [g | m | k | b]
+ /usr/sbin/ramdiskadm -a name size
/usr/sbin/ramdiskadm -d name
- /usr/sbin/ramdiskadm
+ /usr/sbin/ramdiskadm [-h] [--scale[=item1,item2,...]]
DESCRIPTION
The ramdiskadm command administers ramdisk(4D), the ramdisk driver. Use
@@ -25,34 +25,62 @@
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
- -a name size Create a ramdisk named name of size size and its corre-
- sponding block and character device nodes.
+ -a name size
+
+ Create a ramdisk named name of size size and its corresponding
+ block and character device nodes.
+
+ name must be composed only of the characters a-z, A-Z, 0-9, _
+ (underbar), and - (hyphen), but it must not begin with a hyphen. It
+ must be no more than 32 characters long. Ramdisk names must be
+ unique.
+
+ The size can can be specified in decimal, hexadecimal, or octal
+ notation. Hexadecimal values are indicated with a 0x prefix, while
+ octal values start with a leading 0. An optional scale factor suf-
+ fix may be specified, representing multiples of 1024 bytes: k, m,
+ g, t, p, or e, denoting kilobytes, megabytes, gigabytes, terabytes,
+ petabytes, or exabytes respectively. Alternatively, the scale fac-
+ tor b denotes 512 byte blocks. The scale factor can be uppercase or
+ lowercase. If no scale factor is given, bytes are assumed. The size
+ of the ramdisk actually created might be larger than that speci-
+ fied, depending on the hardware implementation.
+
+ If the named ramdisk is successfully created, its block device path
+ is printed on standard out.
+
+
+ -d name
+
+ Delete an existing ramdisk of the name name. This command succeeds
+ only when the named ramdisk is not open. The associated memory is
+ freed and the device nodes are removed.
+
+ You can delete only ramdisks created using ramdiskadm. It is not
+ possible to delete a ramdisk that was created during the boot
+ process.
+
+
+ -h
+
+ Prints ramdisk size scaled to a human readable format. The -h
+ option is equivalent to using the --scale=max,1024 option.
+
+
+ --scale[=item1,item2,...]
+
+ Prints ramdisk size scaled to a human readable format. Scaling is
+ done by repetitively dividing by 1024, unless otherwise specified.
+ --scale specified without arguments enables default scaled output,
+ and is equivalent to --scale=max,1024. See scale(7) for a complete
+ description of --scale features.
+
+
+ -?
+ --help
+
+ Print usage message and immediately exit.
- name must be composed only of the characters a-z, A-Z,
- 0-9, _ (underbar), and - (hyphen), but it must not
- begin with a hyphen. It must be no more than 32 charac-
- ters long. Ramdisk names must be unique.
-
- The size can be a decimal number, or, when prefixed
- with 0x, a hexadecimal number, and can specify the size
- in bytes (no suffix), 512-byte blocks (suffix b), kilo-
- bytes (suffix k), megabytes (suffix m) or gigabytes
- (suffix g). The size of the ramdisk actually created
- might be larger than that specified, depending on the
- hardware implementation.
-
- If the named ramdisk is successfully created, its block
- device path is printed on standard out.
-
-
- -d name Delete an existing ramdisk of the name name. This com-
- mand succeeds only when the named ramdisk is not open.
- The associated memory is freed and the device nodes are
- removed.
-
- You can delete only ramdisks created using ramdiskadm.
- It is not possible to delete a ramdisk that was created
- during the boot process.
@@ -100,7 +128,7 @@
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
SEE ALSO
- ramdisk(4D), attributes(7)
+ ramdisk(4D), attributes(7), scale(7)
NOTES
The abilities of ramdiskadm and the privilege level of the person who
@@ -119,4 +147,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 25 Mar 2003 ramdiskadm(8)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 23 September 2022 ramdiskadm(8)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man8/route.8 11.4.54/man8/route.8
--- 11.4.51/man8/route.8 2023-02-14 17:42:34.973804527 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man8/route.8 2023-02-14 17:42:50.827326080 -0800
@@ -448,13 +448,6 @@
The -ifa hostname modifier is also accepted, but has no effect.
-FILES
- /etc/hosts List of host names and net addresses
-
-
- /etc/networks List of network names and addresses
-
-
ATTRIBUTES
See attributes(7) for descriptions of the following attributes:
@@ -540,4 +533,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 3 Nov 2021 route(8)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 route(8)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man8/rpc.bootparamd.8 11.4.54/man8/rpc.bootparamd.8
--- 11.4.51/man8/rpc.bootparamd.8 2023-02-14 17:42:34.999933403 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man8/rpc.bootparamd.8 2023-02-14 17:42:50.866071468 -0800
@@ -14,7 +14,8 @@
The source for the bootparams database is determined by the nss-
- witch.conf(5) file (on the machine running the rpc.bootparamd process).
+ witch.conf(5) configuration on the machine running the rpc.bootparamd
+ process.
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
@@ -22,13 +23,6 @@
-d Display debugging information.
-FILES
- /etc/bootparams boot parameter database
-
-
- /etc/nsswitch.conf configuration file for the name-service switch
-
-
ATTRIBUTES
See attributes(7) for descriptions of the following attributes:
@@ -62,12 +56,10 @@
-
-
Administrative actions on this service, such as enabling, disabling, or
requesting restart, can be performed using svcadm(8). The service's
status can be queried using the svcs(1) command.
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 11 May 2021 rpc.bootparamd(8)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 rpc.bootparamd(8)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man8/rsh.8 11.4.54/man8/rsh.8
--- 11.4.51/man8/rsh.8 2023-02-14 17:42:35.031051816 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man8/rsh.8 2023-02-14 17:42:50.924843348 -0800
@@ -42,8 +42,8 @@
A restricted shell can be invoked in one of the following ways:
- 1. rsh is the file name part of the last entry in the
- /etc/passwd file (see passwd(5));
+ 1. rsh is the file name part of the last entry in the passwd(5)
+ entry for the user;
2. the environment variable SHELL exists and rsh is the file
@@ -109,4 +109,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 11 May 2021 rsh(8)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 rsh(8)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man8/savecore.8 11.4.54/man8/savecore.8
--- 11.4.51/man8/savecore.8 2023-02-14 17:42:35.066109224 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man8/savecore.8 2023-02-14 17:42:50.968380680 -0800
@@ -6,11 +6,12 @@
savecore - save a crash dump of the operating system
SYNOPSIS
- savecore [-dNrvV] [-D dirname] [-s secname] [-f dumpfile] [suffix]
+ savecore [-dNrvVz] [-D dirname] [-s secname] [-f dumpfile] [suffix]
savecore -L [-v] [-D dirname]
savecore -u [-dv] [-D dirname] [-f dumpfile]
savecore -l [-H] [-f dumpfile]
savecore -r [-v]
+ savecore -z[-h] -f dumpfile [--scale[=item1,item2,...]]
DESCRIPTION
The savecore utility saves a crash dump of the kernel (assuming that
@@ -172,6 +173,28 @@
Verbose. Enables verbose error messages from savecore.
+ -z
+
+ Size. It reads the dump file header and print the uncompressed size
+ in bytes.
+
+
+ -h
+
+ Size with units. If used with -z option, it reads the dump file
+ header and print the uncompressed size with units.
+
+
+ --scale[=item1,item2,...]
+
+ All sizes are scaled to a human readable format, for example, 14K,
+ 234M, 2.7G, or 3.0T. Scaling is done by repetitively dividing by
+ 1024, unless otherwise specified. --scale specified without argu-
+ ments enables default scaled output, and is equivalent to
+ --scale=max,1024. See scale(7) for a complete description of
+ --scale features.
+
+
EXAMPLES
Example 1 Manually Extract Only proc Section From the Dump Device
@@ -278,4 +301,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 11 May 2021 savecore(8)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 14 September 2022 savecore(8)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man8/share_smb.8 11.4.54/man8/share_smb.8
--- 11.4.51/man8/share_smb.8 2023-02-14 17:42:35.109697821 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man8/share_smb.8 2023-02-14 17:42:51.018182910 -0800
@@ -22,9 +22,8 @@
You can modify the behavior of SMB shares by setting property values
- with the share command, or with the zfs set or zfs
- share commands. For more information, see the share(8) and
- zfs(8) man pages.
+ with the share command, or with the zfs set or zfs share commands. For
+ more information, see the share(8) and zfs(8) man pages.
The share command has the following options:
@@ -307,7 +304,7 @@
Specifies the name of a host. hostname must be a fully qualified
DNS or LDAP name when the host specifies these naming schemes in
- the hosts portion of the nsswitch.conf file.
+ the hosts portion of the nsswitch.conf(5) configuration.
netgroup
@@ -315,7 +312,7 @@
A netgroup contains a number of host names. Any hostname in a net-
group must be a fully qualified DNS or LDAP name when the host
specifies these naming schemes in the hosts portion of the nss-
- witch.conf file.
+ witch.conf(5) configuration.
If the explicit_netgroups setting is enabled, netgroup entries in
share access lists must be prefixed with the '%' character to dis-
@@ -327,9 +324,9 @@
To use domain membership, the server must use DNS or LDAP to
resolve host names to IP addresses. This means that the hosts entry
- of the /etc/nsswitch.conf file must specify dns or ldap before nis.
- You must do this because only DNS and LDAP return the full domain
- name of the host.
+ of the nsswitch.conf(5) configuration must specify dns or ldap
+ before nis. You must do this because only DNS and LDAP return the
+ full domain name of the host.
Other naming services, such as NIS, cannot be used to resolve host
names on the server because these naming services do not return
@@ -462,4 +457,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Dec 2019 share_smb(8)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 share_smb(8)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man8/sharectl.8 11.4.54/man8/sharectl.8
--- 11.4.51/man8/sharectl.8 2023-02-14 17:42:35.146473443 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man8/sharectl.8 2023-02-14 17:42:51.065647616 -0800
@@ -26,8 +26,8 @@
The get and set subcommands (see below) require root privileges. An
authorized user can use sharectl to set global values for NFS and SMB
- properties in the Solaris server management facility. See nfs(5) and
- smb(5).
+ properties in the Solaris server management facility. See autofs(5),
+ nfs(5) and smb(5).
OPTIONS
The following options are supported:
@@ -238,10 +238,10 @@
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
SEE ALSO
- nfs(5), smb(5), user_attr(5), attributes(7), rbac(7), smf(7), stan-
- dards(7), automount(8), automountd(8), lockd(8), mountd(8), nfsd(8),
- nfsmapid(8)
+ autofs(5), nfs(5), smb(5), user_attr(5), attributes(7), rbac(7),
+ smf(7), standards(7), automount(8), automountd(8), lockd(8), mountd(8),
+ nfsd(8), nfsmapid(8)
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 06 Aug 2022 sharectl(8)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 12 Sept 2022 sharectl(8)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man8/snoop.8 11.4.54/man8/snoop.8
--- 11.4.51/man8/snoop.8 2023-02-14 17:42:35.196909214 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man8/snoop.8 2023-02-14 17:42:51.101770947 -0800
@@ -148,7 +148,7 @@
-n filename
Use filename as an IP address-to-name mapping table. This file must
- have the same format as the /etc/hosts file (IP address followed by
+ have the same format as the hosts(5) file (IP address followed by
the hostname).
@@ -427,21 +427,23 @@
port port
True if either the source or destination port is port. The port
- may be either a port number or name from /etc/services. The tcp
- or udp primitives may be used to select TCP or UDP ports only.
- The from or to qualifier may be used to select packets for
- which the port occurs only as the source or destination.
+ may be either a port number or name from the services(5) data-
+ base. The tcp or udp primitives may be used to select TCP or
+ UDP ports only. The from or to qualifier may be used to select
+ packets for which the port occurs only as the source or desti-
+ nation.
rpc prog [ , vers [ , proc ] ]
True if the packet is an RPC call or reply packet for the pro-
tocol identified by prog. The prog may be either the name of an
- RPC protocol from /etc/rpc or a program number. The vers and
- proc may be used to further qualify the program version and
- procedure number, for example, rpc nfs,2,0 selects all calls
- and replies for the NFS null procedure. The to or from quali-
- fier may be used to select either call or reply packets only.
+ RPC protocol from the rpc(5) database or a program number. The
+ vers and proc may be used to further qualify the program ver-
+ sion and procedure number, for example, rpc nfs,2,0 selects all
+ calls and replies for the NFS null procedure. The to or from
+ qualifier may be used to select either call or reply packets
+ only.
zone zoneid
@@ -763,15 +765,6 @@
/dev/null The null file.
- /etc/hosts Host name database.
-
-
- /etc/rpc RPC program number database.
-
-
- /etc/services Internet services and aliases.
-
-
ATTRIBUTES
See attributes(7) for descriptions of the following attributes:
@@ -834,4 +827,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 11 May 2021 snoop(8)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 snoop(8)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man8/stmfadm.8 11.4.54/man8/stmfadm.8
--- 11.4.51/man8/stmfadm.8 2023-02-14 17:42:35.243938510 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man8/stmfadm.8 2023-02-14 17:42:51.137260574 -0800
@@ -405,6 +405,13 @@
Write-protect bit. Specify true or false to determine whether
the device reports as write-protected. The default is false.
+
+ sr
+
+ Space reclamation setting changeable. Specify true or false to
+ determine whether the device's SCSI logical provisioning is
+ supported or not. The default is false.
+
For the -s option, size is an integer followed by one of the fol-
lowing letters, to indicate a unit of size:
@@ -564,6 +571,13 @@
the device reports as write-protected. The default is false.
+ sr
+
+ Space reclamation setting changeable. Specify true or false to
+ determine whether the device's SCSI logical provisioning is
+ supported or not. The default is false.
+
+
wcms
Write cache setting changeable. Specified as true or false.
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man8/su.8 11.4.54/man8/su.8
--- 11.4.51/man8/su.8 2023-02-14 17:42:35.272180499 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man8/su.8 2023-02-14 17:42:51.167155166 -0800
@@ -20,11 +20,11 @@
tionally, the new shell's project ID is set to the default project ID
of the specified user. See getprojent(3PROJECT), setproject(3PROJECT).
The new shell will be the shell specified in the shell field of user-
- name's password file entry (see passwd(5)). If no shell is specified,
- /usr/bin/sh is used (see sh(1)). If superuser privilege is requested
- and the shell for the superuser cannot be invoked using exec(2),
- /sbin/sh is used as a fallback. To return to normal user ID privileges,
- type an EOF character (CTRL-D) to exit the new shell.
+ name's password database entry (see passwd(5)). If no shell is speci-
+ fied, /usr/bin/sh is used (see sh(1)). If superuser privilege is
+ requested and the shell for the superuser cannot be invoked using
+ exec(2), /sbin/sh is used as a fallback. To return to normal user ID
+ privileges, type an EOF character (CTRL-D) to exit the new shell.
Any additional arguments given on the command line are passed to the
@@ -135,11 +132,6 @@
user's login commands for sh and ksh
- /etc/passwd
-
- system's password file
-
-
/etc/profile
system-wide sh and ksh login commands
@@ -233,9 +225,9 @@
csh(1), env(1), ksh(1), login(1), roles(1), sh(1), exec(2), syslog(3C),
pam(3PAM), pam_acct_mgmt(3PAM), pam_authenticate(3PAM), pam_set-
cred(3PAM), getprojent(3PROJECT), setproject(3PROJECT), pam.conf(5),
- passwd(5), profile(5), sulog(5), attributes(7), environ(7), syslogd(8),
- account-policy(8S)
+ passwd(5), profile(5), sulog(5), attributes(7), environ(7), sudo(8),
+ syslogd(8), account-policy(8S)
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 11 May 2021 su(8)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 su(8)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man8/tcpstat.8 11.4.54/man8/tcpstat.8
--- 11.4.51/man8/tcpstat.8 2023-02-14 17:42:35.314874596 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man8/tcpstat.8 2023-02-14 17:42:51.197693346 -0800
@@ -8,11 +8,10 @@
SYNOPSIS
tcpstat [-cegkLmnrt] [-a address[,address...]] [-A address[,address...]]
[-d d|u] [-E all|event[,event...]] [-i interface[,interface...]]
- [-i pid[,pid]] [-l nlines]
- [-p port[,port...]] [-P port[,port...]] [-s key | -S key]
- [-T protocol[,protocol...]]
- [-u R|K|M|G|T|P] [-x opt[=val][,opt[=val]...]]
- [-z zonename[,zonename...]] [interval [count]]
+ [-i pid[,pid]] [-l nlines] [-p port[,port...]] [-P port[,port...]]
+ [-s key | -S key] [-T protocol[,protocol...]] [-u R|K|M|G|T|P|E]
+ [--scale=...] [-x opt[=val][,opt[=val]...]] [-z zonename[,zonename...]]
+ [interval [count]]
DESCRIPTION
The tcpstat utility gathers and reports statistics on TCP and UDP traf-
@@ -148,13 +147,14 @@
Only display data for packets being transmitted.
- -u R|K|M|G|T|P
+ -u R|K|M|G|T|P|E
- If used, allows choosing the unit in which to display all statis-
- tics, for example, R: raw count, K: Kilobits, M:Megabits, T: Ter-
- abits, P: Petabits. If not used, then different units, as appropri-
- ate, are used to display the statistics, using the format xy.zU,
- where x, y, and z are numbers and U is the appropriate unit.
+ Specifies scale factor representing multiples of 1024 bytes, in
+ which to display all statistics: K, M, G, T, P, or E, denoting
+ kilobytes, megabytes, gigabytes, terabytes, petabytes, or exabytes
+ respectively. Alternatively, the scale factor R enables the display
+ of raw unscaled values. The scale factor can be uppercase or lower-
+ case.
-T protocol[,protocol...]
@@ -183,6 +183,15 @@
Filters on zonename.
+ --scale[=item1,item2,...]
+
+ tcpstat prints values in a scaled human readable format, for exam-
+ ple, 14K, 234M, 2.7G, or 3.0T. Scaling is done by repetitively
+ dividing by a scale factor of 1024, unless otherwise specified. The
+ default format is equivalent to --scale=max,1024. See scale(7) for
+ a complete description of --scale features.
+
+
OUTPUT
The following list defines the column headings and the meanings of an
tcpstat report:
@@ -452,7 +461,7 @@
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
SEE ALSO
- dtrace(8), ipstat(8), netstat(8)
+ scale(7), dtrace(8), ipstat(8), netstat(8)
NOTES
The data presented are not sampled data. The values represent an accu-
@@ -461,4 +470,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 11 May 2021 tcpstat(8)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 8 September 2022 tcpstat(8)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man8/tnctl.8 11.4.54/man8/tnctl.8
--- 11.4.51/man8/tnctl.8 2023-02-14 17:42:35.342222484 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man8/tnctl.8 2023-02-14 17:42:51.236163164 -0800
@@ -126,11 +126,6 @@
Trusted zone configuration database
- /etc/nsswitch.conf
-
- Configuration file for the name service switch
-
-
ATTRIBUTES
See attributes(7) for descriptions of the following attributes:
@@ -180,4 +175,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 21 Jun 2021 tnctl(8)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 tnctl(8)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man8/tnd.8 11.4.54/man8/tnd.8
--- 11.4.51/man8/tnd.8 2023-02-14 17:42:35.376470377 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man8/tnd.8 2023-02-14 17:42:51.287674104 -0800
@@ -105,11 +105,6 @@
Trusted zone configuration database
- /etc/nsswitch.conf
-
- Configuration file for the name service switch
-
-
ATTRIBUTES
See attributes(7) for descriptions of the following attributes:
@@ -158,4 +153,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 21 Jun 2021 tnd(8)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 tnd(8)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man8/ufsdump.8 11.4.54/man8/ufsdump.8
--- 11.4.51/man8/ufsdump.8 2023-02-14 17:42:35.411573648 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man8/ufsdump.8 2023-02-14 17:42:51.338076508 -0800
@@ -311,7 +311,7 @@
The following command makes and verifies an incremental dump at level 5
- of the usr partition of c0t3d0, on a 1/2 inch reel tape unit 1,:
+ of the usr partition of c0t3d0, on a 1/2 inch reel tape unit 1:
example# ufsdump 5fuv /dev/rmt/1 /dev/rdsk/c0t3d0s6
@@ -347,16 +347,6 @@
dump date record
- /etc/group
-
- to find group sys
-
-
- /etc/hosts
-
- to gain access to remote system with drive
-
-
/etc/vfstab
list of file systems
@@ -461,4 +451,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 27 Nov 2017 ufsdump(8)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 6 Oct 2022 ufsdump(8)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man8/wanboot_p12split.8 11.4.54/man8/wanboot_p12split.8
--- 11.4.51/man8/wanboot_p12split.8 2023-02-14 17:42:35.444561040 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man8/wanboot_p12split.8 1969-12-31 16:00:00.000000000 -0800
@@ -1,72 +0,0 @@
-System Administration Commands wanboot_p12split(8)
-
-
-
-NAME
- wanboot_p12split - split a PKCS #12 file into separate certificate and
- key files
-
-SYNOPSIS
- /usr/lib/inet/wanboot/p12split -i p12file -c out_cert -k out_key
- [-t out_trust -l id -v]
-
-DESCRIPTION
- The p12split utility extracts a certificate and private key from the
- repository specified by p12file, depositing the certificate in out_cert
- and the key in out_key. If supplied, the -l option specifies the value
- for the LocalKeyId that will be used in the new certificate and key
- files. p12split can optionally extract a trust certificate into the
- out_trust file if the -t option is specified. Use the -v option to get
- a verbose description of the split displayed to standard output.
-
-OPTIONS
- The following arguments and options are supported:
-
- -c out_cert Specifies a repository that receives a extracted cer-
- tificate.
-
-
- -i p12file Specifies a repository from which a certificate and
- private key is extracted.
-
-
- -k out_key Specifies a repository that receives a extracted pri-
- vate key.
-
-
- -l id Specifies the value for the LocalKeyId that will be
- used in the new certificate and key files.
-
-
- -t out_trust Specifies a file for receiving an extracted trust cer-
- tificate.
-
-
- -v Displays a verbose description of the split to stdout.
-
-
-EXIT STATUS
- 0 Successful operation.
-
-
- >0 An error occurred.
-
-
-ATTRIBUTES
- See attributes(7) for descriptions of the following attributes:
-
-
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- | ATTRIBUTE TYPE | ATTRIBUTE VALUE |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- |Availability |system/boot/wanboot |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
- |Interface Stability |Uncommitted |
- +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
-
-SEE ALSO
- attributes(7)
-
-
-
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 02 Nov 2017 wanboot_p12split(8)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man8/wanbootutil.8 11.4.54/man8/wanbootutil.8
--- 11.4.51/man8/wanbootutil.8 2023-02-14 17:42:35.480826265 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man8/wanbootutil.8 2023-02-14 17:42:51.429352165 -0800
@@ -11,9 +11,6 @@
wanbootutil [keymgmt] [option_specific_arguments]
-
- wanbootutil [p12split] [option_specific_arguments]
-
DESCRIPTION
The wanbootutil command creates and manages WANboot encryption and
hashing keys and manipulates PKCS #12 files for use by WAN boot.
@@ -24,18 +21,14 @@
wanboot_keygen(8) Generates encryption and hashing keys.
- wanboot_keymgmt(8) Inserts and extracts keys from WAN boot key repos-
- itories.
-
-
- wanboot_p12split(8) Splits a PKCS #12 file into separate certificate
- and key files for use by WAN boot.
+ wanboot_keymgmt(8) Inserts and extracts keys from WAN boot key reposi-
+ tories.
OPTIONS
- The options are supported for wanbootutil are the use of keygen,
- keymgmt, or p12split. The options for these subcommands are described
- in their respective man pages.
+ The options are supported for wanbootutil are the use of keygen or
+ keymgmt. The options for these subcommands are described in their
+ respective man pages.
EXAMPLES
Example 1 Generate a 3DES Client Key
@@ -51,12 +44,6 @@
-s /etc/netboot/172.16.174.0/010003BA0E6A36/keystore -o type=rsa
- Example 3 Split a PKCS #12 File into Certificate and Key Components
-
-
- # wanbootutil p12split -i p12file -c out_cert -k out_key
-
-
EXIT STATUS
0 Successful operation.
@@ -78,9 +65,8 @@
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
SEE ALSO
- attributes(7), wanboot_keygen(8), wanboot_keymgmt(8), wan-
- boot_p12split(8)
+ attributes(7), wanboot_keygen(8), wanboot_keymgmt(8)
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 27 Nov 2017 wanbootutil(8)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 22 Oct 2022 wanbootutil(8)
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man8/zfs_allow.8 11.4.54/man8/zfs_allow.8
--- 11.4.51/man8/zfs_allow.8 2023-02-14 17:42:35.518510916 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man8/zfs_allow.8 2023-02-14 17:42:51.475761747 -0800
@@ -60,7 +60,7 @@
clone subcommand Must also have the 'create' ability and 'mount'
ability in the origin file system
create subcommand Must also have the 'mount' ability
- destroy subcommand Must also have the 'mount' ability
+ destroy subcommand May also need the 'mount' ability
diff subcommand Allows lookup of paths within a dataset,
given an object number. Ordinary users need this
in order to use zfs diff
@@ -78,6 +78,8 @@
share subcommand Allows sharing file systems over NFS or SMB
protocols
snapshot subcommand Allows taking of snapshots
+ snapdestroy subcommand Also requires the 'mount' ability if the
+ snapshot is mounted.
groupquota other Allows accessing any groupquota@... property
groupused other Allows reading any groupused@... property
key other Allows load/unload of dataset key
diff -NurbBw 11.4.51/man8s/identity.8s 11.4.54/man8s/identity.8s
--- 11.4.51/man8s/identity.8s 2023-02-14 17:42:35.641901635 -0800
+++ 11.4.54/man8s/identity.8s 2023-02-14 17:42:51.503901146 -0800
@@ -62,6 +62,19 @@
addresses in X.509 certificates.
+
+ The following configuration properties apply to the cert-expiry
+ instance:
+
+ config/warn_days
+
+ If there is any host certificate that expired or is about to expire
+ within the configured number of days, the instance will enter
+ degraded mode. In such case, the instance will restart the cert
+ instance to re-issue the system identity certificate, if that is
+ the one that expired.
+
+
EXAMPLES
Example 1 Regenerating the local host CA and host keys and certificates
@@ -150,4 +163,4 @@
-Oracle Solaris 11.4 22 Feb 2021 identity(8s)
+Oracle Solaris 11.4 11 Nov 2022 identity(8s)
Sign up for free to join this conversation on GitHub. Already have an account? Sign in to comment